JP7460999B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with performance control means for controlling execution of performances.

For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters the starting hole, a determination is made as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player should be executed, and after the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a special symbol showing the result of the above determination is displayed as still. In addition, in the image display device equipped in the gaming machine, a performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols, and a performance symbol showing the result of the above determination is displayed as still with the special symbols being displayed as still. Some gaming machines of this type perform a performance called a cut-in in response to the operation of a performance button during the valid period (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-37828 A

However, the effects produced by conventional gaming machines were not necessarily very entertaining, and there was room for improvement in terms of increasing entertainment value.

Therefore, the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing highly entertaining effects.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol, and then stops and displays a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game should be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
a reservation means capable of suspending the right of judgment up to a predetermined number;
prior determination means for making a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game before the determination is made on the rights reserved by the reservation means;
A performance control means for controlling execution of the performance,
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the determination, a plurality of effect symbols are displayed in a combination that notifies that the special game will be executed during execution of a first variation that is a variable display of the special symbol performed in response to the determination. a hit notification performance, a first reach performance, a second reach notification performance in which the hit notification performance is more likely to be executed than the first reach performance, and a third reach notification performance in which the hit notification performance is more likely to be executed than the second reach performance. It is possible to perform reach production and
During the execution of a second variation that is a variation display of the special symbol performed before the first variation, based on the result of the preliminary judgment regarding the right of judgment corresponding to the first variation, the A first cut-in image suggesting that a special game may be executed can be displayed,
When executing the second reach effect in the first variation, what is the first cut-in image that suggests that the special game may be executed during the execution of the second reach effect? When displaying a different second cut-in image, displaying a third cut-in image having a different display color from the second cut-in image, which suggests that the special game may be executed. There are times and times when
When executing the third reach effect in the first variation, the second cut-in image and display suggest that the special game may be executed during the execution of the third reach effect. When displaying a fourth cut-in image having a common aspect, and a fifth cut-in image having a common display aspect with the third cut-in image, which suggests that the special game may be executed. When displaying an image, there is
It is better for the third cut-in image to be displayed during execution of the second reach effect in the first variation than for the first cut-in image to be displayed during execution of the second variation. highly likely,
It is better for the fifth cut-in image to be displayed during execution of the third reach effect in the first variation than for the first cut-in image to be displayed during execution of the second variation. highly likely,
The possibility exists when the second cut-in image is displayed during execution of the second reach effect and when the fourth cut-in image is displayed during execution of the third reach effect. are different from each other,
The possibility exists when the third cut-in image is displayed during execution of the second reach effect and when the fifth cut-in image is displayed during execution of the third reach effect. are different from each other .

According to the present invention, it is possible to perform highly entertaining performances.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a back view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing displays included in the gaming machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big prize opening. 13 is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal pattern hit determination table, and (E) is a normal pattern change pattern selection table. It is a table showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the processing at the time of starting the ball entry. It is a flowchart of normal figure movement processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. This is a flowchart of the normal pattern correctness determination process. 13 is a flowchart of normal pattern random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing. 13 is a flowchart of the normal pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of normal electric accessories processing. This is a flowchart of special diagram 1 operation processing. 13 is a flowchart of special pattern 1 waiting processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety judgment processing. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern 1 change. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 change interruption processing. 13 is a flowchart of the special pattern 1 determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 propriety judgment processing. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. 13 is a flowchart of the special pattern 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game). This is a flowchart of the jackpot game start processing. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. This is a flowchart of special chart operation status setting process 1. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 2 (small hit game). This is a flowchart of special chart operation status setting process 2. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart of a power interruption monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 3 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various settings for the performance. FIG. 7 is a screen diagram illustrating various screens displayed on a third display screen 72a. 13A and 13B are screen diagrams showing specific examples of a customization number notification image and a customization content notification image displayed on a third display screen 72a. A screen diagram illustrating a non-play reset selection screen displayed on the first display screen 7a. 13 is a time chart illustrating an example of the permitted periods for adjusting volume and light intensity, customizing effects, and selecting reset while not playing. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a winning wait command receiving process executed on the sub-control board 90. 3 is a flowchart (Part 1) illustrating an operation corresponding process executed on the sub-control board 90; 3 is a flowchart (Part 2) illustrating an operation corresponding process executed on the sub-control board 90; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of performance executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. A screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the first display screen 7a in a low-probability, low-base state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various performance modes in a low-accuracy, low-base state. 11 is a table illustrating the characteristics of each normal presentation mode. This is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating the effects in the fourth normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the effect in the fourth normal mode. This is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating the presentation in the first normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the effect in the first normal mode. It is a screen diagram illustrating the effect in the second normal mode. This is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating the effects in the third normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the effect in the third normal mode. This is a screen diagram (part 3) illustrating the effects in the third normal mode. An explanatory diagram for explaining various presentation modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 4. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating features of the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode. It is a screen diagram for explaining a character transition effect. FIG. 13 is a screen diagram for explaining the sky transition performance. FIG. 13 is a screen diagram for explaining panel transition effects. FIG. 13 is a screen diagram for explaining a long-term stay setting screen. It is a screen diagram for explaining an extension/termination selection promotion screen. This is a time chart (part 1) showing specific examples of presentation mode transitions and mode transition presentations. This is a time chart (part 2) showing specific examples of presentation mode transitions and mode transition presentations. An explanatory diagram illustrating the timing of occurrence of various cut-ins and the reliability of a jackpot. FIG. 7 is a screen diagram (part 1) for explaining the same color chance production and cut-in at the time of symbol pseudo stop, which are executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment. This is a screen diagram (part 2) for explaining the same-color chance eye presentation and the cut-in at the time of pseudo-stop of the pattern executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the embodiment 4. FIG. 7 is a screen diagram (part 3) for explaining the same color chance production and the cut-in at the time of symbol pseudo stop, which are executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of same color chance production and cut-in at the time of pattern pseudo stop. FIG. 13 is a screen diagram for explaining a button image movement performance. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the group preview and the button image movement effect.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In addition, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuating display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of executing a winning game that can award a predetermined amount of gaming profits (for example, prize balls) to the player. , an example to which the present invention is applied will be explained.

As shown in Figs. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 50, and the game board 2 is configured to be freely attached and detached from the game machine frame 50. Fig. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 is configured to have a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main frame 52 to which the game board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. The front frame 51 and the main frame 52 are supported on one side end side in the vertical direction (left side of the paper in Fig. 1), and are configured to be able to open and close with respect to the outer frame 53, respectively, with the one side end side as an axis. Also, from the closed state shown in Figures 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (released), or both the front frame 51 and the main frame 52 can be opened (released).

In addition, the front frame 51 includes a firing handle 60 for firing the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a firing handle 60 that can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the firing device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. The front frame 51 also includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively called (also simply referred to as a "performance button 63") is provided. The plurality of performance buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game performance. Note that the configuration of the production button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and may be any type that can detect an input from a player, or an input detection means (for example, , a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs an input. good.

In addition, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are installed so as to protrude toward the front (player side) of the front frame 51 and incline outward so that the player can easily view the display screens 71a and 72a. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described later, display game effects (characters, effect patterns, etc.), demo effects, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of the game state, game mode, reliability and explanation of the game effects, etc.), and information about the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) according to whether the game is being played or not, the game status, and the game effects being executed. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information among these pieces of information. In addition, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information among these pieces of information. In addition, any two of the image display devices 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may display the same information, and the remaining one may display different information. Note that the term "image display device" may simply refer to any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72.

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is being Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be able to rotate by a predetermined angle (approximately 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71, which is provided to protrude in front of the front frame 51, This configuration is to prevent damage caused by collision with the hall equipment (ball rental machines, inter-machine equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the gaming machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

The game board 2 has a game area 3, in which game balls launched by operating the launch handle 60 flow down, surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board lamp 5. A number of game nails 16 protrude from the game area 3 to guide the game balls. A ball return prevention piece 6 is also provided at the tip of the rail member 4, making it possible to prevent game balls once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device.

Further, near the center of the gaming area 3, an image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided. Note that the image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "performance pattern display area") in which performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "performance patterns") are displayed side by side in the left and right direction. ), and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set according to the game state (low-accuracy low base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state). A variable display is performed in synchronization with a variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) that is set as the main character of the game. In addition, the production pattern 8L is also referred to as the "left symbol," the production symbol 8C is also referred to as the "middle symbol," and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as the "right symbol."

The display mode of the performance symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A to be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-accuracy low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the starting port (second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first gaming state). In addition, the probability of determining the validity of the special symbol (the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination) is a low probability (also referred to as a "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all out-of-range fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, a game ball is fired into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the starting port (second starting port 21 or third starting port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which a game ball is fired into the left game area 3A (first game area) and enters the first starting port 20, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. has been done. That is, the normal state can be said to be a gaming state in which the first special symbol (performance symbol) is mainly displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are designed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Each of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is made up of a number of symbols (identification information) that represent, for example, numbers from "1" to "9". Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, center, and right performance symbols that are stopped (derived) in the performance symbol display area 7b, the result of the change display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also called the "first special symbol display section") (described later in FIG. 4) and the result of the change display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also called the "second special symbol display section") (the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment) are displayed (announced) so that the player can easily recognize them. Note that the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and any one (or all) of the performance symbols may be simply referred to as "symbol" or "identification information". The special symbol hit/miss judgment is also simply referred to as "hit/miss judgment" or "first hit/miss judgment". In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol win/loss determination is also referred to as the "win/loss determination execution means" or the "first win/loss determination execution means."

For example, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the performance pattern is displayed as a three-digit identical pattern (also called a big hit pattern) such as "777" (also called a "big hit pattern"). Also, if a small hit (second specific hit) occurs, the performance pattern is displayed as a preset chance pattern such as "135" or a small hit-only pattern such as "3★3" (also called a "small hit pattern"). Note that when a small hit occurs, the small hit pattern and the miss pattern may be displayed in the same pattern instead of the small hit pattern. Also, if there are multiple small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as a small hit, different small hit patterns (first small hit pattern, second small hit pattern) may be displayed to distinguish them, or the same (common) small hit pattern may be displayed to make it difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a miss, the performance pattern is displayed as a scattered pattern with at least one different pattern among the three patterns such as "637" and "373" (also called a "miss pattern"). This allows the player to easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment) by looking at the performance pattern that is stopped and displayed. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment by looking at the special pattern displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather by looking at the performance pattern 8 displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b. In addition, the execution mode of the performance pattern change display includes, for example, a mode of scrolling up and down, left and right, diagonally, etc., a mode of displaying the performance using only the first performance pattern display unit 7b, and a mode of displaying the performance using one or both of the second performance pattern display unit 71a and the third performance pattern display unit 72a in addition to the first performance pattern display unit 7b. In addition, there may be a mode in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect pattern display unit 71a or the third effect pattern display unit 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying game effects (design game effects) using the design patterns as described above, winning game effects (big win game effects, small win game effects) executed in conjunction with winning games (big win game, small win game), demo effects for waiting for customers, etc. are displayed. In addition to design patterns such as numbers, design images other than design patterns such as background images and character images are also displayed in the design pattern game effects, winning game effects, and demo effects. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the display mode on the design pattern display area 7b is different depending on the game state (state A, state B, or state C) and whether the game is played by launching a game ball into the left game area 3A or the right game area 3B. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 1 is a gaming machine that is capable of varyingly displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (at the same time), and this type of gaming machine is also called a "simultaneous variation machine (parallel variation machine)."

In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first performance reservation display area 9c (first performance reservation display section) that displays a first performance reservation 9a according to the number of stored first special symbol reservations, which will be described later. There is a second performance hold display area 9d (second performance hold display section) that displays a second performance hold 9b according to the number of second special figure hold memories, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first performance hold 9a or the second performance hold 9b in the performance hold display area, the first special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later. It is possible to clearly show to the player the stored number of stored special symbols and the stored number of second special symbols pending displayed on the second special symbol pending display 43b. Note that the display position of the first performance pending display section and the display position of the second performance pending display section may change depending on the gaming state, the gaming mode, or the game performance to be executed (such as a reach performance). In addition, only one of the first performance pending display section and the second performance pending display section (for example, only the performance pending display section corresponding to the main special symbol (performance symbol) depending on the gaming state) is displayed. You can also do this.

As shown in FIG. 3, a center ornament 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, surrounding the performance pattern display area 7b. A stage section 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the bottom of the center ornament 10. A hollow warp section 12 is provided at the left side of the center ornament 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides them to the stage section 11. Game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage section 11 are more likely to enter the first starting hole 20 described below than game balls not guided to the stage section 11. Furthermore, a decorative member 13 having an electric decoration member such as an LED (board lamp 5) that can be lit depending on the game status and shaped like letters, figures, etc. is arranged at the top of the center ornament 10.

In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that can move in response to game effects is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10, behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but, for example, when a game effect that has a relatively high probability of winning is executed, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (moves in a predetermined operating mode), covering the front of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. This increases the player's interest in the game and heightens their anticipation of a win.

A fixed winning device 19 is provided below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a non-variable first starting hole 20 that does not change the ease with which the game ball can enter. Random numbers and the like for determining whether the special pattern is a hit or miss are obtained based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is met, a hit or miss determination for the first special pattern (first special pattern hit or miss determination, first hit or miss determination) is executed, and the first special pattern begins to display in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special pattern is displayed stationary based on the result of the hit or miss determination.

Above the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, there is provided a gate 28 (also called a normal start port, passing port, ball entry port, or specific start port) through which game balls can pass (enter). Game balls that enter from the upstream side of gate 28 pass through gate 28 and flow downstream through game area 3. This gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also called a role link gate or operating gate) for starting a jackpot game. In other words, this gate is both gate 28 and start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether the normal symbol is a winner or loser is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variable condition) is established, a normal symbol win/lose determination (also called a "normal symbol win/lose determination" or a "third win/lose determination") is executed, and the normal symbol starts to vary, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol is displayed as a stop based on the result of the normal symbol win/lose determination. When the winning normal symbol is displayed as a stop, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second start hole 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that operates (opens) the movable member 23 to execute a normal symbol win/lose determination as to whether the second start hole 21 is opened is also called a "win/lose determination execution means" or a "third win/lose determination execution means". In addition, this gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a jackpot game. In other words, the sensor that detects the ball entering this gate is the gate sensor 28a, which is also the start gate sensor 29a.

As will be described in more detail later, when a ball passes through gate 28 (start gate 29), it only functions as start gate 29 when the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met (also called the "jackpot executable state" or "jackpot waiting state"). Therefore, if a ball passes through gate 28 (start gate 29) when the conditions (jackpot waiting state) are not met, control processing for normal symbols is performed and jackpot start processing is not executed. Also, if a ball passes through start gate 29 (gate 28) when the conditions are met (jackpot waiting state), the waiting jackpot game starts, and a round game begins in which a specified jackpot entry port (first jackpot entry port 30) is opened (ball entry possible state).

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first prize opening 30 is provided. A grand prize winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate) upper surface as a game ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right in the drawing). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning opening 30. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 is retracted toward the back side of the game board 3, so that the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 forming the game ball passage disappears. Thereby, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance part of the first big winning opening 30 will enter the first big winning opening 30. In this way, the opening/closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (opened), it smoothly moves the game balls flowing down to the first big prize. In addition to letting the ball enter the prize opening 30, when it is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting opening 21 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Incidentally, a game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entry opening) is configured to switch between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to change to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, below (downstream) of the first large winning hole 30, a second fixed winning device 25 is provided with a non-variable third starting hole 26 that does not change the ease with which the game ball can enter. Based on the game ball entering the third starting hole 26, a random number or the like for determining whether or not the special pattern is a winner is obtained, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is met, a win/loss determination for the second special pattern (second special pattern win/loss determination, second win/loss determination) is executed, and the second special pattern begins to vary, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special pattern is displayed stationary based on the result of the win/loss determination. In addition, the game ball passage branches (upper and lower) below (downstream) the first large prize opening 30, and an upper game ball passage in which the third start opening 26 is provided and a lower game ball passage in which the second start opening 31 and the second large prize opening 35 are provided are formed. In addition, as shown in Figure 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start opening 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third start opening 26, or flows downstream without entering the third start opening 26 and flows into the outlet 34. In addition, since the third starting hole 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entry hole) that can always receive balls, if a jackpot occurs during left-handed play (the so-called first jackpot) and the first jackpot play is played during right-handed play, the game ball can be placed (reserved) in the third starting hole 26 during the jackpot play, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the jackpot play ends.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a variable variable that changes the ease with which the game ball enters. A variable prize winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port" or "variable starting port") is provided with a second starting port 21 of the formula. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining the validity of the special symbol, etc. is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol (the first 1 special symbol validity determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an "opening/closing member"), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23. Through this opening/closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which there is a higher possibility of a game ball entering than the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, a game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, like the opening/closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. Flows downstream of the gaming area.

Furthermore, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance portion of the second starting port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), it can prevent the game balls flowing down. The ball enters the second starting port 21 smoothly, and when the ball is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is moved in any direction (second prize winning port 35 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to.

In this way, in a state where a game is played by firing a game ball into the right side area (right game area 3B), if the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed. The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in a state where a game is played by firing a game ball into the right side area (right game area 3B) (right-handed game), a game state where the game is mainly played mainly by the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (state B: low accuracy high A base state, a high-accuracy, high-base state), and a gaming state (state C: a high-accuracy, low-base state) in which the game is mainly played based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) of the second starting opening 21, there is a second winning opening 35 provided with a second big winning opening 35. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37. Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 and closes the opening/closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

Further, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second grand prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 is retracted toward the back of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening/closing member 37 that had been used for this purpose disappears from the entrance part of the second big prize opening 35. As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second big winning opening 35 enters the second big winning opening 35. In this way, the opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), the game ball flowing down can be opened and closed. Smoothly enters the ball into the second grand prize opening 35, and when in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out port 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. In addition, a game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entry opening) operates between an entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. It is possible to change to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In addition, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, multiple (3) general ball entry ports 27 are provided. The game area 3 in which various ball entry ports are arranged can be divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which a game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a left hit, and a hitting method in which a game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a right hit. In this pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the ball is aimed at entering the first starting hole 20 by hitting from the left. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-hitting game mainly focused on entering the first starting hole 20 by hitting from the left (determination of whether the first special pattern is hit or not).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 (first special symbol judgment), the jackpot game and after the end of the jackpot game (special game) (low probability high base state, high probability High base state or high-accuracy low base state) is when you hit the right hand and enter the gate 28, the first big winning hole 30, the second starting hole 21, the third starting hole 26, or the second big winning hole 35. It is a game where you aim at the ball. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in a left-handed game, the player first enters a jackpot standby state and becomes a right-handed game where the player aims to hit the ball into the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (starting gate 29) in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot game starts, and becomes a right-handed game mainly aiming at the ball entering the first jackpot prize opening 30.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state (state B), the main gate 28 (general gate) and the second starting port 21 It's a right-handed game where you aim to hit the ball. On the other hand, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy/low-base state (state C), it becomes a right-handed game aiming at hitting the ball into the third starting hole 26 and the second big winning hole 35. Become. In other words, the low-accuracy, high-base state and the high-accuracy, high-base state (condition B) are right-handed games in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol correctness determination) by right-handed batting, and is a high-accuracy, high-accuracy game. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 by hitting the ball to the right (second special symbol validity determination). As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting opening (object of special symbol validity determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

In addition, in the right play area 3B (second play area), a second outlet 34b is provided upstream of the gate 28, making it possible to adjust (reduce) the amount of game balls flowing into the play area downstream of the gate 28 of the right play area 3B. In other words, the second outlet 34b is installed upstream of all ball inlets installed in the right play area 3B, and the ball inlet ratio (entry ratio) of game balls into the installation area of these ball inlets can be adjusted by a game nail installed near the second outlet 34b. Furthermore, in the right play area 3B (second play area), a third outlet 34c is provided downstream of the second start opening 21 and upstream of the second large prize opening 35, which is a large prize opening for small wins. This third outlet 34c makes it possible to adjust the rate at which game balls enter the play area on the side of the second large prize opening 35 when a small win occurs, i.e., the rate at which balls enter the second large prize opening 35 during a small win game. The game nail provided near the third outlet 34c makes it possible to adjust the rate at which game balls enter the second large prize opening 35 (the rate at which balls enter).

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, second starting hole 21, first big winning hole 30, second big winning hole 35, and general ball entering hole 27, the respective ball entering holes A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" or "gaming profits") are paid out (awarded). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of gaming profits) paid out based on balls entering the first big winning hole 30 is calculated from the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set higher than the number of pieces (amount of gaming profits). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for each ball that enters, and the second grand prize hole 35 pays out 10 prize balls for each ball that enters. The prize ball shall be paid out.

As shown in Figs. 3 and 4, the main display 40 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) for displaying and stopping the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section) for displaying and stopping the second special symbol, and a normal symbol display 42 (normal symbol display section) for displaying and stopping the normal symbol (also called "specific identification information"). The main display 40 also includes a first special symbol reserved display 43a for displaying the number of hit/miss judgment information (first special symbol reserved) stored for the first special symbol, a second special symbol reserved display 43b for displaying the number of hit/miss judgment information (second special symbol reserved) stored for the second special symbol, and a normal symbol reserved display 44 for displaying the number of operation reserved (normal symbol reserved) stored for the normal symbol display 42.

The main display 40 also includes a win indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, a round indicator 45 that indicates the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit, a game status indicator 46 that indicates that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and a launch direction indicator 47 that indicates the launch direction of the game ball, i.e., whether it should be hit to the right or left. The main display 40 also includes a fluctuation status indicator 49 that indicates the fluctuation status of the first special symbol (c1), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (c2), and the fluctuation status of the normal symbol (c3). The display of the various indicators included in the main display 40 is controlled by the main control unit described below.

The first special symbol is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21. The second special symbol is displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the third starting hole 26. In the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are sometimes collectively referred to as special symbols. Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are sometimes collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve display device 43a and the second special symbol reserve display device 43b are sometimes collectively referred to as the special symbol reserve display unit 43.

In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed variably for a predetermined time, and then displayed in a stopped state. The stopped (derived) special symbol (stopped symbol) notifies the result of a win/loss judgment (special symbol win/loss judgment, big win lottery) based on the ball entering the first start hole 20, the second start hole 21, or the third start hole 26. The special symbol displayed in a stopped state is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol win/loss judgment. When the stopped symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (i.e., a big win symbol or a small win symbol), a special game (a big win game, a small win game) is played in which the first big win hole 30 or the second big win hole 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed in a stopped state. The opening pattern of the big win hole (the first big win hole 30 and/or the second big win hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p" and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment. For example, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is a 4R first big hit, the three "ijn" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. Also, if the result is a 4R second big hit, the four "jnkl" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. Also, if it is a miss, the two "lo" LEDs can be turned on and the rest are turned off. Also, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a-h" and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. As with the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is set to a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment (big hit, small hit, miss). In addition, before the special symbol is displayed in a static state (before the derived display), the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the display can be, for example, a predetermined sequence in which the LEDs are lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right.

In this way, the first special pattern display 41a and the second special pattern display 41b are each composed of multiple LEDs (display units), and while the first special pattern is being displayed, the multiple LEDs corresponding to the first special pattern display 41a are lit (blinking) in a predetermined sequence, and when the change time has elapsed, the first special pattern according to the result of the first special pattern hit/miss determination is displayed in a static display mode indicating the type of big hit (one mode if there is one type), the type of small hit (one mode if there is one type), or the type of miss (one mode if there is one type).

The change state indicator 49 is equipped with a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3), and the display unit c1 indicates the change state of the first special symbol, the display unit c2 indicates the change state of the second special symbol, and the display unit c3 indicates the change state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the display unit c1, which indicates the change state of the first special symbol, is composed of one LED (display unit), which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the first special symbol indicator 41a. During the change display of the first special symbol, the display flashes, and when the change time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the display stops in a display mode according to the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the display stops with the light off, and in the case of a jackpot, the display stops with all lights lit in red regardless of the type of jackpot. In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted (paused), the display stops with a yellow light.

Therefore, the display unit c1 is displayed as a flashing display during the change display of the first special pattern, is displayed as a yellow light display during the pause of the change display, is displayed as a red light display during the stop of the jackpot pattern, and is turned off (not displayed) during the stop of the miss pattern. As a result, by looking at the display unit c1 of the change status display 49, it is possible to grasp the change status of the first special pattern (changing, paused, stopped, hit or miss judgment result). In addition, since the change status display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer displays) than the first special pattern display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type etc. in detail, but it is possible to easily grasp the change status. In addition, the change status display 49 (display unit c1) functions as the second first special pattern display 41a. In addition, "interruption of the variable display" refers to a process that can be performed when the result of the simultaneous judgment of the other special pattern (second special pattern) is a jackpot, in which the variable display is temporarily interrupted and resumed after the cancellation conditions are met.

In addition, the display section c2 that shows the fluctuation state of the second special symbol, like the display section c1, has one LED (display section, display device) that is a smaller number of LEDs (display section, indicator) than the second special symbol display 41b. (display section). During the variable display of the second special symbol, it is displayed blinking, and when the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and stopped, in the case of a jackpot, all lights are lit red and stopped, regardless of the jackpot type, and in the case of a small hit, all lights are lit green regardless of the jackpot type (small hit mode) Stop and display. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the display is stopped with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c2 is displayed blinking while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, lit in yellow while the variable display is interrupted, lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and displayed in red when the small winning symbol is stopped. The inside is lit in green, and the light is off (not displayed) when the winning symbol is stopped. Thereby, by looking at the display part c2 of the variation state display 49, it becomes possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (fluctuation, interruption, stop, validity determination result). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the second special symbol display 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type etc. in detail, but the fluctuating state It becomes possible to understand easily. Further, the fluctuating state indicator 49 (display section c2) functions as a second special symbol indicator 41b.

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c1 of the fluctuating state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or "first sub-symbol." In addition, since the result of the first special symbol validity determination can be confirmed from the stopping state of the display section c1, it is also referred to as a "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol"). Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or "second sub-symbol." In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination can be confirmed from the stopping state of the display section c2, it is also referred to as a "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol")." In addition, the first state symbol displays a variable display and a stop display in response to the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol displays a variable display and a stop display in response to the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. Displays fluctuation and stoppage. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment for the first special symbol is a loss, the first state symbol will be turned off (missing mode) and will stop displaying, and if it is a jackpot, all lights will be lit in red regardless of the jackpot type (jackpot mode). Stop and display. The same holds true for the relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol.

Similarly to display unit c1, display unit c3, which shows the normal pattern fluctuation state, is composed of one LED (display unit), which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display device) than normal pattern display 42. While the normal pattern fluctuation is being displayed, it flashes, and when the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed, it stops displaying in a display mode according to the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment. Specifically, if it is a miss, it stops displaying with the light off, and if it is a hit, it stops displaying with a red light regardless of the type of hit. Also, if the normal pattern fluctuation display is interrupted (paused), it stops displaying with a yellow light.

Therefore, the display unit c3 flashes when the normal pattern is changing, lights up yellow when the change display is paused, lights up red when the winning pattern is stopped, and is turned off (not displayed) when the losing pattern is stopped. This makes it possible to grasp the normal pattern change state (changing, paused, stopped, win/lose judgment result) by looking at the display unit c3 of the change state display 49. Also, since the change state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer displays) than the normal pattern display 42, it is difficult to grasp the type of win etc. in detail, but it is possible to easily grasp the change state.

The display mode (pattern) displayed on the display unit c3 of the variable state indicator 49 is also called the "first state normal pattern" or the "first sub-normal pattern." The first state normal pattern is displayed as a variable and stationary pattern in response to the variable and stationary display of the normal pattern. Therefore, if the result of the win/loss judgment of the normal pattern is a miss, it is displayed as a stationary pattern with the light off (miss mode), and if it is a win, it is displayed as a stationary pattern with the light lit in red (win mode) regardless of the type of win.

In this embodiment, the special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a, second special pattern display 41b) and the change state display 49 are provided, and the change state of the special pattern can be grasped by either of them. Therefore, even if any of the LEDs of the special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a, second special pattern display 41b) having a large number of LEDs that can grasp the change state in detail breaks down (breakage, disconnection, etc.), it is possible to grasp the approximate change state by the change state display 49. The same is true for the normal pattern display 42 and the change state display 49. In this embodiment, the display of both the special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a, second special pattern display 41b) and the change state display 49 are controlled by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and performance symbols (display results of variable displays), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as the "win mode". ”, “specific mode”, “specific display mode”, or “specific display result”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of special symbol validity judgment is a failure is referred to as “missing mode”, “non-specific mode” , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result." In addition, the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot is also referred to as the "jackpot mode", and the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a small hit is also referred to as the "small hit mode". Also referred to as "hit mode". Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section), and the special symbol display section 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means."

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, or the third starting hole 26, various information (also called "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether or not a special pattern has been hit is acquired based on the ball entry, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. In detail, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory unit 85a as the first special pattern reservation (also called "first acquired information"), and if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the third starting hole 26, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory unit 85b as the second special pattern reservation (also called "second acquired information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory unit 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment 1 is four. The first special chart reservation memory unit 85a and the second special chart reservation memory unit 85b are also referred to as the "first acquired information storage means" and the "second acquired information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as the "acquired information storage means".

The reserved special symbols stored in the reserved special symbols memory unit 85 are consumed when it becomes possible to display the special symbols based on the reserved special symbols. The consumption of reserved special symbols means judging the random numbers for determining whether the special symbols correspond to the reserved special symbols, and executing the display of the special symbols to show the result of the judgment. Therefore, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the display of the special symbols based on the ball entering the first start hole 20, the second start hole 21, or the third start hole 26 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entering, that is, while the display of the special symbols is being executed or while a special game based on the judgment of the special symbols is being executed, the right to judge the special symbols for the ball entering can be reserved (reserved) up to a predetermined number (four each).

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special figures reserved, the first special figure reservation display 43a This displays the number of pending items. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of ``u□v●'', the display mode can be such that the LED for u is turned off and the LED for v is turned on in red. Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 2, the display mode may be such that the LED for u is lit in red and the LED for v is turned off, such as "u●v□". Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Further, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as a display mode such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of two LEDs "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figures holding, the second special figure holding display 43b It displays numbers. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of reservations is 1 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The normal pattern is displayed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detected by the gate sensor 28a). The normal pattern display 42 displays the normal pattern for a predetermined period of time, then stops, and the stopped normal pattern (stopped pattern) notifies the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The stopped normal pattern is one normal pattern selected from multiple types of normal patterns by the normal pattern hit/miss judgment. If the stopped normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a winning normal pattern), an auxiliary game (also called a "specific game") is played to open the second start hole 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also called an auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination depending on the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is a failure, a normal failure symbol such as "s□t■" in which only the t LED is lit is displayed. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately turn on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, this pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining the validity of a normal symbol based on the passage, and acquires various kinds of acquired information. is temporarily stored as a general pattern reservation in the general pattern reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of standard figures that can be stored in the standard figure reservation storage section 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage section 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the random number for normal symbol propriety determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the fluctuating display of the regular symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. can reserve (reserve) the right to determine the validity of normal symbols for the passage of a predetermined number of symbols.

The number of reserved regular maps is displayed on the reserved regular map indicator 44. Specifically, the reserved regular map indicator 44 is made up of two LEDs, "qr", and displays the number of reserved regular maps by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of reserved regular maps. For example, when the reserved number is 0, the display mode is "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), with both LEDs off, and when the reserved number is 1, the display mode is "q□r●", with the q LED off and the r LED lit in red. In addition, the reserved numbers 2 to 4 are determined in the same way as the first special map reserved indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described based on Figures 2 and 5. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 is equipped with a main control board 80 (also called the "main control unit", "main control unit", or "game control unit") that controls game profits such as special symbol hit/miss judgment, normal symbol hit/miss judgment, and game state transition, a sub-control board 90 (also called the "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "performance control unit") that controls performances executed as the game progresses, a payout control board 110 (also called the "payout control unit") that controls the payout of game balls, an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the performance pattern 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the performance display 102, the third performance hold display 103a, and the fourth performance hold display 103b, etc. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case that stores the main control board 80 is provided in the approximate center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an image control board storage case that stores the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided above this main control board case, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided above the image control board storage case. In addition, a payout control board case that stores the payout control board is provided below and to the left of the main control board case, and a power supply board case that stores the power supply board 109 is provided to the right of that.

A one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 81 is mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special pattern holding storage section 85 (first special drawing holding storage section 85a and second special drawing holding storage section 85b) and regular drawing holding storage section 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors connected are the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, and the general ball entry port sensor 27a. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means."

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided within the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided within the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The third starting port sensor 26a is provided within the third starting port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third starting port 26. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

Also, as solenoids, the second start port solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, and the second large prize port solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22. The first large prize port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening and closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening and closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. Furthermore, the first special pattern display 41a, the second special pattern display 41b, the normal pattern display 42, the first special pattern reserve display 43a, the second special pattern reserve display 43b, the normal pattern reserve display 44, the variable status display 49, the round display 45, the game status display 46, the launch direction display 47, and the win display 48 are connected to the main control board 80. That is, the display control of these main displays 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and loan balls, and a card unit 135, and is also connected to a launching device 112 via a launching control board 111 (also called the "launching control unit"). The launching device 112 includes a launching handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko game machine 1 (usually the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and enables ball lending based on information stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like when the player performs a specified ball lending operation.

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also called the "payout control microcomputer") that controls the payout of game balls from the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 to pay out prize balls or pay out loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81 and signals from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. The paid-out game balls are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launching handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launching handle 60. The launching motor 113 is then controlled to launch the game ball with a strength that corresponds to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer 91 (``performance control microcomputer'') that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the game production as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 to control the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the performance display device 102, the third performance hold display device 103a, and the fourth performance hold display device 103b. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores image data such as still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns, hold patterns, etc.) and background images. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, it executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 consists of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the and stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of special symbol validity determination) is shown by lighting/extinguishing or color of the corresponding LED. Stop and display. Similarly, the third effect pending display 103a and the fourth effect pending display 103b are each made up of two LEDs. Then, depending on the lighting/extinguishing of the two LEDs or the combination of colors, the third performance reservation display 103a displays the number of reservations displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c and the first special symbol reservation display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that shows the same number of pending items as the number of pending items. In addition, the fourth performance reservation display 103b is controlled to display the same number of reservations as the number of reservations displayed in the second performance reservation display area 9d and the number of reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. Ru.

The character design can be displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (performance pattern display section), or the movable decorative member 14 can be moved in front of the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section) to display the character pattern on the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section). By covering part or almost the entire part of the part), part or all of the effect pattern 8, the first effect pending display part 9c, or the second effect pending display part 9d may become invisible. be. Even in such a covered state, in order to be able to reliably check the fluctuating display and stop display of the performance symbols, the number of pending items, etc., these performance display devices 102, the third performance reservation display device 103a, And, a fourth effect pending display 103b is provided. The display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b is such that the display is always visible without being obstructed by the movement of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Furthermore, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be implemented in the voice control board 106, in which case the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be implemented in the voice control board 106, and sound data may be stored in the ROM. Furthermore, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may be made to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the light pattern data (data that determines the on/off state and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 based on the commands received from the main control board 80 from the data stored in the ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Note that the movable decorative member 14 is a so-called movable gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10, although only a part of it is visible in FIG. 1. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also called "drive data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operating mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and controls the operation of the movable decorative member 14 based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be implemented on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be implemented on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The sub-control board 90 is also connected to a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second effect button detection switch 63d, which detect when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). Therefore, when the player performs a specified input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the special symbol hit/miss judgment in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 will be described. The results of the special symbol hit/miss judgment include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the case of a "big hit", a "big hit symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of a "small hit", a "small hit symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of a "miss", a "miss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display section 41. When a big hit or small hit is judged, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. The special game executed when a big hit is obtained is called a "big hit game", and the special game executed when a small hit is obtained is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specific result) of special symbol validity determination, the winning type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol validity judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, different hit types (jackpot , including small winnings). In addition, the special game to be executed may also differ depending on the winning type, and the amount of gaming profit that can be earned by the special game may differ, and the gaming state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits include "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15R 1st jackpot". 5 jackpot," "2R 6th jackpot," and "2R 7th jackpot." In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 15 times. In addition, for "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 4 times. In the "2R 6th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is two. In this way, in all jackpots, the first big winning hole 30 is opened and the second big winning hole 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big winning opening for jackpot (variable ball entry opening for jackpot)".

In addition, the "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" shift the game state after the jackpot game ends to a high probability state (activates the special probability function), which will be described later. Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "special probability jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (special probability function) continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, the "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" shift the game state after the jackpot game ends to a low probability state (does not activate the special probability function), which will be described later. Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also called "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, for "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time saving" which sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time function" and does not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability low base state (state C). This high probability low base state continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this high-accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, the variation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is negative is set to be a long time (see FIG. 9).

The playability of the high probability low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as mentioned above, by playing right-handed in the right play area 3B where various ball entry ports are located, the ball will enter the third starting port 26. Then, a second special symbol hit determination is performed, generating a small hit, and it is possible to increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between big hits). Also, by making small hits occur frequently in this high probability low base state between big hits, it is possible to expect to acquire many game balls in a short period of time through small hits. In other words, it is an advantageous period for the player, and a period in which it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time-saving function" and "high base generation function" after the jackpot play ends. By activating the first special symbol time-saving function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is set to a shorter time than when the first special symbol time-saving function is not activated (low probability low base state, high probability low base state). In addition, since the second special symbol time-saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a longer time than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot plays becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of the "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low probability high base state ends when the next jackpot occurs or when the special symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times. When the special symbol variable display ends after 100 times, the game state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as described in detail later, in the low probability high base state, the right-hand hit is performed on the right play area 3B where the various ball entrances are arranged as described above, and the first special symbol hit is judged, and the game is played in anticipation of the next big hit.

Further, for the "4R third jackpot" and the "2R sixth jackpot", the "first special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" continues until the next jackpot occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability high base state (first special symbol time saving state) is set until the next jackpot occurs.

The high-probability high base state, like the low-probability high base state, is a period in which the first special symbol is judged by playing on the right play area 3B with a right-hand hit, and the player plays in the hope of hitting the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-probability low base state is an advantageous period for the player, in which the second special symbol is judged by playing on the right, and small hits are frequent, allowing the player to expect to win many game balls in a short period of time through small hits. Furthermore, there are more game balls that can be won in the high-probability low base state than in the high-probability high base state.

In addition, by executing a common game presentation (first game presentation: background, game mode, character image, reach presentation, etc.) in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game related to the "4R 3rd jackpot" (4R 3rd jackpot game) ends, and the low probability high base state after the jackpot game related to the "4R 4th jackpot" (4R 4th jackpot game) ends, it is made difficult for the player to recognize which game state they are in. As shown in FIG. 9, these game states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern. As a result, both game states are set as non-notification states in which the game state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (made difficult to recognize).

If the type of jackpot is a "4R 3rd jackpot", the high probability high base state continues even after 100 times of the special symbol changing display, and if it is a "4R 4th jackpot", the game state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state that is unfavorable to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol changing display. Therefore, in this non-notification state, regardless of the game state, the player plays in the hope that the high probability high base state will continue after 100 times, increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, in a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state, i.e., a high base state, the player can play without losing many balls (the rate at which the balls decrease is slower than in a low probability low base state).

Similarly, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot" and the end of the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-accuracy/high-base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he/she is in. do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", even after the special symbol was displayed 100 times, the high-precision, high-base state continued, resulting in "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, after the special symbols have been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays the game with the expectation that the high-accuracy-high base state will continue even after 100 games have passed, increasing his interest in the game, no matter which gaming state he is in.

In addition, for small wins that may occur as a result of the second special symbol validity determination, the number of openings of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is 6 times, and compared to other jackpots, the number of times the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is opened is 1 (and (total) opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed six times for 0.3 seconds, for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, compared to jackpot games (for example, 15R first jackpot game, 4R fourth jackpot game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small win game is set to be smaller. However, by generating small wins a plurality of times (many times) in a high probability/low base state between jackpots, it is possible to execute a plurality of small win games and obtain more game balls. In addition, in the case of a small win, the second big prize opening 35 is all opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second big winning hole 35 is also referred to as a "big winning hole for small winnings (variable ball entry hole for small winnings)". In addition, in the small winning game (small winning game), unlike the big winning (big winning game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of openings. In addition, the probability variable function will not be activated based on the occurrence of a small hit, and if the gaming state when a small hit occurs is a high probability state, it will be kept in a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs, If the game state is a low probability state, it will remain a low probability state even after the small winning game ends. Similarly, the time saving function and high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of a small hit.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the judgment of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and 35% for the 4R third jackpot. 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R 5th jackpot, 15% for the 2R 6th jackpot, and 35% for the 2R 7th jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is achieved by the judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later (second special symbol judgment), 15R It becomes a jackpot (15R 5th jackpot) and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In this way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than hitting the jackpot in the winning/failure judgment (first special symbol correctness/failure judgment) made when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, 3. It is more likely that it will be advantageous for the player (to obtain a large amount of game balls) if the game ball enters the starting hole 26 and the game ball hits the jackpot in the judgment (second special symbol judgment). It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth jackpot and the occurrence of a high-precision low-base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol validity determination (also referred to as "properness determination information")", and when a jackpot is achieved, The determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the "random number for jackpot type determination (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" or "information for symbol determination")". Note that the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol takes a value in the range from 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range from 0 to 99. In addition, the random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining the validity of a special symbol and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern information")." Further, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including a variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes values in the range from 0 to 198. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include the random numbers for normal symbol validity determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol validity determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 (normal symbol validity determination). Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 240.

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by combinations in which the probability fluctuation function (probability fluctuation function) for the special and normal symbols, the fluctuation time reduction function for the special and normal symbols, and the opening extension function of the second start port 21 are in an activated or deactivated state. The state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called a "high probability state", and the state in which it is not activated is called a "low probability state". In the high probability state (jackpot probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the special symbol hit/miss judgment is higher than in the low probability state (jackpot probability: 1/315). That is, in the low probability state, the hit/miss judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low probability state, but in the high probability state, the hit/miss judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit/miss judgment random number that is determined as a jackpot is large (see FIG. 8 (A)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will be a jackpot symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. Note that the means (main control unit) for setting a high or low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is a hit or miss (jackpot probability) is referred to as the "probability setting means."

The state in which the time-saving function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called the "time-saving state," and the state in which it is not activated is called the "non-time-saving state." In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol's time of fluctuation (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol's time of fluctuation in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table that is set so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state (see Figure 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of consumption of the reserved special symbols is faster, and effective balls entering the starting hole (balls that can be stored as reserved special symbols) are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot while playing smoothly.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, it is set as a "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. State A (low accuracy low base state) and state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. , high certainty, high base state). In state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed fluctuating. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds for a miss, 110 seconds for a jackpot, and 1000 seconds for a small win), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state (also called the "first condition state"). In addition, since it is in a low base state (first game state), it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, even if the player plays a right-handed game in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in state A, the game proceeds with a left-handed game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the special symbol variation time is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (parallelly) execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner in state A, the player can enter the game ball into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , it is possible to display the first special symbol in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in state B (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state), the right-handed game is performed because the player is in the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is activated. This allows the ball to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which are in the open state. In state B, like state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variation time of the second special symbol is a very long time. (600 seconds for a miss, 110 seconds for a jackpot, and 1000 seconds for a small win), so the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the first special symbol time-saving function is activated to enter the first special symbol time-saving state, and the first special symbol validity determination is executed more frequently than in state A, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, the state C (high probability low base state) shown in FIG. 9 is a state in which the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is the main focus. In state C (high probability low base state), the second special symbol time-saving function is activated, so by playing with the right hand, it is possible to play with the aim of getting the ball into the third starting hole 26. If the ball hits the third starting hole 26, the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed variably. In addition, the second special symbol time-saving function is activated, so the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed more frequently than in state A and state B, allowing the game to proceed smoothly. This makes it possible to execute the second special symbol hit/miss judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit/miss judgment.

In state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Since the symbol fluctuation time is set to a very long time (600 seconds for a loss and 110 seconds for a jackpot), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in state C, even if the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a pending memory related to the first special symbol correctness determination, the second special symbol correctness determination is It becomes possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that an unfavorable first special symbol validity determination will be executed.

In this way, states B and C are both states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in state B, like state C, the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol validity determination is the main part, and state C Then, a game state is entered in which the second special symbol validity determination is mainly performed. This results in a jackpot in the normal state of left-handed games (low probability low base state, state A), and after shifting to right-handed games, in the so-called consecutive winning period (right-handed state), the first special symbol validity judgment is performed. A transition is made between a game state in which the main character is played and a game state in which the second special symbol is judged as the main character, thereby diversifying the gameplay. In addition, since there are different types of jackpots (jackpot games) that can occur in the game state in which the first special symbol validity determination is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol validity determination is mainly performed, right-handed hitting While the game continues, different jackpots (jackpot games) are generated by shifting these gaming states. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game and increase their interest in the game.

When the second special symbol time-saving function is activated, that is, in state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also called the "second condition state"), the time for the second special symbol to change becomes short as shown in FIG. 9, so that the player can smoothly play (judging whether the second special symbol is a hit or not, and playing the second special symbol change) by playing with the right hand without reducing the number of balls held compared to playing with the left hand. In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time-saving function is not activated during the period when the second special symbol time-saving function is activated (the time for the first special symbol to change is made longer than in the normal state), but the first special symbol time-saving function may be activated. In addition, the number of balls held is maintained or slightly decreased in state B, and increased in state C.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (first special symbol time reduction function or second special symbol time reduction function) regarding the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the normal symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function operate when the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and when the gaming state is low base state (low probability low base state, high probability does not operate in low base conditions). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol validity determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the "normal symbol high probability state"). In other words, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is higher than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). A normal symbol correctness determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. .

In addition, in the high base state, the variation time of the normal pattern is shorter than that in the low base state. In this embodiment 1, the variation time of the normal pattern is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting hole 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment in the low base state is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and the second starting hole is in an open state during the opening operation. In addition, when the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment in the high base state is a hit, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). In addition, the closing time between opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening/closing member 37 is different in the low base state and in the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be one opening in 2.7 seconds, and the opening operation in the high base state may be three openings in 2.0 seconds. Also, the opening operation in the high base state may be six openings in 1.0 seconds, which is more than the number of openings in the low base state. In such cases, the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 is also said to be activated.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , the period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the frequency of execution of the first special symbol validity determination increases. As mentioned above, in a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

Further, if the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of openings, the lower the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting port 21. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short (1 second). In addition, since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state while the normal symbols are changing, the normal symbol changing time is the time when the game ball begins to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 becomes an open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 which is in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the materials are different).

Thereby, the speed of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the speed of the game torrent in the game ball path on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made gentler, or an inhibiting member (such as a protrusion) that reduces the flow rate may be provided. In addition, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and can be moved to the second grand prize opening. 35 is further reduced. In other words, in the high base state, even if there is a small hit and the second big prize opening 35 is in the open state (ball entry possible state), the game ball that has flown down will enter the second starting opening 21 and enter the second It is difficult to enter the ball into the grand prize opening 35. Further, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flown down to the second large winning port 35 from entering the second large winning port 35.

The high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, due to the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second starting port is more open than when the function is not activated. It is sufficient that the number 21 is easily released (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function."

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment 1, since the judgment of the win or loss of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the judgment of the win or loss of the first special symbol, the player may try to make the second special symbol change without making the first special symbol change. In other words, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility that the player will try to play right-hand hitting. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the change time (average change time) of the second special symbol is set to be extremely long compared to the change time (average change time) of the first special symbol, so even if the second special symbol is changed in the normal state (even if the ball enters the third starting hole 26), it cannot be displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to make the first special symbol change by playing left-hand hitting than to make the second special symbol change by playing right-hand hitting. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not being played (non-play state)" means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." Also, "a state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-play state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0."

In addition, in a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the frequency with which the second starting hole 21 opens increases, and the first special symbol time-saving function shortens the time for which the first special symbol changes, improving the efficiency of play by playing with a right hand. In such a case, it is more advantageous to play with a right hand to determine whether the first special symbol is a hit or not than to play with a left hand. In addition, in a high base state, the second starting hole 21 is more easily opened than in a low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting hole 21 than the first starting hole 20. Therefore, a right hand is used to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 21 while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is the trigger for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, due to the second special symbol time saving function, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the game efficiency in the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously by playing a right-handed game and determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), and the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changing for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are not operating, so the entry to the second starting port 21 is not activated. The pitch frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is less likely to be obtained in a higher base state. However, instead, the second special symbol correctness judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing between jackpots due to small hits that occur with high probability (small win probability: 420/630), and rather causes small hits to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (occurring multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by making the ball enter the second starting port 21 frequently by playing the right-handed game, the ball entering the second starting port 21 The player aims to generate the next jackpot by obtaining the prize ball for the target and determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not without greatly reducing the number of balls he has. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit right enter the second starting port 21, the game ball will not be awarded. The number of balls does not increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, the setting is such that about 75 to 85% of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, so unless the ball enters the other ball entry port, the high base If the condition continues for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, small hits are generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol correctness judgment based on the ball entering the third starting hole 26 by right-handed games, and the accuracy is high. The player aims to increase the number of balls held in a small winning game during a low base state, and aims to generate the next jackpot by making a second special symbol correctness judgment which is more advantageous than the first special symbol correctness judgment. In the pachinko game machine of Example 1, in the high probability low base state, the longer the period in which the next jackpot does not occur (the longer the period in the high probability low base state continues), the more small wins will occur. There are more opportunities (to execute a small winning game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of the game board configuration and game state]
As shown in Fig. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various ball entry ports are arranged in an optimal order from the upstream side of the game area, in the order of the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning port 30, the second starting port 21, and the second winning port 35. In addition, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in Fig. 3, when these winning ports are in a closed state, about 90% of the game balls shot into the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first large winning port 30, then flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, then flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 of the second winning port 35, and flow down to the outlet 34. If there is an open winning hole in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning hole and is discharged from the winning hole to the back side of the game board, and the entered game ball does not enter the game area downstream. Also, the remaining 10% or so of the balls that do not flow into the gate 28 enter the second outlet 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and are discharged outside the game machine. Also, by adjusting the angle of the game nails around this second outlet 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate at which game balls flow into the gate 28.

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from reaching the gate 28 due to the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) due to the normal symbol reservation becoming "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream side of the right game area, almost all game balls hit to the right can be passed through the gate 28, regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. Furthermore, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning openings.

When playing right-hand in a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not to open the second start hole 21. In the high base state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a short time (1 second), and the normal symbol hit probability is also set to a high probability (239/240) that almost always results in a hit, so that the movable member 23 operates and the second start hole 21 opens immediately (1 second) after the game ball passes through the gate. In other words, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and a normal symbol hit/miss determination is made and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second start hole 21 opens before the game ball that passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second start hole 21. In addition, the opening time of the second starting hole 21 is also set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, so as long as right-hand play is continued, the second starting hole 21 will close during the one second normal pattern change time, then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the one second normal pattern change time, then open once for 6.0 seconds, repeating this cycle (closed for 1 second → open for 6.0 seconds → closed for 1 second → open for approximately 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when playing a right-handed game in a high base state, the second starting port 21 will be in an almost open state, and most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 3B will be in the second starting port 21. He will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a first special symbol validity determination is executed. In the first special symbol validity determination, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the probability of a jackpot is 1/63, no small hit occurs, and the probability of a miss is 62/63.

First, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is incorrect, most (approximately 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B will be in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21, and the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball path that branches before the second starting port 21, and do not flow down to the second starting port 21, but enter the third starting port 21. The ball enters the ball 26 or flows into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol validity determination is executed continuously (with high frequency). In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by one ball entering the second starting port 21, the speed at which the balls are reduced is reduced and the first special symbol validity judgment is executed to determine the next jackpot. It is possible to aim. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is ejected.

Next, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the first large prize winning port 30 upstream of the second starting port 21 opens in a manner according to the type of jackpot shown in Figure 6. Also, the second large prize winning port 35 provided downstream of the second starting port 21 does not open during jackpot play. As a result, when a jackpot play begins, the game ball flowing down by playing to the right smoothly enters the first large prize winning port 30 without being obstructed by other winning ports such as the second starting port 21. Here, if the second starting hole 21 is located upstream of the first large winning hole 30, the game will transition to a low base state during a jackpot game. However, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 21 can be open even in a low base state, so that a game ball flowing down the right game area during a jackpot game will enter the second starting hole 21 first, and only the game ball that does not enter the second starting hole 21 will enter the second large winning hole 30.

Moreover, because only one ball is awarded for each ball that enters the second starting hole 21, the time required for the jackpot game is unnecessarily extended, with no benefit to the player. Rather, the game may become lengthy and not proceed smoothly, reducing interest in the game. Therefore, by locating the first large prize opening 30 upstream of the second starting hole 21 as in this embodiment, such a situation can be prevented, and the jackpot game can proceed smoothly. Furthermore, since the first large prize opening 30 is not open except during the jackpot game, the first large prize opening 30 does not prevent the ball from entering the second starting hole 21 except during the jackpot game.

Next, the high-certain low base state will be explained. The high probability low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is played in the high-accuracy-low base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination (normal symbol validity determination) is performed as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is also lower than in the high base state. (1/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost a miss, and the possibility that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is low. In addition, instead of this mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol correctness determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all results may be incorrect. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be in the open state in the low base state. Similarly, the winning probability in the high base state is 239/240.

In other words, in the high probability low base state, the probability that the second starting hole 21 will be open is set very low, so the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting hole 21 is unlikely to enter the second starting hole 21, and is likely to pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second large winning hole 35. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment will be a small hit does not change whether it is in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) or the high probability low base state. In other words, the probability of a small hit does not change regardless of the game state (small hit probability: 420/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment does not include a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment includes a small hit.

The game balls flowing downstream of the first big prize opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 are branched into a passage on the third starting opening 26 side and a passage on the second starting opening 21 side by the branching part. When the game ball that has flowed into the third starting port 26 side passage enters the third starting port 26, a second special symbol validity determination is executed. In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, there is a low possibility that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state, so the game ball that has flowed into the second starting port 21 side passage is All the balls do not enter the second starting port 21, but flow down to the second big winning port 35 and third out port 34c provided downstream of the second starting port 21.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment executed based on the ball entering the third starting hole 26 is a small hit, the second large winning hole 35 downstream of the second starting hole 21 opens in the opening/closing mode for a small hit shown in FIG. 6. Specifically, six 0.3-second opening operations are executed (closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds, total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that flows into the second starting hole 21 side passage passes over the top surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting hole 21 in the closed state, flows down to the second large winning hole 35, and enters the second large winning hole 35 that is open due to the small hit game.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning hole 35 are set to 10 prize balls for one entry, it is possible to increase the number of balls held during the high probability low base state by entering a ball into the second large winning hole 35 during a small win game. In addition, since the high probability low base state continues at least until the next big win occurs by the special pattern hit/miss judgment, the longer the high probability low base state continues, the more balls the player can increase the number of balls held. In addition, in the high probability high base state, the second special pattern time-shortening state is set and the fluctuation time of the first special pattern is set to a long time (first special pattern long time state), so the frequency of the second special pattern hit/miss judgment is higher than the frequency of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to win about 20 prize balls (2 entry balls) on average by the occurrence of one small win game. By having this small win game occur multiple times (a large number of times) in the period until the next big win, it is possible to increase the amount of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). This also means that the total balls won during the "consecutive win period" in which right-hand play continues can be calculated by adding the balls won in the small win game to the balls won in the big win game, making it possible to win a larger amount of game balls. This also makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The second large prize opening 35, which is located downstream (the furthest downstream among them) of the gate 28, the first large prize opening 30 for a large prize (exclusive for a large prize), and the second start opening 21, is a large prize opening for a small prize (exclusive for a small prize). By locating the second large prize opening 35, which is a large prize opening for a small prize, downstream of the second start opening 21, the number (proportion) of game balls that reach the second large prize opening 35 can be controlled by the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second start opening 21. Specifically, when a small prize game is executed, the opening/closing control of the second start opening 21 (time to open state, time to change the normal pattern, hit probability of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment) increases the possibility of a game ball entering the second large prize opening 35 in a high-probability low base state compared to a high base state (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state). In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a flow path is formed that does not reach the second large winning hole 35 unless the ball passes through the second starting hole 21 (without entering the hole), making the effect of controlling the opening and closing of the second starting hole 21 even more effective.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a low probability high base state where a small win game can occur, the second starting hole 21 is configured to be hardly open (it may be configured to be not open at all), so it is difficult to adjust the ball entry rate into the second large winning hole 35 when a small win game occurs by the ball entering the second starting hole 21. Therefore, a third outlet 34c is provided between the second starting hole 21 and the second large winning hole 35, and by making it possible to adjust the ball entry rate into this third outlet 34c, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate into the second large winning hole 35.

This also diversifies the gameplay, even with the same right-hand play, by providing a state (high base state) in which the player puts a game ball into the second starting hole 21 to maintain the number of balls held (including a slight increase or decrease) (or suppress the rate at which the number of balls held decreases) in the hope that the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment will be a big hit (a favorable big hit), and a state (high probability low base state) in which the player puts a game ball into the third starting hole 26 to increase the number of balls held by putting the ball into the second large winning hole 35 when a small hit occurs, in the hope that the result of the second special pattern hit/miss judgment will be a big hit (a favorable big hit), even with the same right-hand play. This also makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. For the player, the high probability low base state, which allows the player to increase the number of balls held, is a more favorable game state than the high base state. In addition, while continuing right-hand play, it is possible to transition between a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) and a high probability low base state, which also diversifies the gameplay and increases interest in the game.

The start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28, and is located at the most upstream position in the right game area 3B. This allows the game ball to pass through the start gate 29 at any time and start the jackpot game without being blocked from passing through the start gate 29 by the second start gate 21 or the like when the jackpot waiting state is reached. The start gate 29 and gate 28 may be installed separately, and in this case, the start gate 29 may be located either upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but must be located upstream of the first large prize opening 30, the second start opening 21, the third start opening 26, and the second large prize opening 35.

Furthermore, when a right-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the right game area. Furthermore, when a left-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (displayed) controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the left game area. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs "yz", and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the left gaming area by displaying "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on), which turns off both LEDs. can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the right gaming area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the identification information (special symbols, performance symbols) is displayed in a variable manner are "low-accuracy low base state", "high-accuracy low base state", " It is possible to control the game to either "low-accuracy, high-base state" or "high-accuracy, high-base state," of which the low-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state," and the high-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state." Also referred to as a "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to Figs. 10 to 46. The counter, flag, status, buffer, etc., which appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81, are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out the program of the main control main processing shown in Fig. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. As shown in Fig. 10, in the main control main processing, initial settings are first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), various flags, statuses, and counters are reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", i.e. "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial settings (S101) are performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and are not performed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "ordinary pattern," the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern," the first special pattern may be referred to as "special pattern 1" or "first special pattern," and the second special pattern may be referred to as "special pattern 2" or "second special pattern."

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt processing (S105) ends and until the next interrupt processing (S105) starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing (S103) is repeated. executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained using FIG. 11. In the interrupt processing (S105), output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands and the like outputted here include information regarding the gaming state, the result of special symbol validity determination, symbols as jackpot types, fluctuation patterns, and the like. Note that the command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), the detection signals detected by the various sensors (first start hole sensor 20a, second start hole sensor 21a, third start hole sensor 26a, first large prize hole sensor 30a, second large prize hole sensor 35a, general ball hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) attached to the pachinko game machine 1 are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. In addition, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects whether the surplus ball receiving tray 62 (also called the "lower tray") is full is also taken in, and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. This is performed both during the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). This gives randomness to the obtained values of various random numbers.

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the starting port sensor detection process (S204), the starting ball entry process (S205), the regular symbol movement process (S206), and the special pattern 1 movement process (S207), which will be described later. ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power outage monitoring processing (S210) are executed. Thereafter, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is ended. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit). Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection process (S204) will be described using FIG. 12. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol reserved balls (the number of regular symbols reserved, specifically, the counter that counts the number of regular symbols reserved) is value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process advances to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls for normal symbols (S303), a normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed, and the process proceeds to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been selected (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random number value (acquisition information, normal symbol acquisition information) is stored in an address space in the normal symbol reserved memory section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 that corresponds to the current number of reserved balls for normal symbols.

In S305, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a or the second starting port sensor 21a. Determine (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process advances to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls (number of first special symbols reserved, specific In step S306, it is determined whether the value of a counter provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 for counting the number of reserved first special symbols has reached four (the upper limit number). Then, in S306, if it is determined that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of reserved balls for special figure 1 (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is obtained. Processing is performed (S308) and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (label -TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area of the RAM (not shown), the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the random number value shown in FIG. 7(A)), and Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the third starting hole 26, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the third starting hole sensor 26a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that a game ball has not entered the third starting hole 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting hole 26 (YES in S309), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 (the number of reserved second special charts, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached four (the upper limit) (S310). Then, if it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. If it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (S311), a process for obtaining random numbers related to Special Chart 2 is performed (S312), and the process ends.

In the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), similar to the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special pattern hit/miss determination counter (label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7(A)), and these acquired random number values are stored in the address space of the second special chart reserved memory unit 85b according to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 2.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the starting ball entering process (S205) will be described using FIG. 13. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether the number of special map 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process moves to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special map 2 in S307 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process moves to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is read (S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is judged (S317). In S317, the value of the special symbol hit/miss determination random number counter (special symbol hit/miss determination random number value) among the acquired random numbers read out is judged (pre-judgment) as to whether it is a hit or miss depending on the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), and if the result of the judgment is a hit, the type of hit is further judged (pre-judgment). This judgment (pre-judgment) by S317 corresponds to a pre-judgment (so-called "reservation pre-read") of the hit/miss judgment (judgment of whether it is a hit or not) for the special symbol 2 reserved prior to the hit/miss judgment in the special symbol 2 hit/miss judgment process described later.

In addition, the prior judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is based on the jackpot judgment table (see Figure 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot judgment table for a high probability state, and if it is a normal state (low probability state), it is For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value matches the jackpot determination value based on the normal state jackpot determination table. In addition, as other pre-judgment aspects, as a fluctuation pattern information determination table that can determine fluctuation pattern information, there is a fluctuation pattern information determination table for normal states (for low probability states) and a fluctuation pattern information determination table for high probability states (for high probability states). It is assumed that the variation pattern information determination table has the following. In the preliminary determination, predetermined fluctuation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (the value of a random number counter for special symbol validity determination, etc.) and the fluctuation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state. It is possible to do so. From this selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether a game performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, etc.

Next, in S318, game information (pre-judgment information) related to the result of the judgment in S317, specifically, information indicating whether the random number value for judging whether or not the special symbol hits matches the jackpot judgment value (jackpot information), information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number value for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random number value for judging whether or not the special symbol hits matches the small hit judgment value (small hit information), information indicating the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), etc. are generated as a special symbol 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). Note that as the special symbol 2 start entry command, part or all of the value of the special symbol 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be sent directly to the sub-control board, or the value of the special symbol 2 acquisition random number may not be sent directly, and game information acquired based on the value of the special symbol 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-mentioned variable pattern information, etc.) may be sent.

In addition, by analyzing the special chart 2 start entry command sent from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is one. In addition to this, in this embodiment, by analyzing the special pattern 2 starting ball entry command, it is possible to determine whether or not the obtained special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot when judged in a high probability state, and It is possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot when judged based on the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as pending (production pending information), pre-determines the production pending information at a specific timing, and when it is determined whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It becomes possible to determine whether performance suspension information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored.

In addition, from the perspective of fraud prevention, among the obtained random values read in S316, the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol is not sent as is to the sub-control unit, but the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (Jackpot Generate command data as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, including information indicating the random number value for type determination), the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variable pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of preliminary determination. It is possible to set

Next, in S319, similarly to the process related to the above-mentioned special figure 2, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process moves to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls of special map 1 in S311 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is ended as is. The processing in S321 to S323 is similar to the processing in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read out (S321), A preliminary determination is performed on the read random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special chart 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Incidentally, the preliminary determination (pending pre-reading) in S322 is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process to be described later.

[General Action Processing]
After the start ball entry process (S205), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal symbol operation process (S206) shown in Fig. 14. In the normal symbol operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and each stage is assigned a "normal symbol operation status 1, 2, 3, 4". If the "normal map operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), normal pattern waiting processing (S402) is performed. If the "normal map operation status" is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), normal pattern changing processing (S404) is performed. If the "normal map operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal pattern determination processing (S406) is performed. If the "normal map operation status" is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric role processing (S407) is performed. The normal map operation status is initially set to "1".

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol waiting process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. 15. In the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be not "0" in S501 (NO in S501), a normal symbol hit/miss determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol change pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol change pattern selection process, by referring to the normal symbol change pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is a high base state (state B), a normal symbol change pattern with a change time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol change pattern with a change time of 3 seconds is selected. In addition, following the normal pattern variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal pattern random number shift process described below is performed (S504), then the normal pattern variation start process is performed (S505), and the process is terminated. In the normal pattern variation start process (S505), the normal pattern variation display is started with the normal pattern variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal pattern variation start process, a normal pattern variation start command is set to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal pattern variation.

[Normal symbol validity determination process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value (label -TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on the value "0" to "238" (S604), and the process moves to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is a low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) is selected in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(C). It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on a low probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on a table (with a winning judgment value of "0" to "119") (S603), and the process moves to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern correctness determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal pattern hit) or not (S605). A normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (ordinary figure hit) in S605 (YES at S605), the winning ordinary symbol (ordinary figure per symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the ordinary figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal pattern random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. 17. In the normal pattern random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal pattern reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each normal pattern reserved in the normal pattern reserved memory unit is shifted one position from the current position to the side to be read (S702). Then, the address space which is the storage location of the top reserved memory in the normal pattern reserved memory unit is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reserved is cleared to 0 (S703), and the process is completed. In this way, the normal pattern reserved is consumed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) will be explained using FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process is executed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the period has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining the validity of the normal symbol is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal design confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. 19. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether the normal symbol winning flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the normal symbol winning flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol winning flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether it is in a high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S903), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is an opening pattern that repeats 1.8 seconds of opening three times, as described above. Therefore, the second starting port opening counter, which counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened, is set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for state A and state C (for low base state) is set as the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. As described above, the opening pattern for state A and state C (for low base state) is an opening pattern in which 0.9 second openings are performed three times. Therefore, the second starting hole opening counter is set to "3". In S904, the normal operation status is set to "4" (S904), and the process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. 20. In the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether the normal winning end flag is ON (S1001). The normal winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start hole 21 has ended in the auxiliary game that was executed as a winning. If it is determined that the normal winning end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second start hole 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start hole is not being opened (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether it is time to open the second start hole 21 (S1003), and if it is determined that the opening time has not yet arrived (NO in S1003), the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second start hole (YES in S1003), control to open the second start hole is executed (S1004), and the processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is open (YES in S1002), it is determined whether it is time to close the second start port 21 (i.e., whether a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the second start port 21 was opened) (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not time to close the second start port (NO in S1005), the processing is terminated. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second start port (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006), the value of the second start port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and processing proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether the value of the second start hole opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated to open the second start hole 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal win end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), the normal win end flag is set (S1010), and the process is terminated. Note that the second start hole opening counter becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened (the opening operation of the movable member 23) three times during state B (high base state), and becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened three times during state A and state C (low base state). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal symbol win end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has ended for the number of times set in S903 or S906, so the normal symbol win end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal symbol win flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol waiting process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special pattern 1 movement process (S207) following the normal pattern movement process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be explained using FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. Then, if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) is performed, and if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), performs special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), perform the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), and if the "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and if the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the processing is finished. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. In addition, since a small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 action processing, but a small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. 22. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the number of reserved balls in special symbol 1) is "0" (S1201). In S1201, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in special symbol 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 (YES in S1201), it is then determined whether special symbol 2 is being played (S1207). Then, if it is determined in S1207 that special symbol 2 is being played (YES in S1207), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special chart 2 is not being played (NO in S1207), it is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed to be a standby screen (a demo screen for waiting for customers is being executed) (S1208), and if it is determined that the standby screen is being displayed (YES in S1208), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 validity judgment processing (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not being played" means that Special figure 2 is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls of Special figure 2 is "0". It means that. Of course, this means that the jackpot game and small win game related to special drawing 2 are not being executed.

[Special figure 1 validity judgment process]
Next, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be explained using FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 validity judgment process (S1203), first, the judgment value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation). The value (label -TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process moves to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is performing a variable display related to a jackpot, in determining whether or not the other special symbol is a jackpot, it is not judged whether or not it is a jackpot, but whether it is a small hit or a jackpot. It is considered either a miss (that is, it is not judged as a jackpot). In addition, since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, when the second special symbol is executing a variable display related to a jackpot, the result of the first special symbol validity determination executed during that time is: Everything will come off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special pattern 2 jackpot variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not display a variation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, i.e. It is determined whether the state is a high probability state (S1603). If it is determined in S1603 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) Judgment is made based on the table (the jackpot judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a judgment is made based on the jackpot judgment table for high probability state among the jackpot judgment tables (FIG. 8(A)) (S1605). In the jackpot judgment table for high probability states, the jackpot judgment values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is a "jackpot" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1610), and processing ends. In addition, in the case of a hit/miss determination related to the first special pattern, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special pattern, and in the case of a hit/miss determination related to the second special pattern, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special pattern. Also, if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is judged to be a jackpot, one of the following will be executed: 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, or 4R 4th jackpot. Also, if the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is judged to be a jackpot, one of the following will be executed: 15R 5th jackpot, 2R 6th jackpot, or 2R 7th jackpot (FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot judgment (S1604, S1605) is judged not to be a jackpot (NO in S1606), the process moves to S1607. In S1607, the losing symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot variation flag, the first special symbol is a first jackpot variation flag indicating that a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. and a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The corresponding flag is set in the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a fluctuation display related to a small hit (a fluctuation display in which the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed). The corresponding flag is set in the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation related to the jackpot is being displayed), the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed in the determination of the validity of the other special symbol. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols perform variable displays related to jackpots in parallel. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which too much gaming profit is given to a player in a very short period of time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling nature.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special symbol 1 validity determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is state A (whether it is a low probability low base state or not) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and if the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), refer to the state A jackpot table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state A and jackpot) and calculate the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). Note that once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected by the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), state A first reservation number out table (state A and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), and select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

In addition, if it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number removal table (Fig. 9), a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high possibility that a fluctuation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of balls held is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

In addition, in S1701, if it is determined that the game state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then it is determined whether the game state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) (S1708). If it is determined that it is state B in S1708 (S1708), then it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1709), a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the state B jackpot table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state B and jackpot) (S1710). In this embodiment 1, fluctuation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. In S1709, if it is determined that the special chart 1 big win fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B miss table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state B and miss) is referenced and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In this embodiment 1, fluctuation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

In addition, in S1708, if it is determined that the game state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the game state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708), then it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not (S1712), and if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the state C jackpot table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state C and a jackpot) (S1710). In this embodiment 1, fluctuation pattern P23 is selected. In S1712, if it is determined that the special chart 1 big win fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C miss table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state C and miss) is referenced and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In this embodiment 1, the fluctuation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1: Random number shift processing]
Next, the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special chart reservation memory unit 85a is shifted to the lower side (for example, to the address "0000" side when the first special chart reservation memory unit 85a is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the first special chart reservation memory unit 85a, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth reserved second special chart (if the upper limit number has been stored) is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process is completed. After the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1205) is executed, the special chart 1 variation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special pattern 1 variation start processing (S1206), the special pattern 1 operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variation display of the first special pattern.

[Special symbol 1 fluctuation processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be explained using FIG. As shown in Figure 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of Figure 22, see Figure 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the variation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 variation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the variation time of the special map 1 has passed (YES in S1901), the process moves to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process moves to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special pattern executed during state B (high base state) is decremented by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning OFF the state B flag, the game state transitions from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is in the low probability high base state, it transitions to the low probability low base state (normal state). Furthermore, if the state is in a high probability high base state, the state B counter is set to "10000", so even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation, the value of the state B counter will not actually become "0". In other words, the high probability high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In S1908, the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and other processing is performed, such as stopping the display of the special symbol changes based on the results of the special symbol hit/miss determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number (S1909), and the processing ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performed when a jackpot game or a small hit game related to special figure 2 is executed while the special figure 1 is being displayed. This is a process in which the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted, and when the jackpot game or small win game ends, the interrupted measurement is restarted. As a result, while the jackpot game or small win game related to one special symbol is being executed, the win/fail determination process and the variable display related to the other special symbol are not executed.

The special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) will be explained using FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON or not (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game related to special drawing 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON or not, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process is ended. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is finished. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

In addition, if it is determined in S2901 that the special symbol 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, that the variable display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 big win flag is ON (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special symbol 2 big win flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big win game related to the special symbol 2 is still being played, and the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special symbol 2 big win flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then determined whether or not the special symbol 2 small win flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special symbol 2 small win flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small win game related to the special symbol 2 is still being played, and the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special symbol 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special symbol 2 has ended, the special symbol 1 interruption flag is turned OFF (S2907), the measurement of the special symbol 1 change time is resumed (S2908), and the process is terminated. This makes it possible to resume the display of the change of the first special symbol (time measurement of the change time) that was interrupted.

Here, in this embodiment 1, the interruption flags include a special pattern 1 interruption flag (also called the "first interruption flag") indicating that the display of the first special pattern variations is interrupted, and a special pattern 2 interruption flag (also called the "second interruption flag") indicating that the display of the second special pattern variations is interrupted, and the corresponding flags are set (stored) in the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80.

[Special design 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is in progress is turned OFF (S2002), the special symbol 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the first special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in the special symbol 1, it is possible to indicate that the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is ended (the jackpot is confirmed) and the transition to the jackpot game is made.

In S2004, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined to be a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round counter value that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the case of one round per opening, one round is from the opening to the closing of the jackpot opening) is set to "15" (S2005), a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006), the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2007), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so the round counter value is set to "4" (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. In addition, a stop command is sent to the sub-control board 90 at the timing when the special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner stops. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 is able to know that the variable display of the special symbol has ended. This puts the board into a jackpot waiting state. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special symbol 1 jackpot variable flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the jackpot game nor the small jackpot game will start, i.e., the variable display is related to a miss, so the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "1" (S2009) and processing ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as a jackpot flag, a special figure 1 jackpot flag ("first jackpot A special figure 2 jackpot flag (also called a "second jackpot flag") which indicates that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a jackpot game is executed, a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, the special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as the "small hit flag") indicates that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a small hit and the small win game related to the small win is being executed. When a small winning game is executed, a small winning flag corresponding to the small winning flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamps are lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 4R second jackpot, the display mode becomes "2R△4R▲15R△" (for example, ▲: lights on, △: lights off). Next, the special figure 2 movement process (S211) etc. will be explained using FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 movement process (S211), the special figure 1 movement process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), etc., a simplified explanation will be given below.

[Special diagram 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special symbol 2 operation process (S208) is processed in the same manner as the special symbol 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 operation process (S208) following the special symbol 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 is capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special symbol 1 operation process and the special symbol 2 operation process. That is, the consumption of the first special symbol reservation and the consumption of the second special symbol reservation ("the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol", "the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol") are capable of being executed in parallel. In addition, in this embodiment 1, a hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the second starting hole (second special pattern hit/miss judgment) is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more profitable for the player (larger amount of profit that can be obtained) than a hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the first starting hole (first special pattern hit/miss judgment) (Figure 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) is performed, and if "special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is performed, and if the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Perform accessory processing 1 (S1108), and if "Special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109). In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol validity determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric device processing 1 (S1108) is common to the special device 1 operation processing (S206) and the special device 2 operation processing (S211), and the special electric device processing 2 (S1109) is only for the special device 2 operation processing (S211). This is because the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 1 can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, but cannot execute the jackpot game related to the first special symbol and the jackpot game related to the second special symbol in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment does not include a small hit, but in another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment may include a small hit. In this case, just like the big win game, the small win game related to the first special symbol and the small win game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 validity judgment process]
The special figure 2 validity determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special symbol reservation storage section 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reservation) is Read out the stored random number counter value (label -TRND-A) for special symbol validity determination. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol validity determination is not a jackpot (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol validity determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small winning symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small winning fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processes are the same as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254) follows the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (S1401 to S1420). )I do. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, refer to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. to select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small win, when it is determined that the small win variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small win table according to the gaming state.

Furthermore, in state C, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (determination of the validity of the second special symbol). Therefore, in state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) of the second special symbol than variation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (that can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Moreover, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in state A and state B, the game is mainly performed based on the variable display of the first special symbol (determination of validity of the first special symbol). Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol. (feasible) fluctuation patterns can be selected. Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (few types). Moreover, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

In addition, since states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is not activated, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is It is set for a long time. Specifically, in states A and B, when the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the result of the validity determination is a jackpot, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds. (P12 or P20). This is set to a shorter variation time than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot in state A. Further, in state B, the variable time is set to be shorter than the longest variable time that is set as the variable display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot.

In states A and B, the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is not the main hit/miss judgment, but if the fluctuation time is set too long, there is a possibility that the player who made the hit/miss judgment will end the game without actually playing the jackpot game related to that jackpot. Therefore, when the hit/miss judgment results in a jackpot, rather than setting an unnecessarily long fluctuation time, a fluctuation time that is shorter than the fluctuation time (the longest) set for the main first special symbol is set. In this way, when the second special symbol hit/miss judgment results in a jackpot, a fluctuation time is set that allows the player to wait, and the player is not disadvantaged by not being able to earn the profits that would have been made from the jackpot that he or she had worked so hard to win. Also, this type of control is used because the probability of a jackpot occurring is low and the profits that can be obtained are large.

Further, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main character in state B. Of the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to a longer variable display time than the case where it is a jackpot or a miss. Set.

In states A and B, the main focus is on the first special symbol hit/miss judgment, which does not include a small hit as a result of the hit/miss judgment, so it is undesirable for small hits to occur frequently due to the execution of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, a malicious player may execute the second special symbol hit/miss judgment despite the game state being mainly based on the first special symbol hit/miss judgment, and may obtain a game profit through a small hit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed play should be performed, there is a risk of unfairly obtaining a game profit through inappropriate play, such as by playing right-handed. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment, which is not the main focus, is a small hit, the variable time is set to a long time (the longest time), thereby preventing small hits (small hit play) from occurring frequently. In addition, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small hit play is not very large, there is no great damage to the player who generated the small hit.

In addition, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a miss, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer fluctuation time than the longest fluctuation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state A. Also, it is set to a longer fluctuation time than the longest fluctuation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state B. Also, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol, which is not the main symbol in states A and B, is set to a shorter fluctuation display time than when the hit/miss judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit and longer than when it is a big hit. By setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a longer time when the hit/miss judgment result of the second special symbol is a miss, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is reduced, and it is prevented that the player plays inappropriately, such as playing right-handed in a game state where left-handed play should be played. Alternatively, the variable time for a jackpot and a miss may be the same (for example, both may be 110 seconds, or both may be 600 seconds).

After the variation pattern is selected in this special chart 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), other processes (S1404) are performed, and this process ends. In other processes (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special pattern 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls for the special pattern 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special pattern reserved memory unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the second special pattern reserved memory unit 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number has been stored) the RAM area corresponding to the fourth reserved second special pattern is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process is completed. After the special pattern 2 random number shift process (S1255) is executed, the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1256) in FIG. 31 is executed. In the special pattern 2 variation start process (S1256), the special pattern 2 operation status is set to "2" and the special pattern 2 variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variation display of the second special pattern.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation processing]
The special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104) shown in FIG. 27 (S1951 to S1959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special Chart 2 Change Interruption Processing]
The special chart 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in Figure 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same manner as the special chart 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in Figure 28. Therefore, detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special design 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the jackpot type (round counter setting process) and the special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. Although the processing when it is determined that it is ON is different, it is as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special Electric Device Processing 1 (Big Hit Game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is then determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is ON when the player launches a game ball into the right game area 3B at any timing in the jackpot waiting state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. After the special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol and a jackpot is confirmed, the jackpot start flag is turned ON by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (a round game starts). If the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the jackpot is confirmed, the game machine remains in a jackpot standby state in which a jackpot can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a break to go to the toilet, have a drink, make a phone call, etc. After the break ends, the player can launch the game ball at any timing of his/her choice and pass the game ball through the start gate 29 to proceed with the jackpot game. The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the openings of the big prize winning devices (first big prize winning devices 31) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended).

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it time to open the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass through the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a big prize opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) depending on the type of jackpot.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round is the specified maximum number of balls entering (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30), that is, whether or not the grand prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the terminal (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls entered (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process is performed to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the round counter value is "0" (YES in S2115), then as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), the jackpot ending period is started (S2117), the jackpot ending flag is set ON (S2118), and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot ending flag is ON (YES in S2103), then the final round has ended, and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), then the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game status setting process described below is performed (S2121), the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122), the jackpot start flag is turned OFF (S2123), special chart operation status setting process 1 described below is performed (S2124), and the process ends.

[Jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON or not (S2151). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot waiting state (NO in S2151), it is then determined whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (S2152). If it is determined that the probability variable flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variable flag is turned OFF (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2154. In S2154, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON or not (S2103), and if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. In other words, in order to control the state to a low probability and a low base state during the execution of the jackpot game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the jackpot game (round game).

Further, if it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. Further, if it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the starting gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the starting gate (YES in S2156), the The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the starting gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot waiting state. Further, in S2151, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. This allows the player to start (advance) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the gaming state setting process (S2121) will be explained using FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as mentioned above, five types of variable probability jackpots are 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot, and in S2201, these jackpot games are It is determined whether it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, if it is determined that the game that ended this time is a probability variable jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then, if the finished jackpot game is either a 4R 3rd jackpot or a 2R 6th jackpot, Determine whether there is one (S2203).

If it is determined in S2203 that the jackpot game that has ended is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "10000" (S2205), and processing ends. As a result, a high base state of up to 10,000 times is set after the jackpot game ends, resulting in a high probability high base state. Since it is not possible to execute the variable display of the special pattern 10,000 times during the business hours of an amusement arcade in one day, setting the state B counter to "10,000" essentially means that the high base state (state B) will continue until the next jackpot occurs. Note that instead of controlling state B to set the number of times, such as "10,000," a control may be used to maintain the high base state (state) until the next jackpot occurs.

On the other hand, if S2203 determines that the jackpot game that has ended is neither the 4R 3rd jackpot nor the 2R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, if it determines that the jackpot game that has ended is either the 15R 1st jackpot, the 4R 2nd jackpot, or the 15R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), the state B flag remains OFF and processing ends. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability low base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that what has ended is not a sure jackpot, i.e., a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2207), and processing ends. As a result, a high base state of 100 times is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the state becomes a low probability high base state.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2124) will be explained using FIG. 42. In special pattern operation status setting processing 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON or not (S3001), and the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is a special pattern. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing will be executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3001) ), the special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Special Electric Device Processing 2 (Small Win Game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether the small win end flag is ON (S2301). The small win end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the large prize winning device (second large prize winning device 36) have been completed in the small win game. If it is determined that the small win end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the large prize winning port (second large prize winning port 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the large prize winning port is not being opened (NO in S2302), it is determined whether it is time to open the large prize winning port (second large prize winning port 35), that is, whether the opening time of the small win has passed and it has reached the time to start the first opening operation, or whether the interval time between multiple openings has passed and it has reached the time to start the next opening operation (S2303). In addition, for the small win game, regardless of whether the start gate is passed, the small win game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has passed after the small win symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. In other words, the player can freely determine the start time of the big win game by the start gate, but cannot freely determine the start time of the small win.

In S2303, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big prize opening (YES in S2303), the second big winning opening 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see Figure 6) (S2304), and finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the 6 opening operations, that is, the 6th time. It is determined whether the sum of all the game balls entered in the release operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of entered balls (10 balls) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the grand prize opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the large prize opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number (10 balls) (YES in S2306), the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small prize end process of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the large prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is closed (S2308), the value of the small prize opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small prize opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small prize opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process ends as it is in order to start the next opening operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to small win ending processing in S2311. In S2311, as the small win ending processing that ends the small win game, a small win ending command is set (S2311), the small win ending period is started (S2312), a small win ending flag is set (S2313), and the process ends. The small win opening counter becomes "0" when the large prize opening has been opened six times.

In addition, if it is determined in S2301 that the small win end flag is ON (YES in S2301), six opening operations have ended (or the specified number of game balls have entered), so it is determined whether the ending time of the small win has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small win end flag is turned OFF (S2316), special chart operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is terminated. By generating a small win game in a high probability low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big win while increasing the number of balls held, increasing the interest in the game. Note that the probability change flag and state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON when starting a small win game. In addition, when the small win game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) does not change before and after the small win game is executed.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be explained using FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON or not (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time. If it is determined that it is related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special symbol 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. In addition, in this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit, the special symbol 1 small win flag will not be turned ON. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 small win flag is ON, that is, the small winning game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3101). ), the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special symbol 2 operation process (S208). As shown in Fig. 45, in the reserved ball number process (S209), the reserved ball number of special symbol 1, the reserved ball number of special symbol 2, and the reserved ball number of normal symbols stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are first read (S2501). Next, the reserved ball number data (reserved ball number command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball count process (S209) followed by the power off monitoring process (S210). As shown in Fig. 46, in the power off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power off signal has been input (S2601), and if it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a power off signal input (YES in S2601), data regarding the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in a special mode, whether or not it is a winning game, how many reserved balls there are, how many times the special mode/time reduction is remaining, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then the loop process (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt process (Fig. 11).

As explained in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 1 has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thereby has unique effects not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, or effects that are more remarkable than conventional pachinko gaming machines. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 1, a high probability state occurs (a bonus is awarded) based on a jackpot being determined in the special pattern hit/miss determination (the first special pattern (also called "first information") or the second special pattern (also called "second information") being stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern (also called "specific display mode")), and the high probability state (bonus) ends when a predetermined condition is met.

The process of granting this high probability state (benefit) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be called the "benefit granting means." Note that the first special symbol and performance symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and performance symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), changing and stopping to show the same win/loss determination result, so "the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) stops as a jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the performance symbol stops as a winning performance symbol (specific display mode)."

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be explained based on FIGS. 47 to 52. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the production control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power failure monitoring process (S209) by the gaming control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, data related to performance control in the event of a power outage such as a power outage is backed up. For this reason, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after recovering from a power outage such as a power outage (returning from a power outage), the effect will be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. The state returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed updating process (S4005), the values of various performance determining random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for performance determination includes a random number for determining a variable performance that determines the mode of performance symbol game performance to be executed (variable performance pattern), a random number for determining a preview performance that determines a preview performance, and a random number for determining a performance symbol that determines a performance symbol. There are random numbers, etc. The random number updating method can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, the random numbers may be added in increments of 2 instead of incrementing them in increments of 1. The random number for performance determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing may be, for example, when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball command) notifying that a starting ball has arrived, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball entering command) notifying the start of fluctuation. This can be done when a fluctuation start command (fluctuation start command) is sent, or when a fluctuation effect pattern to be described later is determined. The acquired random number for effect determination is stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also called the "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the control board that is the corresponding command transmission destination among the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command executes various effects (such as effect pattern game effects and special game effects related to winning games) using various performance devices (such as the image display device, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the movable decorative member 14) according to the received command. The performance control microcomputer 91 then permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, it is possible to execute the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010). By executing these control processes, it is possible to control the display of the performance patterns and the like executed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of the movable decorative members, and control the sound output from the speaker, etc.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be explained using FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or not, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be explained using FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the production button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) that outputs lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and outputs drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). Note that the lamp data and drive data are created by a 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. 50. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), a received command analysis process (S4302) is executed, which will be described later. Next, a switch state acquisition process is executed (S4303) in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and a switch process is executed (S4304) in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are set based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process. After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the performance are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to Fig. 51. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start-entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a start-entry command has not been received (NO in S4401), it proceeds to the process of S4403, and if it is determined that a start-entry command has been received (YES in S4401), it performs the performance hold information storage process (S4402) and proceeds to the process of S4403. In the effect pending information storage process (S4402), various information (game information such as pre-judgment results, random number values for determining the type of big win, and random number values for the change pattern) included in the start ball entry command (special symbol 1 start ball entry command or special symbol 2 start ball entry command) received in S4401 is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls at the time of transmission and reception of the start ball entry command (command generation time). For example, if the received start ball entry command is a special symbol 1 start ball entry command corresponding to the reserved ball number "4" of special symbol 1, information such as the pre-judgment results and the type of win included in the special symbol 1 start ball entry command is stored as special symbol 1 effect pending information in an area corresponding to the reserved number 4 in the special symbol 1 effect pending information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as variable effects, notice effects, and effect modes, which will be described later. The storage contents (performance pending information) of the performance pending information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are the same as the storage contents (acquired information) of the special chart pending storage area (first special chart pending storage area, second special chart pending storage area) in the main control board (main control unit) 80. For this reason, the performance pending information storage area in the sub-control board 90 can also be called an "acquired information storage means."

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation production start process ( S4404) and moves to the process of S4405, and if it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process moves to the process of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the fluctuation performance is started. Performs variable performance termination processing to be terminated (S4406). In the fluctuating performance end process (S4406), a fluctuating performance end command for stopping and displaying the performance symbol 8 and ending the fluctuating performance is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 that was being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is stopped and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable effects refer to various effects performed in accordance with the variable display of special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether a winning game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related commands are commands sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games), and specifically, the commands are commands that are sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games). ), a round start command that is sent when a round starts, a round end command that is sent when a round ends, an ending command that is sent when a jackpot game ends, and the first big prize opening in a round game. This applies to the 1st grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering 30, the 2nd grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering the 2nd grand prize opening in a small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process moves to S4409, and if it has been received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to execution of performance (big hit game performance, small win game performance) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening performance command that specifies an opening performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the received command is a round start command, the command A round performance command that specifies a round performance according to the round specified based on the round is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending that specifies an ending performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command to the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a big winning hole entry command (1st big winning hole entry command, 2nd big winning hole entry command), the big winning hole (1st big winning hole ball entry command) specified based on the command A ball entering performance command that specifies a ball entering performance according to the ball entering the opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 is set in the sub output buffer. When the various performance commands related to the set winning games are sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 controls the opening performance and the round according to the progress of the winning games. Performances, ball entering performances, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed to end this process. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variable performance start processing]
Next, the variable performance start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variable performance start process (S4404), first, a random number process for determining performance (S4501) is performed to acquire various random numbers for determining performance, such as a random number for determining variable performance, a random number for determining notice performance, and a random number for determining performance patterns. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variable start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the performance pattern game performance (variable performance) to be executed, the mode of the notice performance (including the presence or absence of a notice performance), the performance pattern to be displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command (information that designates a fluctuation pattern) that designates the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variation pattern designation command includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. It includes the result, symbol information specifying the jackpot type, etc. (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are variable pattern designation commands that correspond to the first special symbol and those that correspond to the second special symbol, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, the production symbol game production to be started this time It becomes possible to determine whether the (fluctuation display of performance symbols) is related to special figure 1 or special figure 2. Incidentally, the variable pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in other processes other than the variable performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is used to determine the performance mode to be executed. The mode status is a value between "1" and "5", and each value is assigned to a performance mode A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to performance mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to performance mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to performance mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to performance mode D, and mode status "5" corresponds to performance mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to identify the current performance mode.

Here, the presentation mode refers to the form of presentation mainly based on the image display device 7, and when the presentation mode is different, some or all of the presentation forms of the game presentation such as the notice presentation and the reach presentation are different. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the presentation mode, such as the form of the presentation pattern 8 (for example, the pattern design, the number design, etc.) being different, or the characters, items, and background images that appear being different. In addition, the presentation pattern game presentation can also be executed in a form according to the presentation mode, and when multiple game presentations (preview presentations, reach presentations, etc.) are provided, it is possible to execute different game presentations depending on the presentation mode. In this embodiment, presentation modes A and B are executed when the game is controlled to a low-probability low base state, presentation modes C and D are executed when the game is controlled to a high-probability low base state, and presentation mode E is executed when the game is controlled to a low-probability high base state and when the game is controlled to a high-probability high base state. Therefore, when the presentation mode is any of A to D, the player can understand whether the current game state is a low-probability low base state or a high-probability low base state by checking the presentation mode. On the other hand, when the presentation mode is E, even if the player checks the presentation mode, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current game state is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. In that sense, presentation mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. are used to set a variable presentation pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice presentation determination table for determining the pattern of the variable presentation (variable presentation pattern, presentation pattern game presentation) controlled mainly by the sub-control unit 90 (S4504). Specifically, the variable presentation pattern determination table and the notice presentation determination table to be used are set based on the mode status (current presentation mode) referred to in S4503 and the variable presentation designation command received from the main control unit 80. That is, a plurality of variable presentation pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice presentation determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable presentation pattern determination table and a notice presentation determination table are set from them based on the game state (presentation mode), etc. For example, if the variable pattern information designated by the received variable pattern designation command is "P1 (variable pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the jackpot variable presentation pattern determination table and the notice presentation determination table corresponding to the current presentation mode are set as the variable presentation pattern determination table. The variable presentation pattern determination table is primarily used to determine the execution mode of the presentation pattern game presentation (such as the variation mode of the presentation pattern), and multiple variable presentation pattern determination tables (not shown) corresponding to the presentation mode (mode status) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In S4504, from among these variable presentation pattern determination tables, a table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variable effect obtained in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern that matches the specified variable pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation performance pattern, the variation mode of the performance symbol 8 (execution mode of the performance symbol game performance) mainly displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production symbol game production, when performing a reach production (design game production with reach effect) or when performing a character production using a specific character (character production symbol game production), the reach production or character A case where the performance is not executed (ready-to-reach non-performance symbol game performance), etc. is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol validity judgment indicates a jackpot, in which three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double number). In the case where a mode (jackpot mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with the symbols (same production pattern) that constitute the jackpot mode. ), and while the remaining one continues to be displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), whether or not the remaining one production symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol (three same production symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a performance that shows. At this time, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character as the performance symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and whether or not the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show this with a performance. Such game performances (ready-to-reach performances and character performances described later) can also be referred to as story performances (specific game performances) or objective performances (specific game performances). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot and increase his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in S4505, the effect pattern 8 to be displayed as a stop pattern (also called the "stop effect pattern") is determined and set based on the effect pattern determination random number obtained in S4501 and the stop pattern determination table (not shown). The effect pattern 8 displayed as a result of the effect pattern game effect is a miss when the result of the special pattern hit/miss is a miss, and one of the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "787" is a different effect pattern from the other effect patterns, and when it is a miss without a reach, at least one of the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is a different effect pattern from the other effect patterns.

Further, in S4506, a preview performance to be executed in conjunction with the variable performance pattern (performance symbol game performance) is determined. In addition, the performance including the preview performance to be executed is also referred to as the performance symbol game performance. This preview performance is a performance (preliminary) that indicates the possibility that the result of the current performance symbol game performance will be stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner before the performance symbol stops display (determined stop display) (during the fluctuating display of the performance symbol). This is a public announcement). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in S4501 and the preview performance determination table set in S4504, a preview performance that matches the specified variation pattern and the determined variation performance pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variable performance pattern and preview performance set in S4505 and S4506, a variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable performance start process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, in S4505 Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a variable effect etc. based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, a variable display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also performed.

[Summary of production symbol game production]
Next, an overview of the performance symbol game performance (variable performance) of this embodiment will be explained. As described above, when the variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. based on the variable performance pattern etc. set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a. A performance symbol game performance (variable performance) is constituted as a series of performances from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the performance symbols 8.

The display of the effect pattern 8 is, in principle, scrolled vertically in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats the vertical scrolling. The manner of the display of the effect pattern 8 is determined by the variable performance pattern stored in the variable performance pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, various modes of the variable display can be provided as variable performance patterns, such as horizontal scrolling (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which the patterns (numbers) are switched sequentially on the spot without scrolling. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the patterns from "1" to "9" are displayed in descending order. Furthermore, the manner of the variable display can be set according to the performance mode and game state.

In addition, the changing display of the performance pattern 8 is performed according to a change time determined by the change pattern of the special pattern, and the changing display stops as the change time passes, but in this embodiment, there are multiple stop modes (stop patterns) as modes for stopping the changing display. Specifically, the main stop modes are: (1) a stop mode in which the stop order (also called the "stop order") of each of the performance patterns 8L (left pattern), 8C (middle pattern), and 8R (right pattern) is "left pattern → middle pattern → right pattern" (also called the "first stop mode"), (2) a stop mode in which the stop order of each pattern is "left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern" (also called the "second stop mode"), (3) a stop mode in which all the stop times (stop timings) of each pattern are approximately the same (also called "simultaneous stop") (also called the "third stop mode"), and (4) a stop mode in which the stop times of the left pattern and the right pattern are approximately the same and the middle pattern stops after that (also called the "fourth stop mode"). These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution modes of the performance pattern game performance, and the stop mode in which the variable display is stopped is determined by the variable performance pattern selected (set) in S4505. That is, in this embodiment, the selection and determination (setting) of the variable performance pattern also serves as the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to process the selection and determination (setting) of the variable performance pattern and the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) separately. The first stop pattern in the stopping order is also called the "first stop pattern", the second stop pattern in the stopping order is also called the "second stop pattern", and the third stop pattern in the stopping order is also called the "third stop pattern" or "final stop pattern".

Among the first to fourth stopping modes, the first stopping mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly used when the result of the second special symbol validity judgment is "small" when in production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping the variable display when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner based on the fact that it is a hit.

The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) mainly occurs when (1) production mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "miss" or "jackpot" When the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the following, (2) when in production mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol validity determination is “miss” or “jackpot”. When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed based on the variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or the variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C ( In state C), when the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed as a reach fluctuation or a normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol validity determination being "miss" or "jackpot", the relevant fluctuation display This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping.

The third stop mode (stopping all symbols at the same time) is mainly used in (1) production modes A and B (state A), when the shortening variation function according to the number of reserved balls in the special pattern works (at the start of variation). When the number of reserved balls in special pattern 1 is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "miss", and based on this, the fluctuating display of production symbol 8 is performed as normal fluctuation. , (2) When in production mode E (state B), the variation display of production symbol 8 is performed in normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol validity determination being "miss", and (3 ) Stopping the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 8 when the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 8 is performed as a normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being "miss" in production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when

The fourth stop mode (left and right symbols simultaneously stop → middle symbol) is mainly used when the result of the second special symbol validity determination is "miss" or "jackpot" when in production mode C (state C). When the fluctuating display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the reach variation, and (2) when the production mode E (state B) is in effect, the result of the first special symbol validity determination is "miss" or "jackpot". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is performed based on the reach variation.

In this way, a plurality of stopping modes for stopping the variable display of the production symbols 8 are provided depending on the variable display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the production mode (gaming state) and the result of the special symbol propriety judgment. This makes it possible to vary the stopping manner by changing it depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the stop mode when the fluctuating display of the effect symbols 8 stops and guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbols 8 that will be displayed (derived display) afterwards. This makes it possible to infer the type of special game that can be played, whether or not it will be played, the possibility of it, etc., based on the manner in which it is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the variable display stops, and to arouse expectations for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stopping modes described above, various other stopping modes can be provided, such as a stopping mode (fifth stopping mode) in which the three patterns constituting the performance pattern 8 stop in the order of "right pattern → left pattern → middle pattern" and a stopping mode (sixth stopping mode) in which the left pattern and the middle pattern stop at approximately the same time and then the right pattern stops. The conditions under which each stopping mode is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be determined in various ways.

In this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the performance symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (performance mode). Specifically, in state A (performance modes A and B), the odd number symbol "7" is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbol"), the other odd number symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and the even number symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "blue symbols"). On the other hand, in states B and C (performance modes C, D, and E), the odd number symbols "3", "5", and "7" are red symbols, the other odd number symbols "1" and "9" are green symbols, and the even number symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

The correspondence between the patterns and colors shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and other correspondences are possible, and the types of colors are not limited to those in this embodiment, and other colors can be used. In this embodiment, the pattern types (red, green, and blue) are determined by color, but they can also be determined by factors other than color. For example, the pattern types can be determined by the type of character when a character is attached to the performance pattern, or by the number and letter patterns when there is a performance pattern (letter pattern) that shows a specific letter in addition to the performance pattern (number pattern) that shows a number, or even by simply the odd and even patterns.

The display of the effect symbols 8 is changed, and the result of the change display is notified by the combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbols 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) that is displayed (derived display) when the change display is stopped according to the stop mode described above. In this embodiment, as basic pattern combinations (stop display modes), the "perfect spread" (such as "124") in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different patterns (numbers), and the "reach spread" (such as "343") in which the effect symbol 8L (left pattern) and the effect symbol 8R (right pattern) are the same pattern (number) and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle pattern) is a different pattern (number) from the others are considered to be loss modes (non-specific modes) that do not trigger the execution of a winning game. On the other hand, a "double number" (such as "777") in which the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same is considered to be a jackpot pattern (specific pattern) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see Figure 6).

Based on such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the barrages is also used as a 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of a 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). This is because the 2R jackpot game has fewer prize balls (number of prize balls acquired) that the player can acquire compared to jackpot games of 4R or more (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state) in which it is more difficult to acquire prize balls (increase in balls held) in a small jackpot game compared to state C (high probability low base state), that is, it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount) for the player. In addition, the "complete barrage" among the barrages is also used as a small jackpot mode that triggers the execution of a small jackpot game (second special symbol) in state B (high base state). As mentioned above, in state B, the second start port 21 is open most of the time, so it is difficult for the ball to enter the large winning port for small wins (second large winning port 35) located downstream of the second start port 21, and the possibility of obtaining a profit from a small win is extremely low (close to zero) (effectively equivalent to a miss). Furthermore, among the spread patterns, the "specific spread patterns" described below are considered to be small win patterns that trigger the execution of a small win game (small win of the second special pattern) in state C (high probability low base state). Here, the small win pattern (specific spread pattern) is also called the "first display pattern," the big win pattern (double pattern) is also called the "second display pattern," the reach spread pattern among the miss patterns (complete spread patterns, reach spread patterns) is also called the "third display pattern," and the complete spread pattern among the miss patterns (complete spread patterns, reach spread patterns) is also called the "fourth display pattern."

In addition, since state A (low accuracy low base state) is a game state in which left-handed games are basically played, the first special symbol validity judgment (first special symbol determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20) This is because it is rare for the second special symbol validity judgment (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) to be performed during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. If the second special symbol validity judgment is made under such circumstances, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display 102 will display the variation. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, state B (high base state) is a game state in which right-handed games are basically played, and the first special symbol validity judgment (first special This situation If the second special symbol validity judgment is made below, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display 102 will display the variable display ( and stop display).

Similarly, since state C (high probability low base state) is a game state in which right-hand play is the basis, the second special symbol hit/fail judgment (second special symbol change display) is mainly based on the ball entering the third starting hole 26, and since it is rare for the first special symbol hit/fail judgment (first special symbol change display) to be made while the second special symbol hit/fail judgment is being made under such circumstances, when the first special symbol hit/fail judgment is made under such circumstances, the corresponding effect symbol 8 change display is not made on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and only the change display (and stop display) is made by the effect display device 102.

However, if a special symbol validity determination is made that is contrary to the current gaming state (left-handed game, right-handed game) and a "jackpot" determination result is obtained (for example, if the first special symbol validity determination is made in state C) (in the event of a jackpot), one or more display devices of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. conduct. As a result, while the performance display (fluctuating performance) of the performance symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (fluctuating display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed in parallel with the fluctuating display of the main special symbol. It becomes possible to notify the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols shown is a jackpot. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player stops playing without noticing the occurrence of a jackpot and misses an opportunity to earn profits.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. Here, FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. In addition, in the following explanation, the explanation of the common configuration and common processing with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the explanation will mainly be given of the different configuration and processing from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. conduct. In the second embodiment, the display screen of the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3) is called a first display screen 7a, and the display screen of the second image display device 71 (see FIG. 1) is called a second display screen. 71a, and the display screen of the third image display device 72 (see FIG. 2) will be called a third display screen 72a.

In addition to the first and second effect buttons 63a and 63b described above in Example 1, the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 2 is provided with a cross key located adjacent to the first effect button 63a on the front frame 51 as an input means that allows input by the player. This cross key is composed of an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key, and by operating any of the keys on the cross key, the player can change the selection of the item displayed on the first display screen 7a or the third display screen 72a, or highlight an item other than the highlighted item.

As illustrated in FIG. 53, in the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 2, in addition to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, a key operation detection switch 63e is connected to detect that any key of the cross key has been operated. When the player operates any key of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, or right key), a detection signal notifying that a key operation has been detected is output to the sub-control board 90. Note that different detection signals are output when the up key is operated, when the down key is operated, when the left key is operated, and when the right key is operated. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 can identify which of the four keys constituting the cross key has been operated based on the detection signal from the key operation detection switch 63e.

[Various settings related to the production]
Next, various settings related to the effects will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Here, Fig. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various settings of the effects. As illustrated in Fig. 54, the settings related to the effects in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment 2 are roughly classified into a first setting and a second setting.

(An example of the first setting)
The first setting includes volume adjustment and light adjustment, as exemplified in FIG. 54. Volume adjustment is a function for adjusting the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the volume of the effect sound can be changed by the player performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a while the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)) described later is displayed. Light adjustment is a function for adjusting the light intensity of the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, and the light intensity of the above three display screens can be changed by the player performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a while the volume/light adjustment screen is displayed.

(Example of second setting)
As illustrated in FIG. 54, the second settings include premier mode, one-shot notification mode, look-ahead reduction mode, auto button, back button suggestion, and treble adjustment.

The premier mode is a function that allows the player to set a mode in which the so-called "premium effect", which occurs only when the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a "jackpot", is more likely to occur than usual, and the player can switch between the premier mode and non-premium mode by performing a specified operation using the directional pad and the first effect button 63a while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) described below is displayed. One example of a premier effect is an effect in which a specified character called a premier character is displayed on the screen before an effect pattern showing a repeating number is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a "jackpot".

The one-shot notification mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which the so-called "one-shot notification", which occurs only when the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot", is more likely to occur than usual. Yes, when the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first performance button 63a while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed, the one-shot announcement mode and the non-one-shot announcement mode can be selected. It is possible to switch between In addition, as a one-shot notification, a predetermined notification sound is output from the speaker 67 prior to the stop display of the production pattern indicating a double mark that informs that the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot". An example of this is an effect in which the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 are made to emit light in rainbow colors.

The look-ahead reduction mode is a function that can set a mode in which the so-called "look-ahead effect" that is executed based on the results of the above-mentioned advance judgment (advance judgment result) is less likely to occur than usual, and with the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55 (C)) displayed, the player can switch between look-ahead reduction mode and non-look-ahead reduction mode by performing a specified operation using the directional pad and the first effect button 63a. Note that one example of a look-ahead effect is a reserved look-ahead effect in which a reserved image (reserved icon) indicating that the right to judge whether a special pattern is a hit or miss is reserved is displayed in a different display mode from the normal one.

The auto button is a function that generates a performance corresponding to the operation in the same way as when the first performance button 63a is operated without operating the first performance button 63a, and the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed. When the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first performance button 63a in this state, it is possible to switch the function related to the auto button between "ON" and "OFF".

The back button suggestion is a so-called "back button suggestion" in which an operation corresponding performance is executed when the player operates the first performance button 63a during the valid period without an operation promotion performance that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 63a. This is a function that suggests that the "back button" is still valid, and when the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first performance button 63a while the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to switch the function related to back button suggestion between "ON" and "OFF". By setting this back button suggestion to "ON", for example, the button lamp built in the first effect button 63a emits light during the above-mentioned validity period.

The treble adjustment function cuts the high-pitched range of the effect sounds output from the speaker 67, and with the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) displayed, the player can switch the treble adjustment function between "ON" and "OFF" by performing a specified operation using the directional pad and the first effect button 63a.

(Characteristics of various settings)
Up to this point, an overview of various settings classified as first settings or second settings has been described, but the first settings and second settings have the following characteristics.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 2, the game machine 1 transitions to a non-progressing game performance state (one example of a non-progressing game performance state) in which no game performance is performed in which the performance pattern is changed in accordance with the changing display of the first special pattern (or the second special pattern), and when a first time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the game machine 1 transitioned to the non-progressing game performance state without ending the non-progressing game performance state, a non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is displayed. This non-play reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when one or more settings classified as the second setting are set to settings that are different from the initial settings, and is a screen that allows the player to select whether or not to reset all the various settings classified as the second setting (return to the initial settings).

By the way, the non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed not only when a certain player (first player) temporarily interrupts and resumes playing, but also when another player (second player) starts playing. Although they are also displayed during the second game, the premier mode, one-shot notification mode, look-ahead reduction mode, auto button, and back button suggestion change or affect the game performance, so When the player starts playing the game, it is preferable that the second player can easily select whether or not to reset these second settings (set by the first player). Furthermore, if even one performance setting classified as the second setting is performed, the contents of the second setting are displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 56), and the contents are displayed to other players. It is preferable for the first player to stop playing without being given the opportunity to choose whether or not to reset the second setting, since this may become known to others (e.g., the second player). do not have.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 2, when the first time (here, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the game presentation non-progression state was entered, a non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is displayed as a selection prompting presentation to prompt the player to select whether or not to reset the presentation settings (here, the various settings classified as the second settings) to the initial settings. While this non-play reset selection screen is displayed, the various settings classified as the second settings, that is, the presentation customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) cannot be changed (for example, the presentation customization screen is not displayed) (see FIG. 54).

For example, if the first time is set to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds, the game ball will not enter the first starting hole 20 easily in the low-accuracy, low-base state, and the game production will frequently go into the non-progress state. Then, the reset selection screen is frequently displayed during non-gaming, and as a result, there is a possibility that the first player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the first time is set to a relatively long time, such as 30 seconds, the waiting time from when the first player stops playing until the non-gaming reset selection screen starts to be displayed becomes long, This configuration is not preferable from the viewpoint that the first player can easily reset the setting of 2. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first time is set to 10 seconds in consideration of these points.

On the other hand, even if the volume of the speaker 67 or the light intensity of each display screen is set to a different value from the initial setting, it does not change the content of the game presentation or have a large effect on the game presentation, and it is considered that there is less need to have the player (e.g., the first player) select whether or not to reset the first setting compared to the second setting. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 2, while the non-play reset selection screen is displayed, the selection by the player as to whether or not to reset the various presentation settings classified as the second setting is prioritized, so that the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted, and when reset is selected on the non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57), that is, when an operation to select to reset the presentation settings to the initial setting is performed while the non-play reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-play reset selection screen (selection promotion presentation) ends and the second setting is reset (returned to the initial setting), while the first setting is not reset (returned to the initial setting) (see FIG. 54).

Regarding the volume of the speaker 67 and the light intensity of each display screen, it is not a big problem even if the second player knows the contents of the settings made by the first player, and it is considered that there is little need to adopt a configuration in which the first player can arbitrarily select whether to reset or not. On the other hand, for example, if the volume of the speaker 67 is set to the maximum (in this embodiment, "5" of 5 levels: see FIG. 55(B)) and the second player who is the next player after the first player starts playing, a loud game performance sound is output from the speaker 67 with the start of the game performance, which may surprise the second player and cause discomfort to the second player. Also, for example, if the light intensity of each display screen is set to the minimum (in this embodiment, "1" of 5 levels: see FIG. 55(B)), the pachinko game machine 1 is not noticeable even if a customer waiting performance is performed using each display screen, so it is considered that it is difficult to improve the operating rate of the pachinko game machine 1.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 2, if a second time (five minutes in this embodiment 2) has elapsed since the transition to the non-progression state of the game presentation without the non-progression state ending, the volume of the speaker 67 and the light intensity of each display screen are automatically reset (returned to their respective initial settings) without prompting the player to select whether or not to reset the volume and light intensity settings. Specifically, the volume of the speaker 67 is returned to "1," the minimum volume of the five levels, and the light intensity of each display screen is returned to "5," the maximum light intensity of the five levels.

In this second embodiment, an example will be described in which the initial volume setting of the speaker 67 is the minimum volume of "1" and the initial light level setting of each display screen is the maximum light level of "5". In contrast to this, in other embodiments, the initial volume setting of the speaker 67 may be a volume other than the minimum volume, and the initial light level setting of each display screen may be a light level other than the maximum light level. For example, the volume of the speaker 67 may be returned to the middle level of "3" out of five levels, and the light level of each display screen may be returned to the middle level of "3" out of five levels.

In addition, after the selection of whether or not to reset the effect settings is made on the non-play reset selection screen and the display of the non-play reset selection screen has ended, the player can display the volume/light intensity adjustment screen described below and change the volume and light intensity.

<Specific examples of various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a>
Next, various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen diagram illustrating various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a.

(Customization reception screen)
In the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game performance in which the performance pattern is changed in accordance with the change of the first special pattern (or the second special pattern) is in progress and the non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is not displayed in the game performance non-progress state described above, the customization reception screen shown in FIG. 55(A) is displayed on the third display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. This customization reception screen includes a cross key image imitating a cross key and a message such as "You can customize the performance" to notify that various settings related to the performance can be changed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 55(A), the cross key image that constitutes the customization reception screen displays the left and right keys in a different display mode than the up and down keys. Specifically, for example, the left and right keys are displayed more highlighted than the up and down keys. For this reason, a player who sees the cross key image can easily recognize that by operating the left or right key on the cross key, it is possible to switch the customization reception screen to another screen for actually customizing the effects.

(Customized quantity notification image, customization content notification image)
In addition, if any of the settings classified as the above-mentioned second settings (see FIG. 54) have been changed from the initial settings, the upper part of the third display screen 72a while the customization reception screen is displayed. A customization number notification image and a customization content notification image are displayed in the area. Here, the customized number notification image is an image that notifies the number of settings that are different from the initial settings based on the player's selection operation among various settings classified as the second setting. , In FIG. 55(A), a customization number notification image containing the words "Production customization 3" is displayed to notify that the number of settings that are different from the initial settings is 3. An example of how this is done is shown below.

Figure 56 is a screen diagram showing specific examples of a customization quantity notification image and a customization content notification image displayed on the third display screen 72a. Here, the customization quantity notification image is as described above based on Figure 55 (A). On the other hand, the customization content notification image is an image that sequentially notifies the contents of settings that are different from the initial settings among the various settings classified into the second settings (see Figure 55 (A) and Figures 56 (A) to (C)).

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 54(B), when three settings, "premium mode", "preview reduction mode", and "hidden button suggestion", among the various settings classified as the second setting, are set to settings different from the initial settings, for example, a customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(A)) containing the characters "premium mode" is displayed for 1.5 seconds, followed by a customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(B)) containing the characters "preview reduction mode" for 1.5 seconds, and then a customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(C)) containing the characters "hidden button suggestion" is displayed for 1.5 seconds. Then, after the customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(C)) containing the characters "hidden button suggestion" is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(A)) containing the characters "premium mode" is displayed again.

In this way, if multiple settings among the various settings classified as the second settings are set to settings that differ from the initial settings, the display of the customization content notification image is updated appropriately so that the characters indicating the contents of these multiple settings are switched in sequence and repeatedly displayed.

By the way, for example, as mentioned above, if the three settings of "Premier Mode", "Lookahead Reduction Mode", and "Back Button Suggestion" are set differently from the initial settings, the settings that include the words "Premier Mode" An idea is to adopt a configuration in which a customization content notification image, a customization content notification image containing the words "prefetch reduction mode", and a customization content notification image including the text "back button suggestion" are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. It will be done.

However, with this configuration, the more effects that are set differently from the initial settings, the more customization content notification images are displayed on the third display screen 72a, which can cause problems such as making it difficult to use the third display screen 72a for other effects (for example, effects that display characters or text that indicate the probability of a jackpot).

In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 2, the number of settings among the second settings that are different from the initial settings is notified by the customization number notification image, and a customization content notification image showing the contents of the settings that are different from the initial settings in order is displayed in a display area (an example of the first display area) directly below the display area (an example of the second display area) in which the customization number notification image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the number and contents of settings that are different from the initial settings in an easy-to-understand manner while preventing the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Note that these customization number notification images and customization content notification images are similarly displayed in the upper area of the third display screen 72a even while the non-gaming reset selection screen is being displayed (see FIG. 57). Therefore, the player must check the number and content of settings that are different from the initial settings based on the customization number notification image and the customization content notification image, and then decide whether or not to reset these settings. It is possible to judge.

(Volume/light intensity adjustment screen)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, when the player operates (presses) the left or right key while the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed, the volume/light intensity adjustment screen appears on the third display screen 72a. is displayed (see FIG. 55(B)). Specifically, the characters "Volume" forming the volume image included in the volume/light amount adjustment screen are highlighted, and the volume can be adjusted. This volume/light amount adjustment screen is configured to include a volume image, a light amount image, a first cross key image, a second cross key image, and a first effect button image.

Here, the volume image (see FIG. 55(B)) is a display object that is highlighted among five display objects that each contain a number from "1" to "5" and have different sizes. This is an image that shows the volume by the number of . The light intensity image (see FIG. 55(B)) is determined by the number of highlighted display objects among five display objects each containing a number from 1 to 5 and having different sizes. This is an image showing the amount of light.

The first effect button image (see FIG. 55(B)) is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and the words "Decision" are displayed directly below the first effect button image. Therefore, the player determines (confirms) the volume and light intensity, which have been changed (increased or decreased) by operating the cross key while the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, by operating (pressing) the first effect button 63a. It can be easily recognized that it is possible to

The second cross key image (see FIG. 55(B)) is a cross key image displayed between the first cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and down key are the left key and The right key is highlighted. The words "increase/decrease" are displayed directly below the second cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the second cross-key image and the text directly below it knows that it is possible to increase or decrease the volume (or light intensity) by operating the up or down key on the cross-key. can be easily recognized.

Note that, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 55(B), the display object that includes the text "volume" that makes up the volume image is displayed more highlighted than the display object that includes the text "light amount" that makes up the light amount image. ing. In this state, the volume can be adjusted, and the player can increase or decrease the volume by operating the up or down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55(B), the display object containing the character "1" and the display object containing the character "2" are highlighted, indicating that the current volume is "2" out of five levels. It has been shown that On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key once, the display object containing the character "1" becomes highlighted, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to the minimum "1". Conversely, for example, if the player operates the up key twice, four display objects from the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "4" become highlighted, and the player When the user operates the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to "4".

The first cross key image (see FIG. 55(B)) is a cross key image displayed to the left of the second cross key image, with the left and right keys highlighted more than the up and down keys. The word "switch" is displayed directly below the first cross key image. Therefore, a player who sees the first cross key image and the words directly below it can easily recognize that by operating the left key on the cross key, the volume/light adjustment screen can be returned to the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)), and that by operating the right key, the screen can be changed to a state where light adjustment is possible.

When the player operates the right key of the cross key only once while the volume/light intensity adjustment screen illustrated in FIG. Instead, the display object including the characters "light amount" forming the light amount image is highlighted. In this state, the amount of light can be adjusted as described above, and the player can increase or decrease the amount of light by operating the up or down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55(B), the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "4" is highlighted, indicating that the current light intensity is "4" out of five levels. It is shown. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key twice, the display object containing the character "1" and the display object containing the character "2" are highlighted, and the player By operating the effect button 63a, the light amount is changed to "2". Conversely, for example, when the player operates the up key once, all five display objects, from the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "5", become highlighted, and the game ends. When the person operates the first performance button 63a, the volume is changed to the maximum "5".

(Production customization screen)
In addition, when the display object containing the words "light intensity" is highlighted, that is, when the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, which indicates that the light intensity can be adjusted, the player operates the right key once. Then, the volume/light amount adjustment screen is switched to the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)). This effect customization screen includes a premier mode setting image, a one-shot announcement mode setting image, a look-ahead reduction mode setting image, an auto button setting image, a back button suggestion setting image, a treble adjustment setting image, and a third cross. It is configured to include a key image, a fourth cross key image, and a first effect button image.

Here, the premier mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the premier mode, and when the premier mode is not set, the text "OFF" is highlighted, and instead of the text "OFF", When the characters "ON" are highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the premium mode is set. The one-shot notification mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the one-shot notification mode, and when the one-shot notification mode is not set, the word "OFF" is highlighted (see Figure 55 (C)). ), when the text "ON" is highlighted instead of the text "OFF", the one-shot notification mode is set.

The read-ahead reduction mode setting image is an image that shows the setting status of the read-ahead reduction mode, and when the read-ahead reduction mode is not set, the text "OFF" is highlighted, and instead of the text "OFF", When the characters "ON" are highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the read-ahead reduction mode is set. The auto button setting image is an image showing the setting status of the auto button, and when the auto button function is not enabled, the word "OFF" is highlighted (see Figure 55 (C)), and the word "OFF" is displayed. When the text "ON" is highlighted instead of the text, the auto button function is enabled.

The hidden button suggestion setting image is an image showing the setting status of the hidden button suggestion, and when the hidden button suggestion function is not active, the word "OFF" is highlighted, and when the word "ON" is highlighted instead of the word "OFF" as shown in FIG. 55(C), the hidden button suggestion function is active. The treble adjustment setting image is an image showing the setting status of the treble adjustment, and when the treble adjustment function is not active, the word "OFF" is highlighted (see FIG. 55(C)), and when the word "ON" is highlighted instead of the word "OFF", the treble adjustment function is active.

The first effect button image (see FIG. 55(C)) is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and is used to switch between "ON" and "OFF" of the setting image where the cursor is located. Directly below this first effect button image, the words "Decision Change" are displayed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the cursor is positioned so as to surround an item image containing the words "one-shot notification mode" that constitutes the one-shot notification mode setting image, and the item image containing the words "OFF ” is highlighted, when the player operates the first effect button 63a, the word “ON” is highlighted (instead of the word “OFF”) and the game enters the one-shot notification mode. Set.

The fourth cross key image (see FIG. 55(C)) is an image displayed between the third cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and down key are lower than the left key and right key. is also highlighted. The words "Move cursor" are displayed directly below the fourth cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the fourth cross key image and the characters immediately below it can move the cursor up or down by operating the up or down key of the cross key. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), in a situation where the cursor is positioned so as to surround an item image that includes the words "one-shot notification mode," the player operates the lower key of the cross pad once. Then, the cursor moves downward so as to surround the item image including the words "prefetch reduction mode" instead of the item image including the words "one shot notification mode". When the player operates the first performance button 63a in this state, the characters "ON" are highlighted in place of the characters "OFF" related to the prefetch reduction mode setting image, and the prefetch reduction mode is set.

As shown in FIG. 55(C), when effect customization is performed so that the word "ON" is displayed strongly for three setting images, a customization number notification image (see FIG. 55(A)) containing the words "3 effect customizations" is displayed.

The third cross-key image (see FIG. 55(C)) is a cross-key image displayed to the left of the fourth cross-key image, and the left and right keys are highlighted more than the up and down keys. ing. The words "switch" are displayed directly below the third cross key image. For this reason, the player who sees the third cross-key image and the text directly below it switches the production customization screen to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen by operating the left key of the cross-key, and then operates the right key. This makes it possible to easily recognize that the effect customization screen can be switched to the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)).

(Reset selection screen during gaming)
When the player operates the right key of the cross key while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed, the effect customization screen is switched to the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)). As illustrated in FIG. 55(D), this in-game reset selection screen includes a message "Do you want to reset the production settings?", a selection item for "No", and a selection item for "Yes". It is configured to include a fifth cross key image and a first effect button image.

Here, the fifth cross key image has the up and down keys highlighted more than the left and right keys, and the player can move the cursor between the "No" and "Yes" selections by operating the up or down key on the cross key. The first effect button image is an image that imitates the first effect button 63a, and the word "Confirm" is displayed directly below it.

In the initial setting of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 2, the word "OFF" is highlighted on all of the premium mode setting image, one-shot announcement mode setting image, pre-reading reduction mode setting image, auto button setting image, back button suggestion setting image, and treble adjustment setting image in the above-mentioned performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)). In contrast, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), when the three settings are set differently from the initial settings, the player operates the up or down key on the cross key to move the cursor to the "Yes" selection item, and operates the first performance button 63a in this state, all of the settings classified as the second setting are returned to the initial setting. As a result, on the performance customization screen, the word "OFF" is highlighted on all of the premium mode setting image, one-shot announcement mode setting image, pre-reading reduction mode setting image, auto button setting image, back button suggestion setting image, and treble adjustment setting image.

(End screen)
Although not shown in the figure, when the player operates the right key of the cross key while the in-play reset selection screen is displayed, a predetermined end screen is displayed. On this end screen, a message "End the effect setting?", a "Yes" option, a "No" option, a cross key image similar to the fifth cross key image, and a first effect button image are displayed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a with the cursor positioned so as to surround the "Yes" option, the effect setting is ended and the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed again.

(Reset selection screen during non-gaming)
FIG. 57 is a screen diagram illustrating a non-gaming reset selection screen displayed on the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. In FIG. 57, three performance symbols showing a random number of "526" are displayed in a stopped state to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment executed in the low-accuracy, low-base state is a "loss". An example of the situation is shown below. Here, if the right to determine whether the first special symbol is correct or not is reserved, a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and production symbol that notify the loss are stopped and displayed. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the suspended first special symbol validity determination is executed, and variable display of the next first special symbol and performance symbol is started. On the other hand, if the right to determine the validity of the first special symbol is not reserved, the game performance non-progress state in which the game performance that displays the performance symbols in a variable manner does not proceed will continue, and the game production will transition to the game production non-progress state. When a first period of time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed, a non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed (see FIG. 57).

As shown in FIG. 57, this non-play reset selection screen includes the message "Effect customization is being set. Reset?", a "Yes" selection item, a "No" selection item, a cross key image in which the up and down keys are highlighted more than the left and right keys, and a first effect button image that resembles the first effect button 63a.

On the non-gaming reset selection screen, the player can move the cursor to the "Yes" selection item or "No" selection item by operating the up or down key on the cross key. If the first effect button 63a is operated with the cursor positioned on the selection item "No", the setting changes made to the effect customization screen are maintained. Conversely, if the first effect button 63a is operated while the cursor is positioned on the "Yes" selection item, the setting changes made to the effect customization screen are reset and classified into the second setting. All settings will be returned to their default settings.

However, the non-gaming reset selection screen is a selection screen for resetting the second settings, not a selection screen for resetting the first settings. Therefore, when the first effect button 63a is operated while the cursor is positioned on the "Yes" selection item while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the settings classified as the first settings are changed. It will never be reset. As mentioned above, the settings classified as the first settings (in the second embodiment, the settings related to the volume and the settings related to the light intensity) are set after the game production non-progress state is entered and the game production non-progress state ends. If the second period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed without any action being taken, the settings will be reset to the initial settings.

When the non-play reset selection screen is displayed, it is necessary for the player to select whether or not to reset the effect settings, so it is not preferable to display the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)) or the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) in response to the operation of the right or left key on the cross key. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 2, instead of the message "You can customize the effects" (see FIG. 55(A)), a message such as "Another selection screen is displayed" is displayed in the lower area of the third display screen 72a, and, for example, the cross key image is displayed semi-transparently to clearly inform the player that the effects cannot be customized (see FIG. 57).

[About the permission period for various operations related to production settings]
Next, while referring to FIG. 58, the permission period during which the volume/light intensity adjustment operation is permitted on the volume/light intensity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), and the effect customization on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) The permission period during which the operation is permitted and the permission period during which the reset selection operation on the non-gaming reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is permitted will be explained. Here, FIG. 58 is a time chart illustrating the permission period for volume/light intensity adjustment, performance customization, and reset selection during non-gaming.

As illustrated in FIG. 58(A), for example, when the game is controlled in a low probability low base state, in a situation where the first special symbol is repeatedly displayed and stopped, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner in association with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol is displayed in a stationary manner in association with the stationary display of the first special symbol. In this way, in a game performance progress state in which a game performance in which the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner in association with the variable display of the first special symbol is intermittently performed, the above-mentioned customization reception screen is always displayed based on FIG. 55(A) and the like. Therefore, in a game performance progress state, the volume and light intensity classified as the first setting can be adjusted by operating the left or right key of the cross key while the customization reception screen is displayed to display the volume/light intensity adjustment screen. Also, in a game performance progress state, various settings classified as the second setting can be changed by operating the left or right key of the cross key while the customization reception screen is displayed to display the effect customization screen.

For this reason, the game presentation progress state can be said to be a permission period during which volume and light adjustments are permitted, and also a permission period during which presentation customization is permitted. Note that the display of the non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) does not begin until the first time (10 seconds in this embodiment 2) has elapsed since the game presentation stopped progressing, i.e., since the display of changing presentation patterns stopped. For this reason, the period from the transition to the game presentation non-progress state until the first time has elapsed is also a permission period during which volume and light adjustments and presentation customization are permitted (see FIG. 58 (A)).

On the other hand, when the first time has elapsed since the game performance stopped progressing and the game performance was shifted to the non-progress state, the display of the non-gaming reset selection screen is started. While this non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed, operations of the left key and right key of the cross key are disabled (see the screen diagram of the third display screen 72a in FIG. 57). It is not possible to display the volume/light intensity adjustment screen or the production customization screen by operating the right key. Therefore, it can be said that while the reset selection screen is displayed during non-gaming, it is a prohibited period in which volume/light intensity adjustment and performance customization are prohibited.

In FIG. 58(A), performance customization is reset on the non-game reset selection screen while the game performance non-progress state continues even after the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game performance non-progress state. A case is illustrated in which a choice is made as to whether or not to do so. In this case, when the game performance is not progressing, the display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming ends when a selection is made as to whether or not to reset, and along with this, volume/light intensity adjustment and performance customization are permitted. (See Figure 58(A)).

The non-gaming reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when the game performance is not in progress, and is not displayed when the game performance is in progress. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 58, if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the game performance progress state and the game performance progress state shifts from the game performance non-progress state, the game performance progress state is changed to the game performance progress state. The reset selection screen is erased from the first display screen 7a, and accordingly, a transition is made to a permission period in which volume/light amount adjustment and performance customization are permitted.

Figure 58 (B) illustrates a case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol change simultaneously in a low-probability, low-base state. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 2, the third start hole 26 is always open, as in the pachinko game machine 1 of embodiment 1. Therefore, the player can easily make the game ball enter the third start hole 26 by hitting to the right, and in the low-probability, low-base state, the change pattern of the second special symbol selected in response to this winning is likely to have an extremely long change time of 600 seconds (see Figure 9). Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low-probability, low-base state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may change simultaneously.

One of the production symbols, in the low-accuracy, low-base state, is displayed fluctuating and stopping in conjunction with the first special symbol, but it is not fluctuating and displayed in a halting manner in conjunction with the second special symbol. . Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 58(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends in a situation where the variable display of the second special symbol continues in the low probability low base state, this With the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the performance symbols also ends, and the game performance progress state shifts to the game performance non-progress state.

In this way, when transitioning from the simultaneous fluctuation state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously fluctuate to the game performance non-progress state, the game performance non-progress state is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 58(A). When a first period of time (10 seconds in this embodiment 2) has elapsed since the game entered the progress state, a non-gaming reset selection screen starts to be displayed, and along with this, volume/light intensity adjustment and performance customization are prohibited. This will lead to a period of prohibition.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 58, the presentation control microcomputer 91 is configured to permit changes to the volume and light intensity when a specified operation for adjusting the volume and light intensity is performed when the non-play reset selection screen is not displayed, but not to change the volume and light intensity corresponding to the specified operation while the non-play reset selection screen is displayed, even if the specified operation for adjusting the volume and light intensity is performed. Note that if a selection is made as to whether or not to return various settings classified as the second setting to their initial settings while the non-play reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-play reset selection screen ends, and accordingly, changes to the volume and light intensity are permitted.

<Performance control based on the first setting>
(Output control of special sound effects)
When an operation is performed on the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)) to change the volume, the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 2 executes the following process. That is, volume information indicating the current volume is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When a predetermined operation is performed on the volume/light adjustment screen to change the volume, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the volume information to indicate the volume selected by the player. Then, it causes the sound control board 106 to execute a process to output a performance sound (for example, a game performance sound output in conjunction with a game performance) from the speaker 67 at the volume indicated by the updated volume information.

(Display control of staged images)
When an operation is performed on the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)) to change the light amount, the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment executes the following process. That is, light amount information indicating the current light amount is stored in the RAM of the image control board 100. When a predetermined operation is performed on the volume/light adjustment screen to change the light amount, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits a light amount command to the image control board 100 to notify that an operation to change the light amount has been performed.

This light intensity command contains information indicating the light intensity selected by the player, and the image control microcomputer 101 updates the light intensity information to indicate the light intensity specified by the information contained in the received light intensity command. Then, it executes display control of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 so that the presentation image is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a with the light intensity indicated by the updated light intensity information.

<Production control based on second setting>
(Premier mode)
When an operation for setting the premium mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a normal mode premiere performance determination table and a premier mode premier performance determination table. These premium production decision tables are used when deciding whether or not to perform a premium production when the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed during the low-accuracy, low-base state is a "jackpot". This is a table that is referred to, and in each case, a random value is associated with each of "with premiere performance" and "without premiere performance". In addition, in the premiere performance determination table for the premier mode, more random values are associated with "premium performance available" than in the premiere performance determination table for the normal mode.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command related to the first special symbol hit/miss judgment from the main control board 80 while the game is being controlled in a low probability low base state, the microcomputer 91 judges whether the current judgment result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is a "jackpot" or not based on the information indicating the judgment result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment contained in the variation start command. If it judges that the result is a "jackpot", it performs processing to determine whether or not to execute a premium effect.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 uses the value of the timing at which the fluctuation start command related to the "jackpot" is received, regarding the premium performance execution decision random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process in the sub-control board 90 is performed. is obtained as a random number for determining the execution of the premiere performance. Then, normally, the premiere performance is executed based on whether or not the acquired random number for determining the execution of the premiere performance matches the random number associated with "with premier performance" in the normal mode premiere performance determination table. Decide whether or not.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the production customization screen to set the premium mode and the production control microcomputer 91 is set to the premium mode, the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the obtained premium production execution decision random number is the premium mode for the premium mode. It is determined whether or not to perform the premiere performance based on whether or not the random number value corresponds to "with premiere performance" in the performance determination table.

As described above, in the premiere effect determination table for the premiere mode, more random number values are associated with "premium effect available" than in the premiere effect determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the premiere mode is set, the appearance rate of the premiere effect increases compared to when the premiere mode is not set.

(One-shot notification mode)
When an operation for setting the one-shot notification mode is performed on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment. A one-shot notification determination table for normal mode and a one-shot notification determination table for one-shot notification mode are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. These one-shot notification determination tables are tables that are referenced when determining whether or not to execute a one-shot notification when the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination performed in a low probability low base state is a "jackpot", and in both cases, a random number value is associated with each of "one-shot notification" and "no one-shot notification". In addition, in the one-shot notification determination table for the one-shot notification mode, more random number values are associated with "one-shot notification" than in the one-shot notification determination table for the normal mode.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol validity determination from the main control board 80 while the game is being controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command included in the fluctuation start command. Based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination, it is determined whether the current determination result of the first special symbol validity determination is a "jackpot". Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot", a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the timing at which the fluctuation start command related to the "jackpot" is received, regarding the one-shot announcement execution decision random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process in the sub-control board 90 is performed. Obtain the value as a random number for one-shot announcement execution decision. Then, normally, a one-shot announcement is executed based on whether the obtained one-shot announcement execution decision random number matches the random number associated with "one-shot announcement" in the one-shot announcement determination table for normal mode. Decide whether to carry out the announcement.

On the other hand, when an operation to set the single-shot announcement mode is performed on the performance customization screen and the single-shot announcement mode is set, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute a single-shot announcement based on whether or not the acquired single-shot announcement execution decision random number matches the random number value associated with "single-shot announcement available" in the single-shot announcement decision table for single-shot announcement mode.

As described above, in the single-blow announcement determination table for the single-blow announcement mode, more random numbers are associated with "single-blow announcement available" than in the single-blow announcement determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the single-blow announcement mode is set, the occurrence rate of a single-blow announcement increases compared to when the single-blow announcement mode is not set.

(Read ahead reduction mode)
When an operation for setting the prefetch reduction mode is performed on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a pre-read performance determination table for the normal mode and a pre-read performance determination table for the reduced pre-read mode. These pre-read effect determination tables are tables that are referred to when deciding whether or not to perform a so-called pre-read effect based on the result of the preliminary determination described above in the first embodiment, and all of them are tables that are referred to when deciding whether or not to perform a so-called pre-read effect. ” and “No look-ahead effect” are each associated with a random value. In addition, in the look-ahead effect determination table for the look-ahead reduction mode, a smaller random number value than in the look-ahead effect determination table for the normal mode is associated with "with look-ahead effect".

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a special symbol 1 start ball entry command from the main control board 80 while the game is being controlled in a low probability low base state, it determines whether or not a look-ahead performance can be executed based on the advance judgment information included in the special symbol 1 start ball entry command. Specifically, for example, when a corresponding first special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed based on the advance judgment information, it determines whether or not a look-ahead performance can be executed based on whether or not a fluctuation pattern of a first special symbol whose fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time is selected. Here, if it is determined that the look-ahead performance can be executed, it performs processing to determine whether or not to actually execute the look-ahead performance.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the pre-read performance execution determination random number, which is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, based on which the pre-read performance is determined to be executable. The value of the timing at which the special figure 1 starting ball entering command including the judgment information is received is acquired as a pre-reading effect execution decision random number. Then, normally, the prefetch effect is executed based on whether the acquired prefetch effect execution decision random number matches the random number associated with "prefetch effect available" in the normal mode prefetch effect determination table. Decide whether or not.

On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the performance customization screen to set it to the look-ahead reduction mode, and the look-ahead reduction mode is set, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance based on whether or not the acquired look-ahead performance execution decision random number matches the random number value associated with "look-ahead performance available" in the look-ahead performance decision table for the look-ahead reduction mode.

As described above, in the look-ahead performance determination table for the look-ahead reduced mode, a smaller random number is associated with "with look-ahead performance" compared to the look-ahead performance determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the prefetch reduction mode is set, the appearance rate of the prefetch effect is lower than when the prefetch reduction mode is not set.

(auto button)
When an operation is performed to enable the auto button on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. At the start of a game performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a valid period during which the operation of the first performance button 63a (or second performance button 63b) is valid. On the other hand, when the validity period starts, the image control microcomputer 101 displays a button image imitating the first effect button 63a (or second effect button 63b) and an operation prompting, for example, "Press!" An operation promotion effect is executed in which promotion characters and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed on the first display screen 7a.

If the auto button function is not enabled, when the player operates the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b) during the valid period, an operation notification command notifying the player of the operation is sent from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, and an operation-responsive effect is executed, for example, displaying a specified effect image on the first display screen 7a. Conversely, if no operation is performed during the valid period, such an operation-responsive effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the effect customization screen to enable the auto button and the auto button function is enabled, the effect control microcomputer 91 will send a command to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of an operation-responsive effect, for example, during the above-mentioned valid period, when half of this valid period has elapsed. In this way, by the player performing a specified operation on the effect customization screen to enable the auto button, it is possible to execute an operation-responsive effect without operating the first effect button 63a (or the second effect button 63b).

(auto button)
When an operation is performed to enable the back button suggestion on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a valid period during which the operation of the first performance button 63a becomes valid during the game performance when starting the game performance. During the validity period set in this way, there are times when the above-mentioned operation promotion effect is not executed, and the player may, for example, press the back button based on the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a. It is necessary to specify the valid period and operate the first effect button 63a during the valid period to generate the operation corresponding effect.

On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the performance customization screen to enable the secret button suggestion and the secret button suggestion function is enabled, the performance control microcomputer 91, for example, lights up the button lamp built into the first performance button 63a via the lamp control board 107 during a valid period that does not involve the above-mentioned operation prompting performance. In this way, by the player performing a specified operation to enable the secret button suggestion on the performance customization screen, it is possible to suggest (imply) to the player that the valid period is in progress even if the button image, operation prompting text, and valid period gauge are not displayed during the valid period.

(treble adjustment)
When an operation is performed to enable treble adjustment on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. When the treble adjustment function is not enabled, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs the first game performance sound accompanying the game performance from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106, for example.

On the other hand, when an operation for enabling treble adjustment is performed on the production customization screen and the treble adjustment function is enabled, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the production control via the audio control board 106. A second game performance sound obtained by cutting the high range of the first game performance sound is output from a speaker 67. Thereby, it is possible to output performance sounds that are less likely to be harsh to the player's ears.

[Winning Waiting Command Reception Processing by Sub-Control Board 90]
Next, the winning wait command reception process executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Here, Fig. 59 is a flow chart illustrating the winning wait command reception process executed in the sub-control board 90.

When the game is controlled in a low probability low base state, and the variable display of the first special symbol ends without the right to determine whether the first special symbol is a hit or miss reserved, the game control microcomputer 81 transmits a winning waiting command to the sub-control board 90 to notify that the game is waiting for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 20. In this way, when the game enters a winning waiting state, the game presentation that changes the display of the presentation symbol in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol stops progressing, and the presentation control microcomputer 91 can determine that the game presentation will transition from a progress state to a non-progression state by receiving this winning waiting command.

As illustrated in FIG. 59, the performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it has received the prize waiting command transmitted from the main control board 80 as described above (step S111). Here, if it is determined that the prize waiting command has been received (step S111: YES), that is, if the game performance has transitioned to the non-progress state, measurement of the elapsed time since the transition to the game production non-progress state is started. (Step S112), and the measurement flag stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 is set to "ON" (Step S113). This measuring flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the elapsed time from the transition to the game performance non-progress state is being measured. When the elapsed time measurement starts, it is set to "ON" and the elapsed time is set to "ON". It is set to "OFF" when the time ends.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S113, or when it determines that it has not received a winning wait command (step S111: NO), it determines whether or not the measurement in progress flag is set to "ON" (step S114). Here, when it determines that the measurement in progress flag is not set to "ON" (step S114: NO), the series of winning wait command reception processes ends, and the process returns to step S111.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the measurement flag is set to "ON" (step S114: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 waits for a first time after transitioning to the game performance non-progress state (in the second embodiment, 10 seconds) have elapsed (step S115). Specifically, when measurement of the elapsed time is started by the process of step S112, information indicating the elapsed time (elapsed time information) is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90, and updated as appropriate as time passes. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game performance non-progress state based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by this elapsed time information matches the first time. Determine whether or not.

When the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines that the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game presentation non-progress state (step S115: YES), for example, by sending a command to the image control board 100 to instruct the image control board 100 to start displaying the non-play reset selection screen, the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying the non-play reset selection screen (step S116). Then, the adjustment/change prohibition flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to "ON" (step S117). This adjustment/change prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not volume/light adjustment with the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)) displayed and change of presentation customization with the presentation customization screen (see FIG. 55(B)) displayed are prohibited, and is set to "ON" when the non-play reset selection screen starts to be displayed, and is set to "OFF" when the non-play reset selection screen ends to be displayed.

The production control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S117, or if it is determined that the first time has not elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state (step S115: NO), the production control microcomputer 91 executes the game production non-progress state. It is determined whether a second period of time (5 minutes in the second embodiment) has elapsed since the transition to the progress state (step S118). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM matches the second time, it is determined whether the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state. Determine whether or not. Here, if it is determined that the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state (step S118: YES), the volume and light amount are reset (step S119). Specifically, the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is updated to indicate "1", which is the minimum volume, and the light amount information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 is updated. A command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of a process for updating the light amount information to indicate "5" which is the maximum light amount.

In this way, when the setting classified as the second setting has been changed from the initial setting, the presentation control microcomputer 91 starts displaying the non-play reset selection screen when a first time has elapsed without the non-progression state of the game presentation ending after transitioning to a non-progression state of the game presentation in which the game presentation based on the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination in the low probability low base state has not progressed. Then, when a second time (longer than the first time) has elapsed without the non-progression state of the game presentation ending after transitioning to the non-progression state of the game presentation, the first setting (here, the light intensity and volume settings) is returned to the initial setting.

[Operation response processing by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the operation corresponding processing executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts illustrating the operation corresponding processing executed on the sub control board 90. The production control microcomputer 91 executes the operation corresponding process described below when the first production button 63a, the second production button 63b, or the cross key is operated.

That is, as illustrated in Fig. 60, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation based on whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first presentation button detection switch 63c, the second presentation button detection switch 63d, or the key operation detection switch 63e (step S120). If it is determined that the player has not performed an operation (step S120: NO), the operation response process ends and the process returns to step S120.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 2 employs a configuration in which the display of the non-play reset selection screen begins on the condition that a first time (10 seconds in this embodiment 2) has elapsed since the transition to the non-play performance state without the non-play performance state ending. However, when this configuration is employed, the following problem may occur. That is, with this configuration, for example, even if a player who is playing a game operates the cross key or the first performance button 63a to adjust the volume and light intensity or customize the performance immediately after the transition to the non-play performance state, the display of the non-play reset selection screen begins after the first time has elapsed since the transition to the non-play performance state, and it may become impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity or customize the performance.

Therefore, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which, for example, if a player performs an operation between the transition to the non-progression state of the game presentation and the passage of a first hour, the measurement of the elapsed time since the transition to the non-progression state of the game presentation is stopped, thereby preventing the non-play reset selection screen from being displayed.

However, if such a configuration is adopted carelessly, another problem may occur, such as the inability to collectively reset various settings classified into the second setting.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such another problem, the player's operation is not performed before the first time elapses after transitioning to the game production non-progress state. When this is performed, the elapsed time from the transition to the game production non-progress state is reset, and the elapsed time is measured again based on the timing when the operation was performed. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the player has performed the operation (step S120: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether the measurement flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to "ON". It is determined whether or not (step S121). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the transition to the game performance non-progress state is being measured. Here, if it is determined that the measurement flag is set to "ON" (step S121: YES), the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 becomes "0". The elapsed time is reset (step S122), and measurement of the elapsed time is started anew (step S123).

In this way, when the measurement flag is set to "ON", by performing the process of step S122 and the process of step S123, the last operation performed by the player in the game production non-progress state is The display of the non-gaming reset selection screen is started at the timing when the first time has elapsed since the start of the reset selection screen, and as a result, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned plurality of problems at the same time.

In addition, here, when an operation is performed by the player in the game performance non-progress state, the display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming starts at the timing when the first time has elapsed since the operation was performed. will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, a third time period (for example, 7 seconds) shorter than the first time period has elapsed since the last operation by the player in the game performance non-progress state. The display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming may be started at the same timing.

When the microcomputer 91 for effect control executes the process of step S123, or when it determines that the measurement in progress flag is not set to "ON" (step S121: NO), it determines whether or not the game effect is in progress (step S124). For example, if it has received a change start command related to the first special symbol hit/miss judgment from the main control board 80 but has not yet received a change stop command, it can determine that the game effect is in progress. Also, it can determine that the game effect is in progress before the fixed time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the change stop command was received (the special symbol is displayed frozen).

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the game performance is in progress (step S124: YES), it determines whether or not the operation promotion performance is within the valid period (step S125). When an operation promotion performance is executed during a game performance including a variable display of performance symbols, information indicating the validity period of the operation promotion performance is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For this reason, when the operation promotion effect is executed, it is determined that the operation promotion effect is still valid based on the elapsed time since the game effect was started and the information indicating the validity period stored in the RAM. It can be determined whether or not. Note that if the information indicating the valid period of the operation promotion effect is not stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, it is determined in step S125 that the operation promotion effect is not within the valid period.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation prompting effect is in effect (step S125: YES), it determines whether the effect button has been operated (step S126). Specifically, when an operation prompting effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 63a, it determines whether the first effect button 63a has been operated based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c. On the other hand, when an operation prompting effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the second effect button 63b, it determines whether the second effect button 63b has been operated based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the second effect button detection switch 63d.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the performance button has been operated (step S126: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the performance corresponding to the operation (step S127). For example, if the first performance button 63a is operated during an operation promotion performance performed before the reach of the performance symbol is established, a performance image showing a predetermined character uttering a line is displayed on the first display screen 7a. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of an operation-responsive effect called a speech preview. For example, if an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the second performance button 63b is executed at the end of the highly reliable reach performance, and the second performance button 63b is operated during the valid period of this operation promotion performance, the game performance On the condition that the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment carried out at the start of is a "jackpot", the movable decorative member 14 is operated, and the LED, board lamp 5, and frame built in the movable decorative member 14 are operated. A command is sent to the lamp control board 107 to instruct execution of an effect that causes the lamp 66 to emit light in rainbow colors.

On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation promotion effect is not in effect (step S125: NO), it determines whether the left or right key on the cross key has been operated (step S128). Here, since the result of step S124 is "YES," the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)), the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), or the in-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)) is displayed on the third display screen 72a, and these screens must be switched in response to the player's operation of the left or right key on the cross key. In order to realize such screen switching processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the left key or the right key of the cross key has been operated (step S128: YES), it executes the switching process (step S129). Specifically, for example, if an operation of the right key is detected while the customization reception screen is displayed, a command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of a process of switching the customization reception screen to a volume/light intensity adjustment screen. . Further, for example, if an operation of the left key is detected while the effect customization screen is being displayed, a command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of processing for switching the effect customization screen to the volume/light amount adjustment screen. Further, for example, if an operation of the right key is detected while the effect customization screen is being displayed, a command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of processing for switching the effect customization screen to the in-game reset selection screen.

On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the game performance is not in progress (step S124: NO), that is, when the game performance is in a non-progress state where the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the sub-control board 90 It is determined whether the adjustment/change prohibition flag stored in the RAM is set to "ON" (step S130). This adjustment/change prohibition flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) starts displaying (see steps S116 and 117 in FIG. 59). When the selection screen is not displayed, it is set to "OFF".

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment/change prohibition flag is not set to "ON" (step S130: NO), that is, if the reset selection screen is not displayed during non-gaming, the third display Since it is possible to switch between the various screens displayed on the screen 72a, the process in step S128 is executed in the same way as when the determination in step S125 is "NO".

On the other hand, if the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON", the non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is displayed, and the cursor must be moved between the "Yes" and "No" selection items by operating the up or down key on the directional pad. Therefore, when the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON" (step S130: YES), it executes the processing of step S132 described below.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the left or right key on the cross key has not been operated (step S128: NO), or if it determines that the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON" (step S130: YES), it determines whether the up or down key on the cross key has been operated based on whether a detection signal notifying that the up or down key on the cross key has been operated has been input from the key operation detection switch 63e (step S132). Here, if it is determined that the up or down key on the cross key has not been operated (step S132: NO), the process proceeds to step S137 (see FIG. 61) described below.

When the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed, the player can switch screens by operating the left or right key on the directional pad. On the other hand, the up or down key on the directional pad does not function while the customization reception screen is displayed. For this reason, when the customization reception screen is displayed, the process of step S132 will never return "YES", but will return "NO" and the process will proceed to step S137.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the up or down key on the cross key has been operated (step S132: YES), it determines whether the volume and light adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 100 stores screen information indicating which of the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)), the volume and light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), and the in-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)) is being displayed on the third display screen 72a. In step S133, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the volume and light adjustment screen is being displayed based on whether the screen indicated by the screen information stored in the RAM is the volume and light adjustment screen.

By the way, among the volume/light intensity adjustment screen, effect customization screen, and in-game reset selection screen illustrated in FIGS. It is only necessary to execute this on the volume/light adjustment screen; for the other two screens, it is necessary to execute cursor movement processing that moves the cursor according to the operation of the up or down key on the cross key. . Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume/light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133: YES), it executes an increase/decrease process (step S134). Specifically, when a display object containing the word "volume" is highlighted on the volume/light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(A)), the production control microcomputer 91 controls the effect in response to the operation of the up key. , sends a command to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of a process to increase the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects that make up the volume image, and in response to the operation of the down key, the volume image A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of a process for reducing the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects that make up the image control board 100 . In addition, when a display object including the characters "light amount" on the volume/light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is highlighted, the production control microcomputer 91 displays a light amount image in response to the operation of the up key. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of a process to increase the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects that make up the display object, and a light intensity image is constructed in response to the operation of the down key. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of a process to reduce the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects.

On the other hand, if the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S133: NO), that is, the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(B)) or the in-game reset selection screen ( 55(C)), a command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of the process of moving the cursor as described above based on FIGS. 55(B) to (C).

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the up key or down key of the cross key is not operated (step S132: NO), the volume/light amount adjustment screen is being displayed, as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S137). The determination process in step S137 is performed in the same manner as the process in step S133 described above.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume/light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S137: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process of step S120 above based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first production button detection switch 63c. It is determined whether the operation determined to have been performed by the player is an operation of the first effect button 63a (step S138). Here, if it is determined that the first effect button 63a has been operated (step S138: YES), a volume/light amount setting process is executed (step S139). Specifically, when the volume increase/decrease process is executed in the process of step S134, the volume information is updated so that the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicates the volume after the volume increase/decrease process. . In addition, when an increase/decrease process regarding the light amount is executed in the process of step S134 above, the light amount information that includes information notifying the light amount after the increase/decrease process and is stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 is specified by the notified information. A command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of an update process to indicate the amount of light to be used.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the processing of step S139, determines that the volume/light adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S137: NO), or determines that the operation by the player is not an operation of the first performance button 63a (step S138: NO), it determines whether or not the performance customization screen is being displayed based on the screen information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 100 (step S140).

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the performance customization screen is being displayed (step S1410: YES), it executes customization processing (step S141). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 90 stores customization information indicating the contents of various settings classified as the second setting, and the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the customization information so that the setting changes of each setting included in the performance customization screen are reflected. Then, it sets a customization content notification pattern (step S142). Specifically, for various settings displayed on the performance customization screen, the number of settings changed to "ON" is identified based on the customization information, the number of performances to be notified by the customization number notification image (see FIG. 56) is determined, and information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as setting information for custom content notification. In addition, for various settings displayed on the performance customization screen, the contents of the settings changed to "ON" are identified based on the customization information, the order in which the specified setting contents are to be displayed is determined, and information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as setting information for custom content notification.

Following the processing of step S142, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits to the image control board 100 a customization content notification command that includes the two setting information stored in the RAM in the processing of step S142 and instructs the execution of the above-mentioned customization content notification (display of the customization number notification image and the customization content notification image) based on FIG. 56 (step S143). As a result, as described above based on FIG. 56, a customization number notification image is displayed that indicates the number of settings that are set differently from the initial settings among the various settings classified as the second setting, and a customization content notification image is displayed to indicate the contents of the settings that are set differently from the initial settings in order. FIG. 56 illustrates how the characters shown in the customization content notification image are switched in the order of "premium mode", "preview reduction mode", and "back button suggestion" because the premier mode, pre-reading reduction mode, and back button suggestion are all set to "ON".

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the effect customization screen is not being displayed (step S140: NO), that is, when the play reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)) or the non-play reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is being displayed, it determines whether or not "Yes" has been selected (step S144). Specifically, when the cursor is positioned on the "Yes" selection item, it determines whether or not "Yes" has been selected based on whether or not a detection signal notifying that the first effect button 63a has been operated has been input from the first effect button detection switch 63c. Here, if it is determined that "Yes" has not been selected (step S144: NO), the series of operation response processes ends and the process returns to step S120.

On the other hand, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that "Yes" is selected (step S144: YES), it executes a customization initialization process (step S145). Specifically, the customization information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is information indicating that all settings classified as the second setting are set to "OFF" (initial setting). to update customization information.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S145 or when it determines that "YES" has not been selected (step S144: NO), it determines whether or not the non-play reset selection screen is being displayed based on whether or not the adjustment/change prohibition flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 100 is set to "ON" (step S146). Here, when it determines that the non-play reset selection screen is being displayed (step S146: YES), it causes the image control board 100 to end the display of the non-play reset selection screen (step S147) and sets the adjustment/change prohibition flag to "OFF" (step S148). Then, in order to display the non-play reset selection screen again as necessary after the display of the non-play reset selection screen has ended, the elapsed time is reset (step S149) in the same manner as the processes of steps S122 and 123, and measurement of the elapsed time is started (step S150).

Note that, here, the processing executed by the performance control microcomputer 91 to realize the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 2 has been described based on Figures 59 to 61, but in other embodiments, part of the processing executed by the performance control microcomputer 91 may be executed in the image control board 100.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. Here, FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment. The flow of this performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. In addition, in the following explanation, the explanation of the common configuration and common processing with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Examples 1 and 2 will be omitted, and the explanation will be mainly about the configuration and the common processing that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Embodiment 1 and 2. The process will be explained.

In the low probability low base state, when the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a, and the first special symbol indicating the judgment result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is displayed in a static manner. In response to this, on the first display screen 7a, the display of the variable manner of the performance symbol (in this embodiment, the display of the variable manner of three symbol rows) begins with the start of the display of the variable manner of the first special symbol (see FIG. 62 (A)). Specifically, for example, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, which is one of the multiple performance modes (see FIG. 64), in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), each symbol row is displayed in three rows horizontally so that a part of the pattern row of the performance symbol in which the numbers "1" to "9" are written vertically in succession from bottom to top is displayed (for example, see FIG. 66 (A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol begins, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows begins so that these symbol rows scroll from top to bottom (see, for example, FIG. 66 (B)).

In addition, immediately after the fluctuating display of each symbol row starts, or immediately after a so-called pseudo continuous effect is executed, each symbol column scrolls at high speed, making it difficult to visually recognize (identify) the effect symbols. In each screen diagram such as FIG. 66(B), in order to express such a state, each symbol row is scrolled at high speed by a broken line with an arrow indicating the scrolling direction.

On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 3 has a feature that the display mode and change mode of the performance symbols differ depending on the performance mode of the change performance (performance including the change display of the performance symbols) performed on the first display screen 7a. The display mode and change mode of the performance symbols for each performance mode will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 62, if the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is "lose" and it is determined not to perform the reach effect, That is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the reach effect is not executed is selected, the three production symbols indicating the winning number (for example, "294") are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as one special symbol, a loss notification performance is performed to stop these three performance symbols (see FIG. 62(B)). Here, "pseudo-stop" refers to making the performance symbols displayed at a predetermined position swing in place without moving them.In the following explanation, the actual stop (simply (Sometimes called "stop display"), it is sometimes called "pseudo stop".

So far, we have explained the variation presentation when the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment is "miss" and the reach performance is not executed, but when the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment is "jackpot" or when it is decided to execute the reach performance despite the result being "miss", in other words, when a variation pattern of the first special pattern which executes the reach performance is selected, a pre-reach performance is executed during the display of the first special pattern fluctuation, in which, for example, the left pattern is pseudo-stopped on the effective line in the performance pattern display area 7b (see Figure 3), and the right row of patterns is scrolled at a slow speed so that the right pattern which is common to the left pattern moves onto the effective line (see Figure 62 (C)). In addition, the pre-reach performance is not limited to this. After the display of the changing performance patterns has begun, the right pattern is first pseudo-stopped on the effective line, and then the left row of patterns is scrolled at a slow speed so that the left pattern that is common to this right pattern moves onto the effective line, or after the display of the changing performance patterns has begun, the left pattern and the right pattern (same as the left pattern) are moved toward the effective line so that they pseudo-stop simultaneously on the effective line.

As a result of these pre-reach performances, when the common left and right symbols come to a pseudo-stop on the active line, a reach is established (see FIG. 62(D)). In this way, when the performance symbols that are common to the left and right symbols come to a pseudo-stop and a reach is established, the game recognizes that the performance symbols that are common to these performance symbols (reach symbols) will stop on the effective line in the middle row. A reach performance that will make people look forward to it will be performed. In this third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, the reach effects that can be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state include normal short reach, normal long reach, 1st SP reach, Five types of reach effects are prepared: 2nd SP reach and SPSP reach.

The normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is a reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects described above (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect with a shorter execution time than the normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, the normal short reach is usually performed. When this normal short reach is performed, once the reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols will gradually decrease, and between the left and right symbols that form the reach, there will be a middle symbol or reach symbol that is the same as the reach symbol. A scrolling display of a middle symbol row is performed in which a different middle symbol is pseudo-stopped (for example, see FIG. 63(B)).

Here, if a variable effect pattern is set to notify the winner or loser in the normal short reach, the win or loss alert effect (win alert effect or loss alert effect) will be performed at the end of the normal short reach (see Figure 62(F)). . Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment this time is "Jackpot", the middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to make a double (for example, "222"). After the performance symbols showing the above are brought to a pseudo stop, a winning notification performance is performed in which these performance symbols are brought to a real stop. On the other hand, if the judgment result of this first special symbol validity judgment is "lose", a middle symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to indicate a reach loser (e.g. "232") After the performance symbols are pseudo-stopped, a loss notification performance is performed in which these performance symbols are brought to a real stop.

On the other hand, if a variable performance pattern that develops from normal short reach to other reach performances is set, in other words, the (first special When the variation pattern (of symbols) is selected, the following effects are performed. For example, if a variable performance pattern is set in which the normal short reach (see Figure 62 (E)) evolves into the normal long reach (see Figure 62 (G)), and a win or loss is announced at the normal long reach, the normal short reach At the final stage of the reach, a predetermined development suggestion effect suggesting the development to a normal long reach is performed, and high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is resumed, and the reach effect develops to a normal long reach. In this normal long reach, for example, an effect display is performed in the center area of the first display screen 7a to make the player expect a predetermined character to match the symbols. FIG. 63(C) shows an example of the normal long reach being executed, but the illustration of the effect display that makes you expect the symbols to line up is omitted.

The normal long reach is the reach effect with the second lowest jackpot reliability after the normal short reach among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 4%), and in most cases, the normal long reach does not develop into another reach effect, but a miss notification effect (see FIG. 62(F)) is performed during the normal long reach. However, if the result of this first special pattern hit/miss determination is a jackpot, the normal long reach may also produce a hit notification effect (see FIG. 62(F)). Also, if a variable presentation pattern is set that develops from the normal long reach into another reach effect (in this embodiment, the first SP reach or SPSP reach), the reach effect will develop from the normal long reach to the first SP reach (see FIG. 62(H)) or the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)).

Here, the first SP reach is the reach effect with the second lowest jackpot reliability after the normal long reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 11%), and when the normal long reach develops into the first SP reach, the following effect is performed. That is, at the end of the normal long reach, the middle row of symbols scrolls at a low speed, and after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes on the active line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols resumes, and the reach symbols (left and right symbols) that are pseudo-stopped on the active line move to the upper left and upper right regions of the first display screen 7a, respectively, while shrinking while maintaining the reach state (see FIG. 63(D)). Then, the first SP reach effect image is displayed in the center region of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display that raises the expectation of a jackpot is performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 3, there are cases where a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) progresses to the above-mentioned first SP reach (see FIG. 62(H)) without passing through a normal long reach, where a normal short reach progresses directly to a second SP reach (see FIG. 62(I)) without passing through a normal long reach, and where a normal short reach progresses directly to an SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)) without passing through a normal long reach.

Here, the second SP reach is a reach effect with a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the first SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%), and when a normal short reach develops into a second SP reach, the following effect is performed. That is, at the end of a normal long reach, the middle row of symbols scrolls at a slow speed, and after a middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol passes on the active line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols resumes, and the reach symbols (left and right symbols) that are pseudo-stopped on the active line move to the upper left and upper right regions of the first display screen 7a, respectively, while shrinking while maintaining the reach state (see FIG. 63(E)). Then, a second SP reach effect image is displayed in the center region of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display that raises the expectation of a jackpot is performed.

By the way, in the first SP reach and the second SP reach, an effect display that makes you expect a jackpot is performed in the same screen configuration, but these reach effects are different from each other in their effect content. Specifically, in the first SP reach, an effect display is performed in which if the player's own character is able to prevent the attack of the enemy character, it will be a jackpot, and conversely, if the player's character cannot prevent the attack of the enemy character, it will be a loss. On the other hand, the second SP reach is configured as a mission effect, and if the own character succeeds in the mission, it will be a jackpot, and conversely, if the character fails in the mission, the effect will be displayed as a loss.

When it develops into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the reliability of these reach effects in a jackpot is relatively low, so in the win/loss notification effects (see Figure 62 (J)), the miss notification effect is more likely to be executed than the win notification effect. For this reason, when it develops into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player will hope that it will develop from these SP reaches into the SPSP reach (see Figure 62 (K)).

Here, SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)) is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects mentioned above. In this third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, there are two cases in which a reach develops directly into an SPSP reach immediately after the reach is established (see FIGS. 62 (D) and (K)), a normal short reach, and a normal long reach. (see Figure 62 (E), (G), and (K)), and when it develops into SPSP reach through normal short reach and first SP reach (see Figure 62 (E)). ), (H), and (K)), and when it develops into SPSP reach via normal short reach and second SP reach (see Fig. 62 (E), (I), and (K)), There are cases where normal short reach directly develops into SPSP reach (see FIGS. 62(E) and (K)).

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in an SPSP reach, an SPSP reach effect image is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 63 (F)), and a battle effect is executed in which the player's character battles an enemy character; if the result of this first special symbol hit/miss determination is a "jackpot," a victory effect in which the player's character beats the enemy character and a hit notification effect are executed, and if it is a miss, a defeat effect in which the player's character is defeated by the enemy character and a miss notification effect are executed.

[About screen configuration]
FIG. 63 is a screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the first display screen 7a in the low-accuracy, low-base state. In the low probability low base state, as illustrated in FIG. 63(A), a pending icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e are formed on the first display screen 7a below the effect symbol display area 73. Ru.

<Hold icon display area 9c>
The reserved icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63(A)) is a display area where a reserved icon (reserved display image) indicating that the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is reserved is displayed, and is a display area corresponding to the first performance reserved display area 9c exemplified in Example 1. In the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 3, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 in a situation where the special symbol hit/miss judgment and the special symbol hit/miss display cannot be started immediately, such as during the special symbol hit/miss judgment or during a jackpot game, the right to make the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four).

In this way, when the right to judge whether the first special pattern is a winner or loser is reserved, the reserved icon display area 9c displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved first special pattern win/loss judgments indicated by the first special pattern reserve indicator 43a. Figure 63 (A) illustrates a state in which one reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c to indicate that the number of reserved first special pattern win/loss judgments is "1".

However, if a reserve icon is displayed in the reserve icon display area 9c during the execution of a highly reliable reach effect such as the above-mentioned SPSP reach (see FIG. 62 (K)), not only is the display area used for the reach effect limited, but the display of the reserve icon may reduce the interest of the reach effect. For example, if a reserve icon (e.g., a red reserve icon) with a display mode that suggests a relatively high reliability of a jackpot due to a so-called reserve pre-reading effect is displayed in the reserve icon display area 9c, the player's attention will likely be drawn to the reserve icon, and the performance effect of the reach effect being executed may be significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, during the pre-reach performance described above based on FIG. 62(C) and during the normal short reach performance described above based on FIG. 62(E), the hold icon display area While displaying the display object (in this embodiment 3, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon (see FIGS. 63(A) and (B)) that constitute 9c, the reach effect has a higher jackpot reliability than the normal long reach. During execution, a configuration is adopted in which display objects and pending icons constituting the pending icon display area 9c are not displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 63(C) to (F)).

<Icon Display Area 9e>
The icon display area 9e is a display area that displays the "icon" as a change suggestion image that suggests that the first special symbol is changing. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e when the change display of the first special symbol starts (for example, see FIG. 63(A)), and is erased from the icon display area 9e when the change display of the first special symbol ends. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the change display of the first special symbol, for example, the icon may be erased during the development of the SPSP reach or during the SPSP reach.

By the way, if a game ball enters the first starting slot 20 in a state where the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the right to judge whether the special symbol is correct or not is reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. On the other hand, when the pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c, when the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e ends, the icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c. The first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the pending icon displayed in the position closest to the icon display area 9e) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in accordance with the execution of this first special symbol propriety determination, the earliest pending icon is shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e. , will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 9e is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63(A)). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c.

Note that if another pending icon different from the first pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c, as the first pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, the pending icon display area 9c , the other pending icons are shifted in the direction closer to the icon display area 9e. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the icon corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c may be displayed in the icon display area 9e. Therefore, in the following description, if the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon."

(Screen layout when fluctuations start)
When the first special pattern hit/miss judgment that was reserved in the low probability low base state is executed, the first special pattern variable display is started, and the icon shift process is performed accordingly. Specifically, for example, when the first first special pattern hit/miss judgment is executed in a state in which two rights of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment are reserved, as illustrated in FIG. 63(A), the first reserved icon of the two reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the second reserved icon is shifted to the display position where the first reserved icon was displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c. In addition, high-speed scrolling of the three pattern rows is started with the start of the variable display of the first special pattern (see FIG. 63(A)).

Immediately after the high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows is started, a part of the effect patterns of each of the three symbol rows is displayed on the first display screen 7a in the effect pattern display area 7b, and a predetermined background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a so that some of the effect patterns of these three symbol rows are superimposed (see FIG. 63(A)). For example, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode described later, a background image dedicated to the fourth normal mode (selected music effect image: see FIG. 65) is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the effect mode name "fourth normal mode" corresponding to the background image is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. During the high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows, the effect patterns constituting the three symbol rows are displayed semi-transparently, so that the player can see the background image corresponding to the effect mode through the effect patterns constituting the three symbol rows.

In addition, in FIG. 63(A), a background image dedicated to the fourth normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the production mode name "4th normal mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Although the displayed state is illustrated, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the background image exclusively for the first normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the “first normal mode” The production mode name "Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65, 68, and 69). Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, a background image exclusively for the second normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the performance mode name "Second Normal Mode" is displayed in the first It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 70). Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, a background image exclusively for the third normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the performance mode name "Third Normal Mode" is displayed in the first display screen 7a. It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 71 to 73).

(Screen configuration during normal short reach)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, after the high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows has started, the scrolling speed of each symbol row gradually decreases, and the effect symbols common to the left and right symbols come to a pseudo stop and reach may hold true and develop into a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)). In this way, if the normal short reach develops, the background image that was displayed on the first display screen 7a before the reach was established will continue to be displayed, and with this background image displayed, the normal short reach will continue. Such a predetermined effect display is performed (see FIG. 63(B)).

In addition, in this third embodiment, a case where the background image displayed during normal short reach will be continuously displayed until the end of normal short reach will be explained as an example, but from normal short reach to other reach effects. In the case of further development, the background image may be changed to another effect image during the normal short reach. For example, when the reach effect develops from normal short reach to normal long reach (see Figure 62 (G)), the background image changes to a long suggestive image that suggests normal long reach in the middle of normal short reach, When the reach effect develops from normal short reach to 1st SP reach (see Figure 62 (H)), the background image is changed to the 1st SP suggestion image that suggests 1st SP reach in the middle of normal short reach, and the normal When the reach effect develops from short reach to 2nd SP reach (see Figure 62 (I)), a configuration such as changing the background image to a 2nd SP suggestion image that suggests 2nd SP reach in the middle of normal short reach is possible. This is given as an example.

(Screen configuration during normal long reach)
On the other hand, during normal long reach, which has developed from normal short reach, as illustrated in FIG. In a pseudo-stopped state, a predetermined normal long reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. As a result, during the normal long reach, an effect display is performed in the center area of the first display screen 7a that makes the player expect a predetermined character to match the symbols.

In addition, in this Example 3, during normal short reach, although the background image that has been displayed since before the reach is established (during pre-reach performance) is continuously displayed, the reliability of jackpot is higher than in normal short reach. During the reach effect, a dedicated reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. In this way, when a reach effect image dedicated to each reach effect is displayed, if a hold icon that is not directly related to the current variable effect or a display object forming the hold icon display area 9c is displayed, the reach effect image As a result, there is a possibility that the visibility of each reach effect may be reduced and the interest of each reach effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the third embodiment, during the normal long reach, the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, the pending icon and the display objects constituting the pending icon display area 9c (here, each pending icon pedestal) is not displayed (see FIGS. 63(C) to (F)).

(Screen configuration during 1st SP reach)
Subsequently, during the 1st SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63(D), the left symbols constituting the reach symbols are displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbols are A predetermined first SP ready-to-win effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a while the constituent right symbols are displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during the 2nd SP reach)
Also, during the second SP reach, as illustrated in Figure 63 (E), the left pattern that constitutes the reach pattern is displayed in a small quasi-stopped state in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the right pattern that constitutes the reach pattern is displayed in a small quasi-stopped state in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined second SP reach performance image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during SPSP reach)
Also, during an SPSP reach, as illustrated in Figure 63 (F), the left pattern that constitutes the reach pattern is displayed in a small quasi-stopped state in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the right pattern that constitutes the reach pattern is displayed in a small quasi-stopped state in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined SPSP reach performance image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a.

(About the composition of the production design)
Although not shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, except when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode (the performance is controlled in any one of the first normal mode to the third normal mode) ), the performance pattern displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b is a character image representing a predetermined person, with respect to identification information (in this embodiment, numbers) for distinguishing the performance pattern from other performance patterns. (See FIGS. 66 to 73). In this embodiment, the case where the identification information is a number will be explained as an example, but the identification information is not limited to numbers, as long as it is information that allows the production pattern to be distinguished from other production patterns. For example, the identification information is an alphabet. It may also be a symbol or the like.

In contrast, adding a character image to the reach symbols displayed small in the upper left and upper right areas of the first display screen 7a may reduce the visibility of the small reach symbols and may actually reduce the interest of each reach performance. For this reason, in this embodiment 3, when the reach symbols (left and right symbols) are displayed small and pseudo-stop in the upper left and upper right areas of the first display screen 7a, the reach symbols without the character image added are displayed.

[About the change in presentation mode]
64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various presentation modes in a low-probability low base state. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, four types of normal presentation modes, namely, a first normal mode, a second normal mode, a third normal mode, and a fourth normal mode, are prepared as normal presentation modes (normal presentation modes) related to the variable presentation performed using the first display screen 7a, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. in association with the variable display of the first special symbol in a low-probability low base state (see FIG. 64).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, the production control microcomputer 91 counts the number of variations, which is the number of times the first special symbol and the production symbol are displayed in a variable manner (symbol variation) in one normal production mode. When the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 15 times), one normal presentation mode changes to another normal presentation mode. For example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the first normal mode changes to the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the second normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the second normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the third normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the third normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the fourth normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the fourth normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the third normal mode.

The normal presentation mode to which the player transitions is determined by, for example, a presentation lottery by the presentation control microcomputer 91. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a first normal mode destination selection table that is referenced when selecting a normal presentation mode to which the first normal mode transitions, a second normal mode destination selection table that is referenced when selecting a normal presentation mode to which the second normal mode transitions, a third normal mode destination selection table that is referenced when selecting a normal presentation mode to which the third normal mode transitions, and a fourth normal mode destination selection table that is referenced when selecting a normal presentation mode to which the fourth normal mode transitions. In these destination selection tables, different random number values are associated with the three possible normal presentation modes to which the player transitions.

For example, when selecting the normal production mode to which the first normal mode is transferred, the production control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing. That is, when the number of variations in the symbol variations performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the performance control microcomputer 91 changes the number of variations with respect to the transition destination selection random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process in the sub-control board 90. A random number when reaches a predetermined number of times is acquired as a migration destination selection random number. On the other hand, in the first normal mode/transition destination selection table, different random values are associated with each of the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the third normal mode, and the production control The microcomputer 91 reads one normal presentation mode associated with a random value that matches the acquired transition destination selection random number from the first normal mode/transition destination selection table, and selects the normal presentation mode as the transition destination. Select.

Although the combinations of normal presentation modes specified in the transition selection table differ from the random number values associated with each normal presentation mode, it is possible to select the normal presentation mode to transition to by performing the same process when transitioning from the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode to another normal presentation mode.

However, when a miss notification effect is executed in a reach effect that has a relatively high probability of a jackpot, such as the first SP reach, second SP reach, or SPSP reach, the player may not be able to overcome the negative feelings about the fact that the win notification effect was not executed, and as a result, may stop playing.

In order to prevent such problems from occurring, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 3, when a miss notification effect is executed in the first SP reach, second SP reach, or SPSP reach, regardless of whether the number of changes has reached a predetermined number, the normal presentation mode immediately before the development into these reach effects is changed to another normal presentation mode from the pattern change following the pattern change in which these reach effects were executed. For example, when the first special pattern and the performance pattern are being displayed while the performance is being executed in the second normal mode during the pre-reach performance or normal short reach, and a miss notification effect is executed in the second SP reach developed from the normal short reach, a performance lottery is executed using the above-mentioned destination selection random number and the second normal mode destination selection table, and the normal presentation mode to be the destination is selected based on the result of the performance lottery. Then, with the start of the pattern change following the pattern change in which the miss notification effect was executed in the second SP reach, the second normal mode is changed to the normal presentation mode selected by the above-mentioned performance lottery.

In this way, when a loss notification performance is executed with a reach performance with relatively high jackpot reliability, by changing the normal performance mode to another normal performance mode, the hit notification performance is lower than normal short reach etc. This will encourage players to change their minds and feel disappointed because the winning notification effect was not executed even though the 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, which are easy to execute, have been executed, and as a result, the players' It is possible to contribute to reducing discomfort.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the reliability of the big win is relatively high, that is, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol hit/miss in the low probability low base state is a "big win" or when a variation pattern of the first special symbol that is a "miss" but has a relatively long variation time is selected, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the selected variation pattern, one of the above-mentioned four types of normal presentation modes may transition to another presentation mode. That is, one of the normal presentation modes may transition to a chance mode, which is a presentation mode with a higher reliability of the big win than the normal presentation mode, or to a super hot mode, which has an even higher reliability of the big win than the chance mode, or may transition to the super hot mode via the chance mode.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the right to judge whether the first special symbol is a hit or not is reserved, the game control microcomputer 81 may execute a pre-judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been hit before the first special symbol is judged, and to specify the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected when the first special symbol is actually judged. Based on the result of this pre-judgment, the normal presentation mode may shift to the chance mode, the normal presentation mode may shift to the hot mode, or the normal presentation mode may shift to the hot mode via the chance mode before the first special symbol is judged to be a hit or not, which is the subject of the pre-judgment process. Also, the normal presentation mode may shift to the chance mode before the first special symbol is judged to be a hit or not, which is the subject of the pre-judgment process, and the chance mode may shift to the hot mode during the variation display of the first special symbol that is performed in response to the first special symbol being judged to be a hit or not.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the normal performance mode may shift to the chance mode or the super hot mode, so by performing the mode transition performance as described above, the player's expectations for a jackpot can be increased. It is possible to improve the performance and obtain high performance effects.

However, the above-mentioned mode transition effect has the characteristic that it is difficult to execute when the result of the first special symbol hit/miss determination is "miss" and a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. For this reason, if a player has difficulty hitting a jackpot and there is a long period in which only the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, combined with the fact that a highly reliable reach effect is not executed, it is thought that interest will gradually decrease.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 3, the above-mentioned decrease in interest is suppressed by switching between normal presentation modes to change the background image on which the presentation pattern is superimposed, change the display mode of the presentation pattern, change the fluctuation mode of the presentation pattern, perform dialogue presentation using similar images that are presentation images similar to the character images that make up the presentation pattern, and perform composite presentations in which numbers and character images are combined to form presentation patterns.

[Features of each normal mode]
Next, referring to Fig. 65, the features of each normal presentation mode will be described. Here, Fig. 65 is a list illustrating the features of each normal presentation mode. As described above based on Fig. 64, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode are prepared as normal presentation modes related to the presentation performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state.

<Song selection>
In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a music selection screen, which will be described later, is displayed, and the player can perform a predetermined operation on this music selection screen to select the first music selection screen. It is possible to arbitrarily select the music to be played using the display screen 7a, the speaker 67, etc. (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, in the three normal performance modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the above song selection screen is not displayed, making it impossible for the player to arbitrarily select a song (see Figure 65). ).

<Background image>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, a background image dedicated to the first normal mode that is not displayed in other normal performance modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and When the performance is controlled in the normal mode, a second normal mode exclusive background image that is not displayed in other normal performance modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, A background image exclusively for the third normal mode, which is not displayed in other normal performance modes, is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

On the other hand, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, unlike when the presentation is controlled in the other normal presentation modes, a song selection screen for selecting one of multiple songs that can be played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 1), and the player can select one of the songs by performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first presentation button 63a (see FIG. 1) described above in Example 2. When the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, if a song is selected by a predetermined operation, a selected song presentation image (video of the selected song), which is a presentation image related to the selected song, is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 65).

When a song has not been selected by the player, the performance control microcomputer 91 selects one of the playable songs by a performance lottery and displays a song performance image (video of the song) related to the selected song on the first display screen 7a via the image control board 100. Then, when the display of the song performance image selected by the performance lottery ends, if the player has not selected a song, the performance lottery is executed again and a song performance image related to the newly selected song is displayed on the first display screen 7a. In addition, on the song selection screen, it is possible to select random playback in addition to one of the multiple songs, and when the player selects this random playback, the song performance image displayed on the first display screen 7a will automatically change.

<BGM>
Also, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, first normal mode-exclusive BGM corresponding to the first normal mode-exclusive background image is output from the speaker 67, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, second normal mode-exclusive BGM corresponding to the second normal mode-exclusive background image is output from the speaker 67, and when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, third normal mode-exclusive BGM corresponding to the third normal mode-exclusive background image is output from the speaker 67.

On the other hand, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the first display screen 7a displays a selected music presentation image for the selected music piece selected by the player, or a music presentation image for the music piece automatically selected by the presentation lottery. Therefore, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music piece selected arbitrarily or automatically that corresponds to the music presentation image displayed on the first display screen 7a is output from the speaker 67 as BGM exclusive to the fourth normal mode (see FIG. 65).

<Pending/Normal display of the icon>
Incidentally, the reserve icon displayed in the reserve icon display area 9c (see Figure 63 (A)) is normally displayed as a reserve icon in a normal display mode that does not indicate the degree of probability of a jackpot, and when a judgment of whether the corresponding first special pattern is a hit or miss is executed, this reserve icon in the normal display mode is moved to the icon display area 9e and displayed as that icon.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 3, based on the result of the above-mentioned pre-determination process performed in response to the reservation of the right to determine whether the first special symbol is a hit or not in the low probability low base state, an icon change effect may be performed in which the reserved icon in the normal display mode displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is changed to a reserved icon in a special display mode that indicates the degree of the jackpot reliability. When this icon change effect is performed, the reserved icon in the normal display mode (for example, a white reserved icon) is changed to a reserved icon in a color that indicates the jackpot reliability, such as blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow, as a reserved icon in a special display mode. The colors that indicate the jackpot reliability shown here are arranged in order from low to high jackpot reliability, and in Example 3, the jackpot reliability of the blue reserved icon is set to about 1%, the jackpot reliability of the green reserved icon is set to about 10%, the jackpot reliability of the red reserved icon is set to about 40%, the jackpot reliability of the gold reserved icon is set to about 65%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow reserved icon is set to 100%.

Up to this point, we have described an icon change effect in which the display color of a pending icon changes only once when it is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c. may be carried out. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, it changes to a blue hold icon, and then changes to a green hold icon. An icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon changes multiple times. Further, when a white pending icon shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c changes, and then the display color of the hold icon changes when it shifts to the icon display area 9e and is displayed as the icon. In other cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the hold icon is displayed in a display color other than white (e.g., blue) from the beginning, or the display color of a hold icon whose initial color is other than white changes to a higher display color.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c may be shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon as it is, so the following explanation will be given. In this case, when the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon."

So far, we have explained the icon change effect targeting the reserved icon and the icon in question, but when this icon change effect is not performed, the following problems may occur. That is, as described above, by switching from the normal effect mode to another normal effect mode, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a and the background music output from the speaker 67 change, so even if the effect that gives the expectation of a big win does not appear, a change in the effect occurs, which can contribute to preventing a decrease in interest.

On the other hand, when the icon change effect is not performed, the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, and the third normal mode. In a configuration where the display mode is completely the same when the display is in the 4th normal mode and when the performance is controlled in the 4th normal mode, the pending icon or the icon is displayed in the normal display mode. , there are few changes accompanying the transition of the production mode, and it is thought that the reduction in interest is not sufficiently suppressed.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the decline in interest, a configuration is adopted in which a pending icon and the icon are displayed with different shapes and sizes depending on the four types of normal performance modes ( (See Figure 65). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the icon dedicated to the first normal mode (for example, a hexagonal When the hold icon or the relevant icon (see FIG. 68(A)) is displayed and the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the second normal mode exclusive icon (for example A diamond-shaped hold icon or the corresponding icon (see FIG. 70(A)) is displayed. In addition, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, a hold icon in the normal display mode or an icon dedicated to the third normal mode (for example, an inverted triangle hold icon or the relevant icon: see FIG. 71(A) ) is displayed, and when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the hold icon in the normal display mode or the icon dedicated to the fourth normal mode (for example, the hold icon in the shape of a musical note or the icon: 66(A)).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to change the reserved icon or the normal display state of the icon by transitioning from the normal presentation mode to another presentation mode without performing the icon change presentation, so that the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation can effectively contribute to preventing a decline in interest.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 3, the reserved icon and the normal display mode of the icon are different for each normal presentation mode, while the special display mode of the reserved icon and the icon (the display mode of the reserved icon and the icon after the icon change presentation) is common between the normal presentation modes. For example, when comparing the first normal mode with the fourth normal mode, in the first normal mode, a hexagonal icon (see FIG. 68(A)) is displayed as the icon in the normal display mode, whereas in the fourth normal mode, a musical note-shaped icon (see FIG. 66(A)) is displayed as the icon in the normal display mode, and when comparing the two icons, the normal display modes are different from each other. Meanwhile, in the first normal mode, when the icon change effect is performed, the hexagonal icon changes to a circular icon (of a color suggesting the reliability of a jackpot) (see FIG. 68(A)), whereas in the fourth normal mode, when the icon change effect is performed, the musical note-shaped icon changes to a circular icon (of a color suggesting the reliability of a jackpot) (see FIG. 66(H) and (I)), and when comparing the two icons, the special display modes are the same. Here, the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode have been given as a comparative explanation, but the same can be said when comparing the other multiple normal effect modes.

For example, if you easily adopt a configuration in which the icon display mode (special display mode) after the icon change effect is different for each normal effect mode, the display color, shape, size, etc. of the icon will be different from the normal effect mode. This will vary depending on the type, and a problem may arise in that it becomes difficult to recognize the jackpot reliability based on the display mode of the icon after the icon change effect.

In contrast, in the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 3, the display mode (special display mode) of the icon after the icon change is standardized (same shape and size) between multiple normal presentation modes, so it is possible to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot based solely on the display color (blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow) of the icon after the icon change presentation, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of problems such as those described above.

In this embodiment 3, when comparing icons in the normal display mode displayed in each normal performance mode, the shapes and sizes are different from each other, but the display colors are the same. In other embodiments, a configuration in which the display colors are different from each other in addition to the shapes and sizes may be adopted. In this embodiment 3, the special display mode (here, the shape and size) of the icon after the icon change performance is common among multiple normal performance modes, and a configuration in which the jackpot reliability can be recognized based only on the display color of the icon is adopted. In other embodiments, other configurations may be adopted, such as making the special display mode (here, the shape and size) of the icon after the icon change different among multiple normal performance modes. In this case, a configuration in which the jackpot reliability is the same if the display color is the same even if the special display mode (here, the shape and size) of the icon after the icon change is different may also be adopted, or a configuration in which the jackpot reliability is different if the display color is the same even if the display color is the same but the shape and size are different may also be adopted.

<Design composition>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, the configuration of the effect patterns displayed in the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 3) is different between the three normal effect modes, the first normal mode to the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode. Specifically, when the effect is controlled in any of the normal effect modes, the first normal mode to the third normal mode, a effect pattern consisting of a number for distinguishing the effect pattern from other effect patterns and a character image (an example of a decorative image) added to the number is displayed in the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 68 to FIG. 73). On the other hand, when the effect is controlled in the fourth normal mode, an effect pattern consisting of only a number to which no character image is added is displayed in the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 66, 67).

As described above with reference to FIG. 65, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3, a selected music presentation image for a music selected by the player or a music presentation image for a music selected automatically is displayed as a background image on the first display screen 7a. For this reason, if a presentation pattern consisting of numbers and character images is superimposed on the music presentation image, the visibility of the music presentation image is significantly reduced, which may unnecessarily reduce the interest of the presentation of the music being played.

In order to prevent such problems from occurring, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3, as described above, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a presentation pattern consisting only of numbers with no character images attached is displayed in the presentation pattern display area 7b.

When comparing the three normal presentation modes, the first normal mode, the second normal mode, and the third normal mode, they have in common that the presentation pattern is composed of numbers and character images, but they differ in that the display form of the character images that compose the presentation pattern differs depending on the presentation mode.

Specifically, a production pattern with the number "1" is configured with a character image of character A, a production pattern with the number "2" is configured with a character image of character B, and the production pattern with the number "2" is configured with a character image of character B. The production pattern with the number "3" is configured with the character image of the character C, and the production pattern with the number "4" is configured with the character image of the character D, and has the number "5". The production design is composed of a character image of character E, the production design with the number “6” is composed of a character image of character F, and the production design with the number “7” is composed of a character image of character G. A production pattern having a character image and having the number "8" is made up of a character image of the character H, and a production design having the number "9" has a character image of the character I. In the first normal mode to the third The normal mode is common.

On the other hand, for example, when comparing each production pattern (hereinafter referred to as "2 patterns") that is composed of the number "2" displayed in the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the following is shown. There are some differences. That is, the two symbols displayed when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode are configured with a character image representing the upper body of character B, as illustrated in FIG. , the number "2" is added to the lower right of the character image. On the other hand, the two symbols displayed when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode are character images representing the upper body of character B, as illustrated in FIG. It is configured with a character image representing the character B which is larger than the character images composing the two symbols displayed when the production is controlled in the normal mode (see FIG. 68(A)), and the character image The number "2" is added to the lower right corner of the screen. In addition, the two symbols displayed when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode include a character image representing character B wearing a dress, as illustrated in FIG. 71(H). At the same time, the number "2" is added to the lower center of the character image.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, even if the character images represent the same character, the display manner of the character images differs depending on the production mode.

<Variation mode>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment has a feature that the manner in which the presentation symbols change differs for each normal presentation mode.

(1st normal mode)
Specifically, when the game is controlled in the first normal mode, in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), the numbers "1" to "9" are displayed consecutively in the horizontal direction from left to right. Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the vertical direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect design written as is displayed (for example, see FIG. 68(A)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from right to left (for example, as shown in FIG. 68(B) )reference). In this way, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the manner in which the performance symbols change is left scrolling (see FIG. 65).

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 68(A), the performance symbols that make up the lower row of symbols come to a pseudo stop in the lower left area of the performance symbol display area 7b before actually stopping, the performance symbols that make up the middle row of symbols come to a pseudo stop in the central area of the performance symbol display area 7b before actually stopping, and the performance symbols that make up the upper row of symbols come to a pseudo stop in the upper right area of the performance symbol display area 7b before actually stopping.

(Second normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the second normal mode, in the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 3), three rows of each pattern are displayed horizontally so that a part of the pattern rows of the effect patterns in which the numbers "1" to "9" are written vertically from bottom to top is displayed (see FIG. 70(A) for example). Then, as the variable display of the first special pattern starts, the scroll display of the three pattern rows starts so that these pattern rows scroll from top to bottom (see FIG. 70(B) for example). In this way, the variable mode of the effect patterns when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode is a downward scroll (see FIG. 65).

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 70(A), the performance symbols that make up the left row of symbols make a pseudo stop in the left area of the performance symbol display area 7b before actually stopping, the performance symbols that make up the middle row of symbols make a pseudo stop in the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b before actually stopping, and the performance symbols that make up the right row of symbols make a pseudo stop in the right area of the performance symbol display area 7b before actually stopping.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 70, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the character image forming the performance pattern is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and then the character image corresponding to the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Numbers are displayed on the first display screen 7a, and then a composite effect may be performed in which the character image and the number are combined to complete one effect pattern (see FIGS. 70(F) to (H)). . In FIGS. 70(F) to (H), a character image representing character H is displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a, and then the number "8" is displayed in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a. The left 8 symbols are completed by moving these character images and the number "8" to the left area of the first display screen 7a and combining them.

(Third normal mode)
When the game is controlled in the third normal mode, three performance symbols having any of the numbers "1" to "9" are displayed side by side in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3) (for example, see FIG. 71(A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each rotate so as to rotate clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko game machine 1 as the axial direction (for example, see FIG. 71(B) to (D)). Then, by each performance symbol rotating once, a performance symbol having a number incremented by "1" is displayed. In FIG. 71(B) to (D), the left 4 symbol rotates once clockwise to display the left 5 symbol, the middle 3 symbol rotates once clockwise to display the middle 4 symbol, and the right 1 symbol rotates once clockwise to display the right 2 symbol. In this way, when the presentation is controlled in the third normal mode, the manner in which the presentation pattern changes is rotation (clockwise rotation with the up-down direction as the axial direction) (see Figure 65).

As is clear from the notations in Figures 71 to 73, the left, middle, and right patterns rotate without any character images being added, and when a performance pattern consisting of only numbers comes to a pseudo-stop, a character image corresponding to that number is added. For example, Figures 71 (E) to (F) show an example of a composite performance in which, when the left 8 pattern comes to a pseudo-stop, a character image representing character H moving in from above the number "8" is composited with the number "8," completing the left 8 pattern consisting of the character image of character H and the number "8."

(4th normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the fourth normal mode, numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written vertically from bottom to top in the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect design is displayed (for example, see FIG. 66(A)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(B) )reference). In this way, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the manner in which the performance symbols fluctuate is downward scrolling (see FIG. 65).

In this third embodiment, the manner of variation of the production symbols in the fourth normal mode is the same as the variation manner of the production symbols in the second normal mode in that it scrolls down, but it is displayed during the fourth normal mode. The effect patterns displayed are different from the effect patterns displayed during the second normal mode in that each effect pattern does not have a character image (see FIGS. 66, 67, and 70).

In addition, in a configuration in which the left, middle, and right patterns move (scroll) on the first display screen 7a, the display area of the performance patterns tends to be wider than when the performance patterns rotate, for example, as in the third normal mode. For this reason, if the above configuration is adopted for the fourth normal mode in which the selected music performance image is displayed, the visibility of the selected music performance image tends to decrease.

Therefore, in another embodiment, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the production pattern in the third normal mode in the third embodiment is A configuration common to the variation mode (rotation) may be adopted. In addition, a performance display is performed in which a performance pattern consisting only of numbers moves from the back of the first display screen 7a to the front, and when the performance pattern moves to a predetermined position, it disappears from the first display screen 7a. , The production patterns made up of the numbers that were added by "1" to the numbers that made up the erased production patterns move in the same way, and the production patterns become 1, 2, and 3 in the following order. Another configuration may be adopted in which the effect symbols are varied in the depth direction of the first display screen 7a.

<Common character dialogue performance>
As shown in Fig. 65, when the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, a similar character image (one example of a similar image) showing a character common to the character shown in the character image constituting the presentation pattern is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a common character speech presentation may be performed in which the character shown by the similar character image speaks a line using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 (see Figs. 68 to 69 and 72 to 73). Details of this common character speech presentation will be described later in detail with reference to Figs. 68 to 69 and 72 to 73.

In this embodiment 3, the above-mentioned common character dialogue performance is performed when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, and is not executed when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode or the fourth normal mode (see Figure 65).

When such a configuration is adopted, by transitioning the production mode from the second normal mode (or fourth normal mode) to the first normal mode (or third normal mode), the effect that was not performed in the production mode before the transition can be changed. This means that common character dialogues that are not previously available can now be produced, and as a result, it is possible to produce effective changes in production.

<Synthesis effect>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, character images and numbers are displayed on the first display screen 7a when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode. In some cases, a composite effect is executed in which images are displayed individually and then combined and displayed as a effect image (see FIGS. 70 and 71). In the third embodiment, such a composite effect is executed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode, and when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the fourth normal mode. A configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned composite effect is not executed when the effect is controlled (see FIG. 65).

When this configuration is adopted, by transitioning the presentation mode from the first normal mode (or the fourth normal mode) to the second normal mode (or the third normal mode), a composite presentation that was not possible in the presentation mode prior to the transition is performed, resulting in an effective change in presentation.

[Specific example of production in the 4th normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, we will discuss a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy, low-base state and the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode. explain. Here, FIGS. 66 and 67 are screen diagrams illustrating the effects in the fourth normal mode. The effect executed when a variation pattern is selected in which a loss notification effect is performed in the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)), which is directly developed from (see )), will be described.

FIG. 66A shows a state in which one pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a first special icon corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. In order to inform that the determination result of the symbol validity judgment was "lost", the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the production symbol showing the winning number of "438" was stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the current performance mode name "4th performance mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and also as shown in FIG. Although not shown in , a selected music production image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern. In addition, since the icon change effect is not being performed, the one pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both in the shape of a musical note. It is displayed as an icon in the normal display mode.

As described above, when a predetermined confirmation time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment 3) has elapsed since the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a first special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed for the first reserved icon (here, the reserved icon in the shape of a musical note) displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c. Then, if the result of this first special symbol hit/miss judgment is "miss" and the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects a presentation pattern that progresses directly from a normal reach to an SPSP reach as the presentation pattern change pattern accompanying the changing display of the first special symbol, the following presentation is performed.

That is, as the first special symbol corresponding to the first reserved icon starts to change in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment, the first reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c shifts to the icon display area 9e, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows starts (see Fig. 66 (A) and (B)). When a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows started, for example, a step-up preview performance image (SU preview performance image) is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and a preview performance called an SU preview may be executed in which the display mode of this SU preview performance image changes in stages. In this SU preview, the reliability of a big win is suggested by the display color of the SU preview performance image and the number of stages to which the display mode of the SU preview performance image changes.

Following the above SU notice, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is such that during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol), the performance symbol displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b is displayed in a variable manner multiple times. It is a staged performance. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effects are displayed.

That is, the scrolling speed of the left row of symbols slows down and the left symbol (e.g., symbol 6) pseudo-stops, then the scrolling speed of the right row of symbols slows down and the right symbol (different from the left symbol that pseudo-stopped earlier) pseudo-stops (e.g., symbol 4), and then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols slows down and symbol 7 pseudo-stops as the middle symbol that indicates the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance (see Figure 66 (D)).

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. . Specifically, after the characters "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x2" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66(D) and (E)). When this pseudo second series of variable effects is being performed, for example, an SU preview may be executed as in the case of the pseudo first series of variable effects (see FIG. 66(F)).

As mentioned above, when the SU notice is executed during the variable display of the second pseudo series, the second pseudo continuous display is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (see Fig. 66 (G)). ). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 66(G), the scrolling speed of the left symbol column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) comes to a pseudo-stop, and then the scroll speed of the left symbol column (for example, 2 symbols) stops. The scrolling speed decreases and the right symbols (for example, 5 symbols) pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row decreases and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, a pseudo third consecutive variable performance following the pseudo second consecutive fluctuating performance is started. Specifically, after the characters "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x3" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66(G) and (H)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect in this way, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then , the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (same as the left symbol), the right symbols (here, 3 symbols) come to a pseudo stop, and a reach is established (see FIG. 66(I)).

Note that, here, we have taken the example of a case where a "pre-reach pseudo-consecutive" is executed, in which the scrolling display of each symbol row is temporarily suspended and then resumed before a reach is achieved, but there are also cases where a "post-reach pseudo-consecutive" is executed, in which the scrolling display of each symbol row is temporarily suspended and then resumed after a reach is achieved. There are also cases where both pre-reach pseudo-consecutive and post-reach pseudo-consecutive are executed.

In this embodiment 3, a pseudo consecutive performance in which the scroll display of the pattern row is temporarily suspended and then resumed is described as an example, but the pseudo consecutive performance may not involve the suspension and resumption of the scroll display of the pattern row. In other words, the pseudo consecutive performance may be a performance in which the performance pattern is not displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b during the variable display of the first special pattern, and a suggestive image such as "NEXT" that suggests the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a during this non-display state, so that the performance pattern appears to be displayed multiple times during one variable display of the first special pattern. When a pseudo consecutive performance that does not use such a pseudo consecutive pattern (in this embodiment 3, the 7 pattern pseudo-stopped in the middle row) is executed, the non-display state is released immediately after the display of the suggestive image ends, and the scroll display of the pattern row is resumed, making it appear that the performance pattern is displayed multiple times during one variable display of the special pattern.

Returning to the explanation of the third embodiment, as mentioned above, when the same effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and a reach is established, a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is executed ( (See FIG. 67(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(A), after the reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) and An effect display is performed to show that the same middle symbol (in this case, the third middle symbol) approaches the active line defined by the reach symbol.

Here, when a normal reach develops into an SPSP reach, the following display is performed. That is, when the scroll display of the middle row of symbols is being performed, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (here, 3 symbols) passes over the active line, and the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols increases, making it difficult to distinguish the middle symbol, and a development display is performed suggesting that the progress will be to an SPSP reach (see FIG. 67(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(B), the left 3 symbols are reduced while moving to the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and in the process, they rotate clockwise once with the scroll direction as the axis before moving to the upper left area, and at the same time, the right 3 symbols are reduced while moving to the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and in the process, they rotate clockwise once with the scroll direction as the axis before moving to the upper right area. After that, until the end of the display of the first special symbol, the three symbols on the left are displayed in a pseudo-stop state in the upper left area, and the three symbols on the right are displayed in a pseudo-stop state in the upper right area (see Figures 67 (C) to (G)).

Next, following the development effect (see FIG. 67(B)) suggesting the development to the SPSP reach as described above, a preview effect may be performed to warn of the possibility of a big win, for example a group preview (see FIG. 67(C)). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a display is performed showing a large number of characters moving from right to left on the first display screen 7a.

When the development effect is on, the background image corresponding to the fourth normal mode changes to a solid black background image (black image), effectively increasing the player's sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a group preview. Also, Figure 67 shows an example of a development effect followed by a group preview before progressing to an SPSP reach, but there are also cases where the development effect progresses to an SPSP reach without a group preview being performed, with the former having a higher reliability of a jackpot than the latter.

When the SPSP reach begins after the development effect and group announcement as described above, an SPSP reach effect image, which is an effect image related to the SPSP reach, is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 67(D)). This results in an effect display showing, for example, a battle between the main character and an enemy character. After that, when the SPSP reach approaches the end, a first effect button operation promotion effect is displayed to encourage the player to operate the first effect button 63a (see FIG. 67(E)). Specifically, a first effect button image modeled after the first effect button 63a and a valid period gauge showing the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the first effect button 63a is valid are displayed.

In this first performance button operation promotion performance, it is possible to win a jackpot at the timing when the first performance button 63a is operated during its validity period, or at the timing when the validity period ends without operating the first performance button 63a. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed superimposed on the effect image (other than the ready-to-reach symbol) displayed on the first display screen 7a (FIG. 67). See F). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot reliability, and there are two cases in which a green cut-in is displayed in a superimposed manner and a red cut-in in which a red cut-in image is displayed in a superimposed manner. There are cases where a cut-in is performed, and cases where a gold cut-in that displays a gold cut-in image superimposed is performed.When these cut-ins are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of jackpot, green cut-in, The order is red cut-in, then gold cut-in.

In addition, here, an example has been described in which, if the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period, a cut-in is performed at the timing when the valid period ends, but in other embodiments, Another configuration may be adopted in which the cut-in is not performed if the first effect button 63a is not operated during the process.

When a cut-in occurs as described above and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second button operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the second button 63b (see FIG. 67(G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(G), during the valid period of the second button operation prompting effect, a second button image that resembles the second button 63b, text indicating the operation of the second button 63b such as "Press!", and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

When the second performance button 63b is operated during the valid period of this second performance button operation promotion performance, as a corresponding performance corresponding to the operation, the three performance symbols indicating the reach loss are pseudo-stopped, and then the main stop is performed. A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 67(H)).

In addition, here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "loss", a loss notification performance is performed as an operation compatible performance, but this time When the judgment result of the first special symbol propriety judgment is a "jackpot", a hit notification performance is performed as an operation corresponding performance in which the three performance symbols indicating a double are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped.

In addition, since the miss notification effect is being executed in the SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect, the effect mode transitions from the fourth normal mode to, for example, the first normal mode with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol and effect symbol, and the scrolling display (here, left scrolling) of the symbol row begins with the background image dedicated to the first normal mode being displayed (see FIG. 67(I)). In addition, since the transition has been made to the first normal mode, the effect mode name "first normal mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and the icon in the normal display mode in the first normal mode (in this embodiment, the hexagonal icon) is displayed in the icon display area 9e.

[Specific examples of effects in the first normal mode]
Next, referring to Figures 68 and 69, a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability low base state and the performance is controlled in the first normal mode will be described. Here, Figures 68 and 69 are screen diagrams illustrating the performance in the first normal mode.

As described above based on FIG. 65, when the effects are controlled in the first normal mode, the effect pattern consisting of a character image and a number is displayed on the first display screen 7a. FIG. 68(A) illustrates a state in which three effect patterns showing the "524" scatter pattern are stopped in order to inform the user that the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment corresponding to the icon in the normal display mode (the hexagonal icon in the normal display mode exclusive to the first normal mode) displayed in the icon display area 9e is "miss". Specifically, the state in which the five symbols included in the lower pattern row are stopped in the lower left area of the effect pattern display area 7b, the two symbols included in the middle pattern row are stopped in the central area of the effect pattern display area 7b, and the four symbols included in the upper pattern row are stopped in the upper right area of the effect pattern display area 7b is illustrated.

In addition, since the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode, the name of the current presentation mode, "first presentation mode," is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 68(A)), and although not shown in FIG. 68(A) etc., a background image exclusive to the first normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image for the presentation pattern. Also, FIG. 68(A) illustrates a state in which a special display mode of a reserve icon (for example, a red circular reserve icon) common to the four normal presentation modes is displayed as a result of an icon change presentation being performed on one reserve icon displayed in the reserve icon display area 9c.

When a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and a predetermined confirmation time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment 3) has elapsed since the performance symbol showing the "524" scatter pattern as described above has stopped, a first special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed for the first reserved icon (here, a red circular reserved icon) displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c. If the result of this first special symbol hit/miss judgment is a "jackpot" or if a first special symbol fluctuation pattern is selected that results in a "miss" but a fluctuation performance that develops into a pseudo triplet is executed, the following effects may be executed.

<First common character line production>
That is, when the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the red, circular pending icon is executed, this pending icon is shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e, and is displayed in three columns in the vertical direction. 68 (A) and (B)). When left scrolling of the three symbol rows is started in this manner, the lower symbol row becomes temporarily hidden, and a common character line performance is started. Here, an explanation will be given using as an example a case where the first common character dialogue performance in the current symbol variation develops to the third stage, which is the upper limit.

(First stage performance)
First, as the first stage of the first common character dialogue production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the first stage production, although not shown in FIG. 1 appears in the lower right end area of the display screen 7a. Similar character images representing this character A are displayed scrolling to the left in the same way as the lower row of symbol rows, and the character images constituting the performance symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows are displayed in a stopped state. (For example, in FIG. 68(A), the character image representing the character E constituting the 5 symbols is displayed: the first position) and the line "B-san!" is displayed. An effect display is performed to show how the sound is emitted. Specifically, in addition to a similar character image representing character A, a dialogue frame containing the words "B-san!" is displayed. Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "B-san!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A saying "B-san!" is output from the speaker 67.

In the first stage production, a similar character image showing the same character A as one symbol is scrolled to the left in the same way as each production symbol included in the lower row of symbols, and after moving to the first position, An effect display is performed to show how the character A indicated by this similar character image utters a line (see FIG. 68(C)). For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character shown by the character image constituting the production symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows has uttered a line, and the lower row of symbol rows can be moved to the left. It is possible to obtain a high performance effect by the synergistic effect of the first stage performance and the performance in which any of the performance symbols is scrolled and displayed and then stopped in the lower left area.

Note that if the lower row of symbols is scrolled at high speed while the first stage performance is being performed, the performance symbols included in the lower row of symbols will be displayed semi-transparently, but the display area for these performance symbols will overlap with the display area in which the performance images related to the first stage performance (here, a similar character image showing character A and a dialogue box containing the text "Mr. B!") are displayed, so there is a concern that the visibility of the performance images related to the first stage performance will decrease.

In order to prevent such problems from occurring, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 3 performs the first stage of the performance after temporarily hiding the bottom row of symbols as described above (see FIG. 68(C)). FIG. 68(C) shows how the scrolling display of the top and middle rows of symbols continues, while the scrolling display of the bottom row of symbols is interrupted.

(Second stage performance)
In the second stage performance following the first stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, when the second stage performance starts, a similar character image showing the same character B as the two patterns (the performance pattern consisting of the number "2" and the character image showing the character B) included in the upper row of pattern rows appears in the upper right end area of the first display screen 7a while the performance display (see FIG. 68(C)) showing the character A shown by the similar character image is continuing, which is not shown in FIG. 68. Then, the similar character image showing this character B is scrolled leftward in the same manner as the upper row of pattern rows, and moves to a display position (for example, in FIG. 68(A), the position where the character image showing the character D showing the four patterns is displayed: the second position) that is common to the display position where the character images constituting the performance patterns included in the upper row of pattern rows are stopped.

In this way, when the similar character image of character B is placed in the second position, the display of the similar character image of character A continues. Meanwhile, in order to realize an effect display showing the similar character image of character B uttering the line "How are you doing?", the dialogue frame containing the characters "B-san!" that was displayed in close proximity to the similar character image of character A is erased, and instead, a dialogue frame containing the characters "How are you doing?" is displayed in close proximity to the similar character image of character B (see FIG. 68(D)). At the timing when this dialogue frame containing the characters "How are you doing?" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of character B saying "How are you doing?" is output from speaker 67.

In the second stage of production, a similar character image showing the same character B as the second symbol is scrolled to the left in the same way as each production symbol included in the upper row of symbols, and after moving to the second position, , an effect display is performed showing how the character B represented by this similar character image utters a line (see FIG. 68(D)). For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character shown by the character image constituting the performance symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows has uttered a line. A high performance effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the performance of scrolling leftward and then stopping any of the performance symbols in the upper right area, and the second stage performance.

In addition, when the second stage performance is being performed, if the upper row of symbol rows is also displayed with high-speed scrolling, the performance symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows will be displayed semi-transparently. , a display in which display areas for these performance symbols and performance images related to the second stage performance (here, a similar character image representing character B and a dialogue frame containing the words "How are you doing?") are displayed. Since the areas overlap, there is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the second stage effect may be reduced.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the second stage effect is performed after the upper row of symbols is temporarily hidden. It is said that FIG. 68(D) shows that the scrolling display of the middle row of symbol rows is continued, and the scrolling display of the lower row and upper row of symbol rows is interrupted.

(Third stage production)
In the third stage performance following the second stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, when the third stage performance starts, the dialogue frame containing the characters "How are you doing?" is erased while a similar character image showing character A and a similar character image showing character B are displayed, and instead, a dialogue frame containing the characters "Feels good!" is displayed in close proximity to the similar character image showing character A to realize a performance display showing a state in which character A is uttering the lines "Feels good!" (see FIG. 68(E)). At the timing when the dialogue frame containing the characters "Feels good!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of character A saying "Feels good!" is output from speaker 67.

In this way, in the common character dialogue effect that develops in stages from the second stage onwards, although the numbers that make up the effect pattern are not displayed, a similar character image showing a character that is common to the character image (here, a character image showing character A) that makes up the effect pattern included in the lower row of patterns, and a similar character image showing a character that is common to the character image (here, a character image showing character B) that makes up the effect pattern included in the upper row of patterns are displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, an effect showing the characters shown by these similar character images alternately speaking lines is performed using the first display screen 7a and speaker 67 (see Figures 68 (C) to (E)).

This gives the player the impression that the character represented by the character image constituting the performance pattern included in the lower row of symbols is having a conversation with the character represented by the character image constituting the performance pattern included in the upper row of symbols, and combined with the effect of varying the performance patterns, it is possible to achieve a high performance effect.

When the third stage performance is performed as illustrated in FIG. 68(E), all the performance images related to the third stage performance are erased, and the lower and upper symbol rows are scrolled at high speed. The display (left scroll) is restarted (see FIGS. 68(E) and (F)).

Up to this point, we have explained the case where the common character dialogue production reaches the upper limit of the third stage and ends, but the third stage production is performed after the first stage production and the second stage production have been performed. There are also cases where the common character line production ends without being performed, or cases where the common character line production ends after the first stage production is performed without performing the second and third stage production. be.

In addition, when comparing the common character line performance that ends with the first stage performance, the common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance, and the common character dialogue performance that ends with the third stage performance, the following I can say that. In other words, if the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is a "jackpot", or even if it is a "loss", the variation time is relatively long. When a variation pattern of 1 special symbol is selected, the common character line performance that ends with the third stage performance is most likely to be executed, and the common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance is most likely to be executed next, The common character dialogue production that ends with the first stage production is the most difficult to execute. On the other hand, the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "lose", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a relatively short variation time. If is selected, the common character line performance that ends with the first stage performance is the most likely to be performed, the common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance is the most likely to be performed next, and the third stage performance is the most likely to be performed. The common character lines that end are the most difficult to execute.

For these reasons, the jackpot reliability is highest when a common character line performance that ends with the third stage performance is executed, and the second highest jackpot reliability is when a common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance is executed. The jackpot reliability is high, and the jackpot reliability is the lowest when a common character line performance that ends with the first stage performance is executed.

The common character dialogue presentation has the characteristic that the reliability of a jackpot changes depending on the content of the dialogue spoken by the character in the final stage presentation, for example. Figure 68 (E) shows an example of the dialogue "Feels good!" spoken by a similar character image of character A. In addition, the dialogue may say "Not bad," or "Great chance!" or "Super hot!?". If these dialogues are arranged in order from highest to lowest reliability of a jackpot, the order is "Super hot!?", "Great chance!", "Feels good!", and "Not bad."

(Production after the first common character dialogue production is completed)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, when the first common character dialogue effect in this symbol change is completed, the high-speed scrolling display of the lower symbol row and the upper symbol row resumes as described above (FIG. 68 ( See F). In this way, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the high-speed scroll display of the upper and lower symbol rows is resumed, the scrolling speed of the lower row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the 6 symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows ( The effect pattern consisting of the number "6" and the character image of character F) pseudo-stops in the lower left area of the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 68(G)). Then, the scrolling speed of the upper row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the six symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows pseudo-stop in the upper right area of the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 68(H)). As a result, a reach with 6 symbols is established, and, for example, a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is executed. Here, when the above-described variable performance pattern for performing the post-reach pseudo-run is set, the following performance is performed.

That is, while the two 6 symbols forming the reach are in a pseudo-stop state, the middle symbol consisting only of numbers to which no character image is attached rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axis direction ( rotation) (see Figure 68(H)). Then, each time the middle symbol rotates once, the number forming the middle symbol increases by "1". As a result, the middle symbols change in ascending order, for example, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, and 4 symbols. Here, a variable performance pattern is set that executes a pseudo series after reaching, so when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols, the 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols and are moved to the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b. A pseudo-stop is performed (see FIG. 68(I)).

In this way, when the first pseudo continuous performance during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo second continuous variation performance that follows the pseudo first continuous variation performance is started. Specifically, after the characters "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x2" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display (left scroll) of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69(A)).

<Second common character dialogue performance>
During this pseudo second consecutive change performance, there are cases where a common character dialogue performance is executed and cases where a common character dialogue performance is executed, but here, an example will be described in which the first common character dialogue performance (see Figures 68C-E) is executed during the first pseudo consecutive change performance, and the second common character dialogue performance (see Figures 69B-D) is executed during the second pseudo consecutive change performance. Also, the second common character dialogue performance may consist of one stage of performance (first stage performance), two stages of performance (first stage performance to second stage performance), or three stages of performance (first stage to third stage performance), but here, an example will be described in which the second common character dialogue performance consists of three stages, like the first common character dialogue performance.

(First stage performance)
At the start of the first stage of the second common character line performance, the lower row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and although it is not shown in FIG. 69(B), the 8 characters included in the lower row A similar character image showing the character H that is common to the character image forming the symbol appears in the lower right end area of the first display screen 7a. Similar character images representing this character H are displayed scrolling to the left in the same way as the lower row of symbol rows, and the character images constituting the performance symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows are displayed in a stopped state. (see FIG. 69(B)). Specifically, in addition to a similar character image representing character H, a dialogue frame containing the characters "F-san!" is displayed. Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "F-san!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character H saying "F-san!" is output from the speaker 67.

Note that in the first stage of the first common character dialogue performance (see FIG. 68(C)), the performance is performed using a similar character image showing character A, and the first stage of the second common character dialogue performance is In the stage production (see FIG. 69(B)), as is clear from the fact that the production is executed using a similar character image showing the character H, similar characters used for the production of each stage of the common character line production The type of image is variable.

(Second stage performance)
In the second stage performance following the first stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, when the second stage performance starts, the upper row of pattern rows are temporarily hidden, and while the performance display (see FIG. 69(B)) showing the character H shown by the similar character image that appeared in the first stage performance, which is not shown in FIG. 69(B)-(C), is continuing, a similar character image showing the same character F as the 6 pattern (performance pattern consisting of the number "6" and a character image showing the character F) included in the upper row of pattern rows appears in the upper right end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing this character F is scrolled leftward in the same manner as the upper row of pattern rows, and moves to the display position (second position: see FIG. 68(A)) common to the display position where the character images constituting the performance patterns included in the upper row of pattern rows are stopped.

In this way, when the similar character image representing character F is placed at the second position, the display of the similar character image representing character H continues. On the other hand, in order to realize a production display that shows a similar character image representing character F uttering the line "Is it over?", a similar character image representing character The dialogue frame containing the characters "Hn!" is deleted, and instead, the dialogue frame containing the characters "Is it over?" is displayed in a position close to the similar character image representing character F (Figure 69 (C) reference). Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "Are you done?" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character F saying "Are you done?" is output from the speaker 67.

(Third stage production)
In the third stage performance following the second stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, when the third stage performance starts, the dialogue frame containing the characters "It's over already?" is erased with a similar character image showing character H and a similar character image showing character F displayed, and instead, a dialogue frame containing the characters "One more time!" is displayed in a position close to the similar character image showing character D to realize a performance display showing the character H uttering the line "One more time!" (see FIG. 69(D)). At the timing when the dialogue frame containing the characters "One more time!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of character H saying "One more time!" is output from speaker 67.

(After the second common character dialogue performance)
When the third stage performance is performed as illustrated in Figure 69 (D), all performance images related to the third stage performance are erased and the high-speed scrolling display (left scrolling) of the lower row of patterns and the upper row of patterns is resumed (see Figures 69 (D) and (E)).

Here, the third stage of the second common character dialogue performance (character H utters the line "One more time!": see Figure 69(D)) suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance. There is. Therefore, after the second common character line performance is completed, the second pseudo continuous performance is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo continuous performance described above based on FIGS. 68(G) to (I). .

Specifically, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the high-speed scrolling display of the upper and lower symbol rows (see FIG. 69(E)) is resumed, the scrolling speed of the lower row of symbol rows gradually decreases. The two symbols included in the symbol row (the production symbol composed of the number "2" and the character image of character B) pseudo-stop in the lower left area of the production symbol display area 7b (FIG. 69(F)). reference). Then, the scroll speed of the upper row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the two symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows pseudo-stop at the upper right area of the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69(G)). As a result, a reach with two symbols is established, and, for example, a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is executed.

During this normal short reach, the above-mentioned pseudo-reel after reach is executed. That is, while the two 2 symbols that form the reach are pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol, which is composed only of numbers without character images, rotates (spins) clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as its axis (see FIG. 69(G)). Then, every time the middle symbol rotates once, the number that composes the middle symbol increases by "1". As a result, the middle symbol changes in ascending order, for example, from 2, 3, 4, etc. In this way, when the middle symbol changes to 7 during the process of changing, this 7 symbol pseudo-stops in the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b without changing to 8 (see FIG. 69(H)).

In this way, when the second pseudo consecutive performance during the current symbol change is executed, the pseudo third consecutive performance starts following the pseudo second consecutive performance. Specifically, after the letters "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo third consecutive performance are displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the letters "x3" are displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scrolling display (left scroll) of the three symbol rows is resumed in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69 (I)).

Here, two pseudo consecutive performances are performed, and the variable performance has developed to the third pseudo consecutive performance. For this reason, although not shown in FIG. 69, in most cases, highly reliable reach performances such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach are developed, and a hit notification performance or a loss notification performance is executed. That will happen.

(Features related to common character dialogue production)
As described above based on FIGS. 68 and 69, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state, the number added to the production symbol is A similar character image that does not exist and has the same display content as the character image constituting the performance pattern is displayed in a predetermined display area on the first display screen 7a, and a common character dialogue performance using the similar character image is executed. (See FIGS. 68(C) to (E) and FIGS. 69(B) to (D)).

When the effects are controlled in the first normal mode, each effect pattern included in the three pattern rows is scrolled to the left, while the similar character image used in the common character dialogue effect is also scrolled to the left. In addition, the common character dialogue effect is performed with the similar character image displayed in the same display area as the character images that make up the effect patterns are displayed frozen.

In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, after the similar character images are displayed in a variable manner in a manner common to the manner in which each performance symbol (character image and number) included in the symbol row is varied, a predetermined display is performed. A common character line production is performed using similar character images displayed in the area. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character images that make up the performance symbols are performing a common character line performance, and it is possible to give the player the impression that the character images that make up the performance symbols are performing a common character line performance. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by synergistic effect with character dialogue production.

Furthermore, after the similar character image is erased from the first display screen 7a with the end of the common character dialogue production, there is a character image (a character image indicating a different character) whose display content is different from that of the similar character image. The effect pattern composed of the characters is displayed in the same display area where the similar character image is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 68(E) and (G)).

In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a character representing another character different from the character represented by the similar character image is displayed in the same display area where the similar character image is displayed during the common character dialogue performance. A production pattern including an image is displayed.
For this reason, for example, after displaying a similar character image showing character A in a predetermined display area, by displaying a production pattern including a character image showing the same character A in a predetermined display area, the same It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that a player misunderstands that the performance symbols are displayed consecutively.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3, from the start to the end of the common character dialogue effect, each effect symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing manner, making it extremely difficult to see each effect symbol (see Figures 68(C)-(E)). Then, after the common character dialogue effect ends (after the similar character image is erased), an effect symbol that is visible to the player is displayed (for example, see Figure 68(G)).

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, since there is no period in which both the similar character image and the production pattern are displayed in a visible state, the character images constituting the production pattern are displayed in a common character line production. It is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of a problem in which a player misidentifies a similar character image as a production pattern while giving the appearance of executing the same character image.

Up to this point, we have explained the common character dialogue production that is performed when the production is controlled in the first normal mode, but as illustrated in FIG. 65, it also applies when the production is controlled in the third normal mode. , similar common character lines will be produced. The common character line performance performed when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 72 and 73.

[Specific examples of effects in the second normal mode]
Next, referring to Figure 70, a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability low base state and the performance is controlled in the second normal mode will be described. Here, Figure 70 is a screen diagram illustrating the performance in the second normal mode.

FIG. 70(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a first special icon corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol validity judgment was "lost", the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the production symbol showing the winning number of "513" was stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the current performance mode name "Second Performance Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and also as shown in FIG. Although not shown in , a second normal mode exclusive background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern (see FIG. 65). In addition, since the icon change effect is not being performed, the two pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both diamond-shaped. It is displayed as a normal display mode icon (second normal mode exclusive icon).

Since the effects are controlled in the second normal mode, each effect pattern (see, for example, FIG. 70(A)) displayed on the first display screen 7a is a character image showing the upper body of one of characters A to I, and is configured with a character image showing a larger character than the character images (see, for example, FIG. 68(A)) that constitute the effect patterns displayed when the effects are controlled in the first normal mode. Also, the effect patterns displayed when the effects are controlled in the second normal mode have numbers added to the bottom right of the character images (see, for example, FIG. 70(A)).

When a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment 3) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c (here Then, the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the left pending icon of the two diamond-shaped pending icons (see FIG. 70(A)) is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects will occur.

That is, as the first special symbol propriety determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon is started, the first special symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 9c starts to be displayed in a variable manner. The previous pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining pending icons are shifted within the pending icon display area 9c in the direction approaching the icon display area 9e, and the three symbol rows are scrolled (scroll down). is started (see FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the scroll display of these three symbol rows started, one symbol included in the left symbol column and two symbols included in the right symbol column pseudo-stop (Fig. 70 ( See C). In addition, these 1 and 2 symbols may not only pseudo-stop in the order of 1 and 2, but also may pseudo-stop in the order of 2, 1, or 1 and 2 at the same time. be.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left and right symbols pseudo-stop, for example, the 6 symbols in the middle symbol row pseudo-stop, and the three performance symbols showing the "162" scatter pattern stop permanently as a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol (see Figure 70 (D)).

Next, when a predetermined confirmation time has elapsed since the missing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a judgment is made as to whether the first special symbol is a hit or miss corresponding to the earliest reserved icon (see FIG. 70 (D)) displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c. Then, if the result of this judgment is "miss" and the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects a non-reach presentation change presentation pattern as the presentation pattern change presentation pattern accompanying the display change of the first special symbol, the following presentation may be performed.

In other words, as the display of the first special pattern begins to change, the most recent reserved icon displayed in reserved icon display area 9c shifts to the icon display area 9e and is displayed as that icon, and the three rows of patterns displayed in three horizontal rows begin to scroll (downward scroll) (see FIG. 70 (E)).

(Composite effect in second normal mode)
When the effects are controlled in the second normal mode, the above-mentioned composite effect may be executed immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol rows starts. When this composite effect is executed, the three symbol rows are hidden after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the scroll display of the three symbol rows started (see FIG. 70(F)). Then, for example, a character image showing the character H that constitutes the 8 symbol is displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 70(F)).

In this way, when the 8 symbol appears in the right side area of the first display screen 7a, the number "8" appears in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and this number "8" is the same as the symbol in the left column. Like the columns, they are scrolled downward (see FIG. 70(G)). Further, as similarly illustrated in FIG. 70(G), as the eight symbols scroll down, the character image representing the character H moves to the left.

Then, when the character image representing character H and the number "8" move to the left side area of the effect pattern display area 7b, a composite effect is performed in which these character images and numbers are combined to complete one effect pattern (here, the number 8) (see Figures 70 (G) to (H)).

When the 8 symbol completed by this composite effect comes to a pseudo-stop in the left area of the effect symbol display area 7b, for example, the 4 symbol included in the middle symbol row and the 5 symbol included in the right symbol row move in from above (see Figure 70 (I)), causing the three effect symbols representing the "845" scatter pattern to come to a pseudo-stop, and as a losing symbol is displayed as the first special pattern, the three effect symbols representing the scatter pattern may come to a real stop.

As explained based on FIG. 70, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, a composite effect that combines a character image and a number may be executed. In this way, in addition to the case where the effect pattern is formed from the beginning, the effect pattern may be formed on the first display screen 7a, so the display control is performed to pseudo-stop the effect pattern and then actually stop it. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the performance becomes monotonous by repeating this process, and as a result, the interest level decreases.

Note that, here, an example is described in which a composite effect is executed in which a performance pattern included in the left-hand pattern column (here, the left 8 pattern: see FIG. 70 (H)) is formed, but there are also cases in which a composite effect is executed in which a performance pattern included in the middle pattern column is formed, or in which a performance pattern included in the right-hand pattern column is formed.

In addition, in this embodiment 3, an example is described in which a composite effect is executed for one of the effect patterns (left pattern) included in the left pattern column, the effect pattern (middle pattern) included in the middle pattern column, and the effect pattern (right pattern) included in the right pattern column (left 8 pattern in the example shown in FIG. 70) during one variable display of the first special pattern. In contrast to this, in other embodiments, multiple composite effects may be executed, for example, a composite effect to form a left pattern is executed during the variable display of the first special pattern, followed by a composite effect to form a right pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment 3, an example is described in which a composite effect is executed immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable effect symbol begins, but in other embodiments, for example, when a reach is established, a composite effect may be performed to form a variable effect symbol that becomes a reach symbol, or when three variable effect symbols that indicate a losing combination (reach losing combination or a spread combination) come to a pseudo-stop at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, a composite effect may be performed to form one of the variable effect symbols.

[Specific example of production in 3rd normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy low base state and the performance is controlled in the third normal mode I will explain about it. Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are screen diagrams illustrating effects in the third normal mode.

FIG. 71(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a first special icon corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol validity judgment was "lost", a losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and a production symbol indicating a winning number of "431" was stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the current performance mode name "Third Performance Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and also as shown in FIG. Although not shown in , a third normal mode exclusive background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern (see FIG. 65). In addition, since the icon change effect is not being performed, the two pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e both have an inverted triangle shape. The icon is displayed as a normal display mode icon (a third normal mode exclusive icon).

Note that since the effects are controlled in the third normal mode, each effect pattern displayed on the first display screen 7a (for example, see FIG. 71(A)) may be any of the characters A to I wearing one-piece dresses. These are character images representing those characters, and a corresponding number is added to the center lower end of each character image.

In order to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the icon illustrated in FIG. When the confirmation time has elapsed, the hold icon corresponding to the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (here, the left hold icon of the two inverted triangular hold icons: see FIG. 71(A)) A first special symbol validity determination is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects will occur.

That is, as the first special symbol propriety determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon is started, the first special symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 9c starts to be displayed in a variable manner. The previous pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining pending icons are shifted within the pending icon display area 9c in a direction approaching the icon display area 9e, and the variable display of the three performance symbols is started. (See FIG. 71(B)).

When the effects are controlled in the third normal mode and the first special symbol is stopped, three effect symbols with character images corresponding to any of the numbers "1" to "9" are displayed side by side in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 71 (A)). In contrast, when the next first special symbol starts to change, the character images are removed from each number of the three effect symbols, and each effect symbol is displayed without a character image being added during the process of changing the number of each effect symbol (see FIG. 71 (B) to (D)).

The left, middle, and right symbols each rotate clockwise around the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as their axis (see, for example, Figures 71 (B) to (D)). Then, by rotating each symbol once, a symbol with a number increased by "1" is displayed. Figures 71 (B) to (D) show, for example, how the left 4 symbol rotates once clockwise to display the left 5 symbol, the middle 3 symbol rotates once clockwise to display the middle 4 symbol, and the right 1 symbol rotates once clockwise to display the right 2 symbol.

(Composition effect in 2nd normal mode)
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first special symbol and the variable display of the performance symbols started, a composite performance that is different from the composite performance performed in the second normal mode (see FIGS. 70(G) to (H)) will be performed. executed. That is, for example, the left symbol representing "8" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the left area of the performance symbol display area 7b, and along with this, a performance display showing a character image representing character H moving from above. is performed (see FIG. 71(E)). Then, a synthesis effect is executed to synthesize the character image representing character H and the number "8" (see FIGS. 71(E) to (F)). In addition, FIG. 71(F) illustrates a state in which the left 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped, and the middle symbol and the right symbol continue to be displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In this way, when the synthesis effect that forms the left symbols (in this case, the left 8 symbols) is executed, the synthesis effect that forms the right symbols is executed with the left 8 symbols pseudo-stopped (Fig. 71 ( (See G) to (H)). That is, for example, the right symbol indicating "2" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the right area of the performance symbol display area 7b, and along with this, the effect display showing the character image indicating character B moving from above. is performed (see FIG. 71(G)). Then, a synthesis effect is executed to synthesize the character image representing character B and the number "2" (see FIGS. 71(G) to (H)). Note that FIG. 71(G) illustrates a state in which a hold icon in a special display mode is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the second hold icon. Further, FIG. 71(H) shows an example of a state in which the two right symbols are pseudo-stopped in addition to the eight symbols on the left, and the fluctuating display of the middle symbol continues.

In this way, when the synthesis effect that forms the right symbol (here, the right two symbols) is executed, the synthesis effect that forms the middle symbol is executed with the left eight symbols and the right two symbols pseudo-stopped. (See FIGS. 71(I) and 72(A)). That is, for example, a medium symbol representing "6" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b, and along with this, a performance display showing a character image representing character F moving from above. is performed (see FIG. 71(I)). Then, a synthesis effect is executed to synthesize the character image representing character F and the number "6" (see FIGS. 71(I) to 72(A)). In addition, FIG. 72(A) shows a state in which the left 8 symbols, the right 2 symbols, and the middle 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped, to which the corresponding character images are added, and these production symbols are "losing". ” is stopped and displayed, and the main stop is made.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first special symbol was stopped and displayed, a first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects may occur.

In other words, as the display of the first special pattern begins to change, the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c shifts to the icon display area 9e and is displayed as that icon, and the remaining reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c (here, reserved icons in a special display mode) shift in a direction approaching the icon display area 9e (see Figures 72 (A) and (B)).

In addition, when the display of the first special pattern begins, the character image of character H is removed from the left 8 pattern, the character image of character F is removed from the middle 6 pattern, and the character image of character B is removed from the right 2 pattern, and the display of the three performance patterns that do not have character images attached begins (see Figures 72 (A) to (C)). Note that the display of the three performance patterns is the same as that described above based on Figures 71 (B) to (D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Common character dialogue production in 3rd normal mode)
When the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, a common character dialogue performance similar to the common character dialogue performance performed when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode is executed. Here, we will explain the case where the common character dialogue performance is composed of one stage of performance, and the common character dialogue performance with the related performance content is executed in the next symbol change. .

As shown in FIG. 72(B), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the three performance symbols to which no character image is added, for example, a similar character image showing character D, which is common to the character image constituting the 4th symbol, appears in the upper left end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the character image showing this character D moves to the same display position as the character image constituting the left symbol (in the example shown in FIG. 72(A), the display position where the character image showing character H constituting the left 8th symbol is displayed), and a performance display is performed showing the appearance of uttering the line "Mr. A!" (see FIG. 72(D)). Specifically, in addition to the similar character image showing character D, a line frame containing the characters "Mr. A!" is displayed. At the timing when the line frame containing the characters "Mr. A!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of character D saying "Mr. A!" is output from the speaker 67.

This common character dialogue effect (see FIG. 72(D)) is related to the first common character dialogue effect (see FIG. 72(H)) that will be performed in the next pattern change, and functions as a preview effect that warns that a similar character image representing character A will appear in the next pattern change. Note that while such a common character dialogue effect is being executed, the display of the changes in the middle and right patterns continues (see FIG. 72(D)).

(Production after the common character dialogue production ends)
In this way, when a common character dialogue production is executed as a production display showing how character D calls character A, the similar character image showing character D that appeared in this common character dialogue production will move, for example, to the left. It moves and disappears from the first display screen 7a. FIG. 72(E) exemplifies a state in which a similar character image representing character D is being deleted from the first display screen 7a after the common character dialogue performance is completed.

When the common character line performance is completed in the above-described flow, the variable display of the left symbol is restarted, and a state in which three performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner, similar to the state shown in FIG. 72(C), is reached. After that, although not shown in FIG. 72, a synthesis effect is performed in which a character image representing character E and the number "5" are combined, and a synthesis effect is performed in which a character image representing character D and the number "4" are combined. A synthesis effect that combines the character image representing character F and the number "6" is executed, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, "456" illustrated in FIG. 72(F) is executed. ” The production pattern that shows the unevenness of the eyes stops. Note that each of the composite performances regarding these three performance symbols is performed in the same manner as each of the composite performances described above based on FIGS. 71(E) to (I) and FIG. 72(A), so a detailed explanation here Omitted.

When the first special symbol indicating a miss is displayed and the three performance symbols showing the "546" scatter pattern are stopped and a predetermined confirmation time has elapsed since then, a judgment is made as to whether the first special symbol corresponding to the most recent reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c (here, a reserved icon in a special display mode, for example, a red circular reserved icon: see Figure 72 (F)).

When this first special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed, the first special symbol starts to change and display, and the first reserved icon (reserved icon in special display mode) displayed in reserved icon display area 9c shifts to icon display area 9e and is displayed as the icon, the character image showing character E is removed from the left 5 symbol, the character image showing character D is removed from the middle 4 symbol, and the character image showing character F is removed from the right 6 symbol, and the three performance symbols to which no character image is attached start to change and display (see FIG. 72 (F)-(G)). Note that the change and display of these three performance symbols is the same as that described above based on FIG. 71 (B)-(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the following explanation based on Figures 72 (G)-(I) and 73, an example will be given in which two pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the varying display of the first special pattern corresponding to the red circular icon, the first common character dialogue performance is executed during the first pseudo consecutive variation performance, and the second common character dialogue performance is executed during the third pseudo consecutive variation performance.

<First common character dialogue performance>
When the red circular reserved icon is shifted from the reserved icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the display of the three performance patterns starts, the first common character dialogue performance in the current pattern change is executed (see FIG. 72(H)). Specifically, a similar character image showing character A called by character D (see FIG. 72(D)) shown by the similar character image that appeared during the previous pattern change appears in the upper left end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the character image showing this character A moves to the same display position as the character image constituting the left pattern (in the example shown in FIG. 72(A), the display position where the character image showing character H constituting the left 8 pattern is displayed), and a dialogue frame including the characters "NEXT!" is displayed in a nearby position (see FIG. 72(H)). Also, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "NEXT!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of character A saying "NEXT!" is output from the speaker 67. It should be noted that while such a common character dialogue performance is being executed, the variable display of the middle and right patterns continues (see Figure 72 (H)).

This first common character line performance suggests the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 69(B), for example, this is not an effect that calls out to the character shown by another similar character image. Therefore, the first common character dialogue performance ends with the first stage performance without performing the second stage and subsequent stage performances.

In this way, when the presentation is controlled in the third normal mode, if the current pattern change is considered to be the second pattern change and the previous pattern change is considered to be the first pattern change, then during the second pattern change, a common character dialogue presentation (see FIG. 72(H)) related to the common character dialogue presentation performed during the first pattern change (see FIG. 72(D)) is executed.

(Common character dialogue production/performance after the first time is finished)
As described above, when the first common character dialogue performance that suggests the execution of a pseudo continuous performance is executed, the similar character image representing character A is displayed as the first 1 from the display screen 7a (see FIG. 72(I)). In this way, when the similar character image representing character A is erased, the variable display of the left symbol is restarted, and the three performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see FIG. 73(A)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the three performance symbols were displayed in a fluctuating manner, a composite performance that combines the character image of character A and the number "1" is performed in the left area of the performance design display area 7b. At the same time, a synthesis effect is also executed in the right area to synthesize the character image of character A and the number "1", and as a result, a reach is established with one symbol (see FIG. 73(B)).

Here, because the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is suggested by the first common character dialogue performance described above based on FIG. 72(H), the above-mentioned post-reach pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the normal short reach that is executed following the establishment of a reach (see FIG. 73(C)). That is, with the two 1 symbols that form the reach pseudo-stopped, the middle symbol, which is composed only of numbers without a character image attached, rotates (spins) clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as its axis (see FIG. 73(B)), and the middle 7 symbol pseudo-stops in the central area of the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 73(C)).

In this way, when the first pseudo consecutive performance during the current pattern change is executed, the pseudo second consecutive performance starts following the pseudo first consecutive performance. Specifically, after the character "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second consecutive performance is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character "x2" is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the display of the three performance patterns consisting of only numbers without character images is resumed in the performance pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 73 (D)).

Then, during the pseudo second consecutive variation performance, the middle 7 symbol is pseudo-stopped while the 5 symbol is in a reach state, and the second pseudo consecutive variation performance of this symbol variation is executed (see FIG. 73(E)). In this way, when the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the pseudo third consecutive variation performance following the pseudo second consecutive variation performance starts. Specifically, after the character "x3" is displayed large in the center area of the first display screen 7a, which indicates the start of the pseudo third consecutive variation performance, the character "x3" is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the variation display of the three performance symbols consisting of only numbers without character images is resumed in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 73(F)).

<Second common character dialogue performance>
During the pseudo-three consecutive change performance that has developed in this manner, the second common character dialogue performance in this symbol change is executed (see FIG. 73 (G)-(I)). This second common character dialogue performance is configured as a three-stage performance, and is configured as the same performance as the common character dialogue performance performed in the first normal mode (see FIG. 68 (C)-(E)).

(First stage production)
In the first stage of the performance, first, a similar character image showing a character D common to the character images constituting the left 4 patterns appears in the upper left end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image showing this character D moves downward so as to be arranged in the same display position (left common display position) as the character image constituting the left pattern, and when the similar character image moves to the left common display position, a dialogue frame including the character "Mr. G!" is displayed in a nearby position (see FIG. 73 (G)). Also, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the character "Mr. G!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D saying "Mr. G!" is output from the speaker 67. Such a first stage of the performance is performed in a state where the variable display of the left pattern is interrupted and the variable display of the center pattern and the right pattern is continued.

(Second stage performance)
At the start timing of the second stage performance, first, a similar character image showing the character G that is common to the character images constituting the right seven symbols appears in the upper right end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image representing this character G is moved downward so that it is placed at the same display position (right/common display position) where the character image forming the right pattern is displayed, and the similar character image moves to the right/common display position. Then, the dialogue frame containing the characters "G-san!" is erased, and the dialogue frame containing the characters "What is it?", which represents character G's dialogue, is moved close to the similar character image representing character G. (See FIG. 73(H)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "What is it?" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character G saying "What is it?" is output from the speaker 67. Such a second stage performance is performed in a state where the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the middle symbol is continued.

(Third stage production)
In the third stage production, the dialogue frame containing the characters "What is it?" is erased, and a dialogue frame containing the characters "Big chance!" representing the lines of character D is displayed in a position adjacent to the similar character image showing character D (see FIG. 73(I)). In addition, at the timing when the dialogue frame containing the characters "Big chance!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of character D saying "Big chance!" is output from speaker 67.

The lines displayed in the third stage include "chance," "big chance," and "super hot." Here, the line "Chance" suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low, and when a line frame containing the word "Chance" is displayed, the 1st SP Reach, 2nd SP Reach, It has the characteristic that it is difficult to develop into a highly reliable reach performance such as SPSP reach, and even if it does develop, it is easy to execute a loss notification performance. In addition, the line ``Big Chance'' suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is medium, and if the line containing the words ``Big Chance'' is displayed, the line containing the words ``Chance'' Compared to the case where a dialogue frame is displayed, it is easier to develop highly reliable reach effects such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, and it is also easier to execute a hit notification effect with any of these reach effects. It has the following characteristics. In addition, the line ``Super Hot'' suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, and when a line frame containing the words ``Super Hot'' is displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is extremely high (for example, 90%). %), it has developed into highly reliable reach effects such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, and has the characteristic that it is easier to perform hit notification effects than when other lines are displayed. are doing.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the variable effect has developed to the third pseudo sequence, and the line "Big chance!" is displayed, so it is possible to reach the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, or the SPSP reach. As a result, a win notification performance or a loss notification performance is executed.

Also, in the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 3, the reliability of a big win is changed depending on how many stages the common character dialogue performance is developed to, and when arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of a big win, the order is a common character dialogue performance that ends with a first stage performance, a common character dialogue performance that ends with a second stage performance, and a common character dialogue performance that ends with a third stage performance. Also, the reliability of a big win is changed depending on how many times the common character dialogue performance is executed during one variable display of the first special pattern, and when arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of a big win, the order is a case where the common character dialogue performance is executed only once during one variable display of the first special pattern, a case where the common character dialogue performance is executed twice during one variable display of the first special pattern, and a case where the common character dialogue performance is executed three times during one variable display of the first special pattern.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3 has a feature that, while a common character dialogue effect may be executed when the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, a common character dialogue effect is not executed when the presentation is controlled in the second normal mode or the fourth normal mode.

In this way, since there are presentation modes in which the common character dialogue effects are executed and presentation modes in which they are not executed, by shifting the presentation mode between the presentation modes in which the common character dialogue effects are executed and the presentation modes in which they are not executed, the common character dialogue effects will be executed, or conversely, the common character dialogue effects will no longer be executed, making it possible to produce effective changes in the presentation.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the performance symbols including character images and numbers are displayed in a variable manner as the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as the first special symbol stops being displayed. The production symbols may be stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the determination result of the first special symbol propriety determination. On the other hand, character images and numbers may be displayed individually, and these character images and numbers may be combined and displayed as a production pattern (for example, Figs. 70 (F) to (H), Fig. 71 ( (See E) to (F)). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which production pattern will be displayed based on the displayed character image (or number), and if the character image and number remain combined, In comparison, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the performance in which the performance symbols are displayed.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the character images (or numbers) started to be displayed, the numbers (or character images) start to be displayed, and these character images and numbers are combined and displayed as the performance pattern. In this way, the character images and numbers that make up the performance pattern are displayed in order to show how the performance pattern is formed, so it is possible to obtain an extremely high performance effect compared to conventional gaming machines in which the performance pattern does not change from a state in which it is composed of character images and numbers.

In the third embodiment, the example was described in which the effect using the similar character image was a common character dialogue effect, but the effect using the similar character image is not limited to a common character dialogue effect, and may be, for example, an effect in which a character represented by a similar character image notifies a transition in effect mode, or an icon change effect in which a character represented by a similar character image changes the display mode of the icon.

[Processing executed by pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the following processing is executed in order to realize the effects described based on FIGS. 62 to 73.

(Processing related to variable performance)
In the processing of step S4503 (see Figure 52), the performance control microcontroller 91 determines whether the current performance mode is the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode by referring to the current mode status.

Although not shown in the figure, the ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance pattern determination table. The variable performance pattern determination table is a table that is referenced when determining a variable performance pattern, which is a performance pattern of a variable performance that includes a variable display of a performance pattern. The preview performance pattern determination table in Example 3 is a table that is referenced when determining a preview performance pattern, which is a performance pattern of various preview performances that predict the possibility of a jackpot prior to a winning notification performance (or a losing notification performance).

In the third embodiment, a variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance pattern determination table are prepared for each performance mode, and the ROM of the sub-control board 90 contains at least the first normal mode/variable performance pattern determination table, and the first variable performance pattern determination table. 2. Variable effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 3rd variable effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 4th variable effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 1st notice effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 2nd normal mode. A preview performance pattern determination table for the mode, a preview performance pattern determination table for the third normal mode, and a preview performance pattern determination table for the fourth normal mode are stored.

In the process of step S4504 (see FIG. 52), the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 a variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance pattern determination table that correspond to the performance mode (normal performance mode) identified in the process of step S4503 and the variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, and sets them in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

In the next step S4505 (see FIG. 52), the microcomputer 91 for controlling the presentation reads out one variable presentation pattern from the variable presentation pattern determination table set in the RAM based on the random number for determining the variable presentation acquired in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the result of the judgment of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment, and the variable presentation pattern of the first special symbol, thereby setting the variable presentation pattern. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, by executing this variable presentation pattern setting process, the pattern configuration of the presentation pattern, the variable mode of the presentation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach presentation, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive presentation, the type of presentation pattern that constitutes the reach pattern, the type and content of the reach presentation, the content of the pseudo consecutive presentation if it is executed, the presence or absence of a composite presentation (see FIG. 65), the type of presentation pattern to be stopped and displayed, the type of background image, BGM, etc. are determined.

In addition, in the process of step S4506 (see FIG. 52), the performance control microcomputer 91 uses the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination, the first A preview performance pattern is set by reading out one preview performance pattern from the preview performance pattern determination table set in the RAM based on the variation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation performance pattern set in the process of step S4505. By executing this preview performance pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not to perform various preview performances, and if so, what kind of performance pattern is used to execute the preview performance. In Embodiment 3, the preview effects include, for example, SU preview (see FIG. 66(C)), group preview (see FIG. 67(C)), cut-in (see FIG. 67(F)), and common character lines. An example is presentation (see FIG. 65).

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 74 to 89. In addition, in the following explanation, the explanation of the common configuration and common processing with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Examples 1 to 3 will be omitted, and the explanation will mainly be given to the different configuration and processing from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Examples 1 to 3. The process will be explained.

[Changes in production mode in Example 4]
FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various performance modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the characteristics of the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, a variable performance is performed using the first display screen 7a, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state. There are five types of normal presentation modes: a first normal mode, a second normal mode, a third normal mode, a fourth normal mode, and a fifth normal mode (see FIG. 74).

Here, the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode are the same normal presentation modes as the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode described in Example 3 based on Figures 64, 65, etc., respectively.

<About the background of each normal production mode>
As illustrated in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the first normal mode, a background image exclusively for the first normal mode, which represents the interior of a building in country A (indoor in country A), is displayed full-screen on the first display screen 7a. In the second normal mode, a background image exclusively for the second normal mode representing the interior of a building in country B (indoor in country B) is displayed on the first display screen 7a in full screen, and in the third normal mode, A background image exclusively for the third normal mode representing the interior of a building in the country (indoor in country C) is displayed on the first display screen 7a in full screen. In the fourth normal mode, as described above in the third embodiment, the player can select a song (see FIG. 65), and the selected song presentation image representing the inside of a certain concert venue is displayed entirely on the first display screen 7a. In the fifth normal mode, a background image exclusively for the fifth normal mode representing an outdoor situation is displayed on the first display screen 7a in full screen.

In this fourth embodiment, three types of presentation modes are provided for the fifth normal mode, where a background image exclusively for the fifth normal mode is displayed, depicting the state of an outdoor location α (e.g., a mountainous area), a background image exclusively for the fifth normal mode is displayed, depicting the state of an outdoor location β (e.g., a beach), and a background image exclusively for the fifth normal mode is displayed, depicting the state of an outdoor location γ (e.g., the rooftop of a building).

However, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 74, in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode, a background showing an indoor scene in a different country is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Therefore, if the presentation mode is directly switched between two of these four normal presentation modes, the following problems may occur.

For example, when the presentation mode is changed from the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the background displayed on the first display screen 7a changes from a background showing the interior of a country A to a background showing the interior of a country C (a different country from country A), resulting in an unnatural presentation in which the player moves into a building in another country without actually being outdoors, and there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable about the transition in presentation mode.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, when the performance mode is shifted between two normal performance modes among the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode. In this case, the production mode is transferred via the fifth normal mode. For example, if the first normal mode is changed to the fifth normal mode, and then the fifth normal mode is changed to the third normal mode, the background representing the inside of Country A changes to the outside view. The background changes once to a background representing the situation (at any one of points α to γ), and then changes to a background representing the situation inside Country C. In this way, by going through the fifth normal mode in which the background representing the outside scene is displayed, it is possible to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

In addition, here, the case where the production mode is transferred from the first normal mode to the third normal mode via the fifth normal mode has been explained as an example, but as is clear from the notation in FIG. Also when changing the performance mode between the other two normal performance modes among the modes to the fourth normal mode, the performance mode changes via the fifth normal mode.

<About first chance mode, second chance mode, and intense heat mode>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol correctness judgment in the low probability low base state is a "jackpot", or when the judgment result is a "loss" However, if a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the selected variation pattern, from the normal production mode ( The production mode may shift to another production mode (different from the normal production mode).

Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 74, the presentation mode may transition from one of the five normal presentation modes, the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode, to the first chance mode. In addition, the presentation mode may transition directly from one of the normal presentation modes to the super hot mode, or from one of the normal presentation modes to the super hot mode via the first chance mode, or from one of the normal presentation modes to the second chance mode.

Note that the first chance mode illustrated in FIG. 74 is a production mode corresponding to the chance mode described above based on FIG. 64, and the intense heat mode also illustrated in FIG. This is a production mode that corresponds to the super hot mode.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1 in Example 4, when the right to judge whether or not the first special symbol is a hit is reserved during a low probability low base state, similar to the pachinko game machine 1 in Example 3, a pre-determination process is executed by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine whether or not there is a big win, and to specify the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected when the reserved first special symbol is judged to be a hit or not. In response to this, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to switch the presentation mode from the normal presentation mode to another presentation mode before the start of the variation display of the first special symbol related to the reserved first special symbol judgment (hereinafter also referred to as the "pre-read target variation") based on the pre-determination result, which is the result of the above pre-determination process, and switches the presentation mode based on the result of the determination.

Specifically, before the look-ahead target variation starts, the production mode shifts from the normal production mode to the first chance mode, and the variation production related to the look-ahead target variation may start in the first chance mode. be. In addition, before the pre-read target variation is started, the production mode may be shifted from the normal production mode to the super hot mode, and the variation production related to the pre-read target variation may be started in the super hot mode. In addition, before the look-ahead target change starts, the production mode shifts from normal production mode to first chance mode, and furthermore, the production mode shifts from first chance mode to intense heat mode, and then In some cases, a variation performance related to a prefetch target variation may be started. In addition, before the start of the look-ahead target change, the performance mode shifts from the normal performance mode to the first chance mode, and the fluctuation performance related to the look-ahead target change starts in the first chance mode, and this look-ahead target change When the variable performance related to is being performed, the performance mode may shift from the first chance mode to the intense mode. In addition, before the start of the prefetch target variation, the production mode may be shifted from the normal performance mode to the second chance mode, and the variation performance related to the prefetch target variation may be started in the second chance mode.

Note that the first chance mode in the fourth embodiment is characterized in that the jackpot reliability varies depending on the transition timing. Specifically, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state, before it develops into the first SP reach (see Figure 62 (H)) or the second SP reach (see Figure 62 (I)). In the case of transitioning from the normal performance mode to the first chance mode (including the case of transitioning to the first chance mode before the start of look-ahead target variation), the jackpot reliability of the first chance mode is about 14%. On the other hand, if the game shifts to the first chance mode after developing into one of the two types of SP reach, the jackpot reliability of the first chance mode is about 20%.

In this way, in the first chance mode, the jackpot reliability changes depending on the transition timing, whereas in the super hot mode, the jackpot reliability does not change depending on the transition timing, and the jackpot reliability is about 50%. It is set.

On the other hand, the reliability of the jackpot in the second chance mode has the following characteristics. In other words, if you switch from the normal performance mode to the second chance mode before the start of the look-ahead target change, the jackpot reliability of the second chance mode is about 34%, but the normal performance after the start of the look-ahead target change. When changing from the mode to the second chance mode, the jackpot reliability of the second chance mode is about 30%.

Because the first chance mode and the second chance mode have the above-mentioned characteristics, the player can enjoy playing while hoping for a transition to the second chance mode before the start of the pre-read target fluctuation, hoping for a transition to the first chance mode after the SP reach develops, and hoping for a further transition to the super hot mode if a transition to the first chance mode occurs.

<About selecting songs for each normal performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figure 75, the possibility of selecting music in each normal performance mode will be explained.
The first normal mode, second normal mode, and third normal mode illustrated in Figure 75 are presentation modes in which the player cannot select the music to be played using the first display screen 7a, speaker 67, etc., similar to the first normal mode, second normal mode, and third normal mode described above in Example 3 based on Figure 65.

On the other hand, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, although not shown in the figure, for example, a song selection screen is always displayed on the third display screen 72a, and the player can perform a specified operation using the directional pad or the first presentation button 63a to arbitrarily select a song, change the song being played to another song, or select random playback, which plays multiple songs at random (see FIG. 75).

In this way, while the fourth normal mode allows the player to select music, the fifth normal mode allows the player to select the music to be played, similar to the first to third normal modes. The mode is such that it is not possible to do so (see Fig. 75).

<About extension/termination options>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the possibility of selecting extension/end in each normal presentation mode will be described. As described above, in the fourth normal mode, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played on the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, if the fourth normal mode is shifted to another presentation mode during the playback of the music arbitrarily selected by the player, the music playback will end regardless of the player's intention, which may result in the player feeling uncomfortable. To explain with a specific example, for example, if the presentation mode is shifted from the fourth normal mode to the fifth normal mode during the playback of the selected music selected by the player, the playback music will change to the fifth normal mode exclusive BGM, and the player will not be able to enjoy the selected music.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 4, when the number of times the first special symbol changes in the fourth normal mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), an extension/end selection prompt screen (see FIG. 80) including the options of "extend" and "end" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and if the selection of the option "end" is confirmed, the fourth normal mode is transitioned to another presentation mode (the fifth normal mode in this embodiment 4), while if the selection of the option "extend" is confirmed, the presentation control in the fourth normal mode is continued. The extension/end selection prompt screen will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 80.

Thus, in the fourth normal mode, the player can freely select whether or not to continue the presentation (including playback of the selected music) in the current presentation mode (fourth normal mode), whereas in the first, second, third, and fifth normal modes, the extension/end selection prompt screen is not displayed, and the decision as to whether or not to transition from the normal presentation mode to another normal presentation mode, and if so, which normal presentation mode to transition to, is determined by the presentation control microcomputer 91, regardless of the player's operation.

In this embodiment 4, the presentation mode does not transition from the fourth normal mode to another normal presentation mode (here, the fifth normal mode) against the player's selection, but there are cases where the presentation mode transitions from the fourth normal mode to the first chance mode, from the fourth normal mode to the second chance mode, from the fourth normal mode to the super hot mode directly, or from the fourth normal mode to the super hot mode via the first chance mode. However, the configuration related to the mode transition from the fourth normal mode is not limited to this, and in other embodiments, other configurations may be adopted, such as not transitioning from the fourth normal mode to the first chance mode, the second chance mode, or the super hot mode.

<About long-term stay settings>
Next, the long-term stay setting will be described with reference to FIG.
Incidentally, in the fourth normal mode, since the player can select a song at will as described above, it is assumed that there are players who want to enjoy the effects in the fourth normal mode for a long time. Also, as described above based on FIG. 65 and the like, in the first normal mode and the third normal mode, a common character dialogue effect (not executed in other normal effect modes including the fifth normal mode) is executed, and in the second normal mode and the third normal mode, a composite effect (not executed in other normal effect modes including the fifth normal mode) is executed. In this way, although the three normal effect modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode do not allow song selection, characteristic effects that are not executed in other normal effect modes are executed, so it is also assumed that there are players who want to enjoy the effects in these three normal effect modes for a long time.

In view of these circumstances, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment adopts the following configuration. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the player operates the right key (or the left key) of the cross key while the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) described in the second embodiment is displayed, the long-term stay setting screen (see FIG. 79) is displayed on the third display screen 72a in addition to the volume/light adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), and the reset selection screen during play (see FIG. 55(D)). Then, when the player selects one of the four normal performance modes, the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode, on this long-term stay setting screen and performs an operation to confirm the selection, it becomes easier to stay in the selected normal performance mode (i.e., it becomes harder to switch from the selected normal performance mode to another normal performance mode).

In Example 4, while it is possible to set a long-term stay for any of the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the fourth normal mode, a configuration is adopted in which it is not possible to set a long-term stay for the fifth normal mode.

The long-term stay setting screen will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 79. When the game is controlled in a low-probability, low-base state, the long-term stay setting screen can be displayed on the third display screen 72a regardless of whether the first special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

<About other features>
(Features common to 1st normal mode to 4th normal mode)
Next, other features of each normal performance mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 75.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when transitioning from the fifth normal mode to one of the four normal performance modes (hereinafter also referred to as "specific normal performance mode") from the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode, The performance control microcomputer 91 counts the number of times the first special symbol and the performance symbol are displayed in a variable manner in any specific normal performance mode. Then, before this number of fluctuations exceeds 10, that is, within 10 fluctuations after shifting to the specific normal production mode, the specific normal production mode is switched to another normal production mode (here, the 5th normal mode). When the production mode shifts, there is a feature that the jackpot in the symbol variation to which the production mode has shifted becomes more likely.

(Features unique to the fifth normal mode)
On the other hand, when the presentation mode is shifted from any of the specific normal presentation modes to the fifth normal mode, the number of times the first special symbol and the presentation symbol are displayed in the fifth normal mode is counted by the presentation control microcomputer 91. And, before the number of times exceeds "10", that is, within 10 changes after the presentation mode is shifted from the fifth normal mode to any of the specific normal presentation modes, there is a characteristic that the big win in the symbol change in which the presentation mode is shifted becomes highly likely.

As a result, when a player transitions from the fifth normal mode to one of the specific normal presentation modes, or when a player transitions from one of the specific normal presentation modes to the fifth normal mode, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the presentation mode will transition to another normal presentation mode with a small number of changes.

(Features specific to the 4th normal mode)
By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, if the "4R 4th jackpot" or "2R 7th jackpot" shown in FIG. 6 is won, the jackpot game ends. After that, the game is controlled in a low-probability-high base state until 100 special symbol validity judgments and special symbol variable display are executed. If the player fails to hit the jackpot when the game is controlled in the low-probability, high-base state, in other words, all of the judgment results of the 100 special symbol correctness determinations in the low-probability, high-base state are "lost". If so, the low-probability high base state returns to the low-probability low base state.

Regarding the above game flow, when the game is controlled in the low accuracy high base state, the performance is controlled in the common performance mode common to the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state, With the return from the high base state to the low-accuracy low base state, the performance mode shifts from the common performance mode to the fourth normal mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when returning from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state, the first special symbol validity determination and the variable display of the first special symbol are executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times). The feature is that, while the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the performance is not controlled in the other normal performance modes. Therefore, as a bonus for winning some kind of jackpot, the player can select a song immediately after returning to the low-probability, low-base state, and can enjoy the game by selecting the desired song. In addition, by starting the performance in the fourth normal performance mode upon returning to the low-accuracy, low-base state in this way, it is possible to provide the player with benefits that are not available in other normal performance modes. As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As described above, when the number of times that the first special symbol hit/miss determination and the variable display of the first special symbol (and performance symbol) are performed after returning to the low probability low base state reaches a predetermined number (here, 20 times), an extension/end selection prompt screen described below is displayed, and the player can select the "extend" option on this extension/end selection prompt screen to continue enjoying the performance in the fourth normal mode even after the predetermined number of times has been reached.

By the way, if the player treats the music selection as a bonus for winning the jackpot and returns from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state, the production mode is shifted to the fourth normal mode as described above, while It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the mode does not shift to the fourth normal mode from a normal performance mode other than the fourth normal mode.

However, if such a configuration is adopted too easily, even if a large number of selectable songs are prepared, players who have not won the jackpot will not be able to enjoy the production using these songs, and on the contrary, it will be difficult to This may encourage a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko game machine 1.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the mode is shifted to the fourth normal mode upon returning to the low probability low base state, when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state, If the long-term stay setting for the fourth normal mode (background is inside the concert venue) is set on the long-term stay setting screen (see Figure 79), the performance mode will be set to the fourth normal mode regardless of whether the player wins the jackpot or not. A configuration is adopted in which the mode shifts to normal mode.

As described above, the selection of music in the fourth normal mode is also a privilege given to players who win a jackpot, so a configuration is also adopted in which, when the game is controlled in a low probability, low base state, the game will not transition to the fourth normal mode unless the player sets the long-term stay setting in the fourth normal mode. For this reason, it can be said that the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 4 has the characteristic that, when the long-term stay setting in the fourth normal mode is not set, the presentation control for transitioning the presentation mode from the fifth normal mode to the fourth normal mode, or the presentation control for transitioning from any of the first to third normal modes to the fourth normal mode via the fifth normal mode is not performed.

When the fourth normal mode is entered, the number of times the first special symbol and the effect symbol are displayed in the fourth normal mode is counted by the effect control microcomputer 91. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (here, "20"), the extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed as described above. When the extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed, the number of times is reset to "0", and when the selection of the "extend" option on the extension/end selection prompt screen is confirmed, the effect in the fourth normal mode continues and the number of times is counted again. After that, when the number of times reaches "20", the extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed again. As is clear from this, the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment has the feature that, in the fourth normal mode, if the selection of the "end" option on the extension/end selection prompt screen is not confirmed, it is possible to display the extension/end selection prompt screen every 20 changes.

In addition, once the fourth normal mode is entered, unless a jackpot occurs during the process, the fourth normal mode will not be switched to another normal presentation mode unless the selection of the "End" option on the extension/end selection prompt screen is confirmed after the number of executions reaches "20". Therefore, even if a long-term stay setting is made for another normal presentation mode (any of the first to third normal modes), the presentation mode will not immediately switch from the fourth normal mode to another normal presentation mode (via the fifth normal mode), but will switch to another normal presentation mode via the fifth normal mode after the selection of the "End" option on the extension/end selection prompt screen is confirmed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the long stay setting in the fourth normal mode is longer than the long stay setting in the other normal production modes (any of the first normal mode to the third normal mode) other than the fourth normal mode. The feature is that the extension option has priority.

For example, if a long-term stay setting is made in the second normal mode while the production is being controlled in the first normal mode, the first special symbol and production symbol that will be performed first after the long-term stay setting is made. During the fluctuation display, the first normal mode shifts to the fifth normal mode, and furthermore, during the fluctuation display of the next first special symbol and production symbol, the transition from the fifth normal mode to the fifth normal mode (set for a long stay). 2 It will shift to normal mode. This also applies when the normal presentation mode before transition is the second normal mode or third normal mode, or when the normal presentation mode set for a long stay is the first normal mode or third normal mode. be.

On the other hand, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, if a long-term stay setting is made for another normal presentation mode (any of the first to third normal presentation modes), the presentation mode will not immediately change, as described above. Then, when the number of changes reaches "20", an extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed, but once the "extend" option is selected on this extension/end selection prompt screen, there will be no transition from the fourth normal mode to another normal presentation mode, even if a long-term stay setting has been made for another normal presentation mode, and the presentation will continue in the fourth normal mode, at least until the next extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed.

<About production mode transition control>
The production control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing regarding the transition control of the normal production mode. That is, when the production control microcomputer 91 shifts the production mode from the fifth normal mode to the specific normal production mode (any of the first normal mode to fourth normal mode), the production control microcomputer 91 controls the first special symbol and the first special symbol in the specific normal production mode. The number of times the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner is counted. Specifically, for example, the number of fluctuations is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, and the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation stop command while controlling the game in any specific normal performance mode. Each time, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM is updated by adding "1". Here, if the counted number of fluctuations is one of "0" to "10", the first special symbol included in the fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol validity determination received from the main control board 80 Based on the information indicating the determination result of the validity determination, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current first special symbol validity determination is a "jackpot".

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the result of this first special symbol hit/miss determination is a "jackpot," it executes a mode transition lottery using random numbers to determine whether or not to transition to a performance mode, and transitions the current specific normal performance mode to the fifth normal mode, provided that the mode transition lottery is won. There are three types of fifth normal modes: a fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point α is displayed as the background, a fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point β is displayed as the background, and a fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point γ is displayed as the background. The fifth normal mode to transition to can be determined by a lottery using random numbers.

On the other hand, if the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the counted number of fluctuations is between "0" and "10" and the result of the first special symbol validity determination is not a "jackpot", The process ends without executing the mode transition lottery described above.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the number of fluctuations is any one of "0" to "10", the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination is "jackpot", and mode transition is possible. Only when the lottery is won, processing for shifting the production mode from any specific normal mode to the fifth normal mode is executed. By performing such control, it is possible to produce the characteristic that "if the game shifts to the fifth normal mode within 10 fluctuations, there is a strong possibility of a jackpot" (see FIG. 75).

Here, we have explained the process of determining whether or not to transition from a specific normal presentation mode to the fifth normal mode when the display transitions to one of the first to fourth normal presentation modes. However, by carrying out similar processing when the display transitions from a specific normal presentation mode to the fifth normal presentation mode, it is possible to create the feature that "if the display transitions to a normal presentation mode other than the fifth normal mode within 10 fluctuations, a jackpot is highly likely" (see FIG. 75).

The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the first normal mode after the number of fluctuations exceeds "10" after transitioning to any one of the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode, excluding the fourth normal mode. Regardless of whether the judgment result of the special symbol propriety judgment is "big hit" or not, a mode transition lottery is executed for determining whether or not to shift the current normal performance mode to another normal performance mode. For example, while the mode transition random number used for the mode transition lottery can take 100 random values from "0" to "99", 20 random values are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. . Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 converts the value of the timing at which the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 into the mode transition random number, which is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process is performed on the sub-control board 90. The current normal presentation mode is transferred to another normal presentation mode on the condition that the obtained mode transition random number matches any of the random numbers stored in the ROM. Here, while the mode transition random number can take 100 random values, the ROM has 20 random values (winning values) that are compared with the mode transition random number, so the current The probability that the normal performance mode will shift to another normal performance mode is 20% (=20/100×100).

In this way, once the number of changes since transitioning to any of the normal presentation modes, excluding the fourth normal mode, reaches "11" or more, a mode transition lottery with a 20% chance of winning is held for each pattern change. Therefore, if the mode transition lottery is not won for a long time, the current normal presentation mode will continue for a long period of time, but conversely, if the mode transition lottery is won immediately, the period during which the current normal presentation mode is played will be shorter.

On the other hand, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 will not execute the mode transition lottery regardless of the result of the first special symbol hit determination once the number of fluctuations in the fourth normal mode exceeds "10", and will transition the presentation mode from the fourth normal mode to the fifth normal mode on the condition that the "End" option on the extension/end selection prompt screen is confirmed.

In addition, if a long-term stay setting is made for any of the specific normal production modes from the 1st normal mode to the 3rd normal mode, the above will be applied in the mode transition lottery held after the number of fluctuations exceeds 10. Five random numbers other than the 20 random numbers are compared with the mode transition random number. For example, if a long-term stay setting is made for the first normal mode, after the number of fluctuations in the first normal mode exceeds 10, the mode transition random number that can take 100 random values will be 5. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it matches any of the random numbers. Therefore, the probability of transitioning from the normal production mode set for a long stay to the 5th normal mode is 5% (=5/100 x 100), and as a result, staying in the normal production mode set for a long stay is 5% (=5/100 x 100). It is possible to create a situation that makes it easier to do so.

In this embodiment 4, the probability of a mode transition to the fifth normal mode when a long-term stay setting is made for the first normal mode, the probability of a mode transition to the fifth normal mode when a long-term stay setting is made for the second normal mode, and the probability of a mode transition to the fifth normal mode when a long-term stay setting is made for the third normal mode are all set to 5%.

In contrast to this, in other embodiments, by varying the number of random numbers (winning values) that are compared with the mode transition random number when a long-term stay setting is made for each normal presentation mode, it is possible to create normal modes that are easy to stay in for a long time and normal modes that are difficult to stay in for a long time.

Furthermore, in another embodiment, after the number of fluctuations in the normal performance mode in which the long stay setting is set exceeds "10", the mode transition lottery itself is not performed and the long stay setting is canceled. Alternatively, another configuration may be adopted in which the performance in the normal performance mode in which the long-term stay setting has been made continues until the long-term stay setting is made for another normal performance mode.

[About mode transition effects]
In the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the presentation mode is shifted from a specific normal presentation mode (any of the first to fourth normal modes) to the fifth normal mode, when the presentation mode is shifted from the fifth normal mode to any of the specific normal presentation modes, or when the presentation mode is shifted between the fifth normal modes, a mode transition presentation may be performed to notify the transition of the presentation mode. In the fourth embodiment, three types of presentations are provided as the mode transition presentation: a character transition presentation (see FIG. 76), an upper air transition presentation (see FIG. 77), and a panel transition presentation (see FIG. 78).

<Examples of character transitions>
Fig. 76 is a screen diagram for explaining the character transition effect. The character transition effect illustrated in Fig. 76 is a mode transition effect that can be executed when the effect mode is transitioned from any of the first to fifth normal modes to the fifth normal mode. This character transition effect is configured as an effect in which, as a predetermined character moves rightward on the first display screen 7a, the boundary portion between the background image related to the normal effect mode before the transition and the background image related to the normal effect mode after the transition is moved rightward in conjunction with the predetermined character, so that it appears as if the predetermined character is moving the boundary portion to switch the background image (see Figs. 76(A) to (C)).

Before this character transition effect begins, the background image for the previous presentation mode is displayed across the entire screen of the first display screen 7a. In contrast, when the character transition effect begins, in the early stages, a specific character appears on the left edge of the first display screen 7a, and the background image for the previous normal presentation mode moves slightly to the right, and the right edge area of the background image for the next normal presentation mode is displayed in the left edge area of the first display screen 7a created by this movement (see FIG. 76 (A)).

Although FIG. 76(A) shows an example of a predetermined character appearing immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol and production symbol starts, FIGS. 76(A) to (C) In the following, for convenience of explanation, illustration of the performance symbols that are variably displayed on the first display screen 7a is omitted.

The character that appears on the left edge of the first display screen 7a as described above moves rightward on the first display screen 7a while pushing the left edge of the background image related to the previous presentation mode to the right, and accordingly, a presentation display is performed in which the boundary portion between the background image related to the previous presentation mode and the background image related to the next presentation mode moves rightward in tandem with the character (see FIG. 76(B)). FIG. 76(B) illustrates an example in which the boundary portion between the two background images moves to the center in the left-right direction of the first display screen 7a, and the left half of the background image related to the previous presentation mode and the right half of the background image related to the next presentation mode are displayed together on the first display screen 7a.

In this way, when the character transition performance using a character reaches the end, the character moves to the right edge of the first display screen 7a, and only the left edge of the background image related to the performance mode before the transition is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 76(C)). FIG. 76(C) illustrates an example of a state in which most of the background image related to the transition mode, excluding the left edge, is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

Although not shown in FIG. 76, when the character transition presentation progresses further from the state illustrated in FIG. 76(C), a presentation is displayed that shows the background image related to the presentation mode before the transition and the specified character disappearing to the right edge of the first display screen 7a, and as a result, the background image related to the presentation mode to which the transition is to be made is displayed full-screen on the first display screen 7a.

So far, a specific example of a character transition effect has been described with reference to FIG. 76. However, when comparing the background of the pre-transition effect mode with the background of the transition-destination effect mode, the following can be said. That is, when the pre-transition normal effect mode is a specific normal effect mode (any of the first to fourth normal effect modes), the first display screen 7a displays the interior of a building (country A interior, country B interior, country C interior, or concert hall interior) as the background of the effect pattern, etc. In contrast, the background image of the fifth normal mode, which is the transition-destination normal effect mode, is one of the following background images: a background image showing the exterior of a certain point α, a background image showing the exterior of a certain point β, and a background image showing the exterior of a certain point γ. Therefore, by transitioning the effect mode from the specific normal effect mode to the fifth normal mode through the character transition effect, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character has moved from indoors to outdoors, and it is possible to perform a mode transition effect that feels less strange.

In addition, when the production mode is transferred between the fifth normal mode via the character transition production, for example, from a background image representing the state of a certain point γ outdoors to a background image representing the state of a certain point α outdoors. When changing the background image, the background image related to the normal production mode before the transition and the background image related to the normal production mode to which the transition is made are both background images representing outdoor conditions. As in the case of transitioning the performance mode from the performance mode to the fifth normal mode, it is possible to perform mode transition performance with less discomfort.

For example, a building with an interior shown by a background image related to the first normal mode is located in country A, and a building with an interior shown by a background image related to the third normal mode is located in country C (different from country A). For this reason, if a mode transition effect is performed to transition the presentation mode between specific normal presentation modes, the presentation will be one that is likely to cause the player to feel uncomfortable. For this reason, for example, when the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode, if a long-term stay setting is made for the third normal mode, a mode transition effect is performed to transition the presentation mode from the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode, and then a mode transition effect is performed to transition the presentation mode from the fifth normal mode to the third normal mode.

<Specific example of sky transition production>
FIG. 77 is a screen diagram for explaining the sky transition effect. The upper sky transition effect illustrated in FIG. This is a mode transition performance that can be executed when transitioning the performance mode to (performance mode). In this sky transition production, a character who is at any of the outdoor points α to γ boards a helicopter, and the helicopter moves in the sky to the country where there is a building indicated by the background image related to the normal production mode of the transition destination. It is configured as a series of display effects in which a character gets off a helicopter after moving, enters a building, and displays the inside of the building (see FIGS. 77(A) to 77(C)).

Before this air transition effect starts, the background image related to the fifth normal mode before the transition is displayed on the entire first display screen 7a. In contrast, when the air transition effect starts, in the early stages, a display is displayed showing a specified character walking towards a helicopter, with the background image related to the fifth normal mode before the transition being displayed (see FIG. 77(A)).

In FIG. 77(A), at the beginning of the sky transition performance, because the fifth normal mode before the transition is the fifth normal mode in which a background image showing the view of point α (e.g., a mountainous region) is displayed, a character in a mountainous region is shown moving towards a helicopter. On the other hand, if the fifth normal mode before the transition is the fifth normal mode in which a background image showing the view of point β (e.g., a beach) is displayed, a character on the beach is shown moving towards a helicopter, and if the fifth normal mode before the transition is the fifth normal mode in which a background image showing the view of point γ (e.g., the rooftop of a building) is displayed, a character on the rooftop of a building is shown moving towards a helicopter (located at a heliport on the rooftop).

In the middle of the sky transition performance, the first display screen 7a shows the helicopter the character is riding on flying into the sky to a country with a building shown in the background image related to the specific normal performance mode (see Figure 77 (B)). The destinations shown in Figure 77 (B) are either Country A, Country B, Country C, or another country with a concert venue.

Next, as the sky transition performance reaches its end, the helicopter that was flying lands near a building shown in the background image related to the specific normal performance mode to which it has been transferred, and a performance display is shown in which the character disembarks from the helicopter and walks toward the building (see FIG. 77(C)). The building in this case is one of the following buildings: a building in country A, a building in country B, a building in country C, or a concert venue in another country.

After that, as the sky transition effect ends, an effect is displayed that shows the character arriving at the entrance of the building, opening the door, and entering the building. Then, an effect image showing the interior of the building is displayed full-screen on the first display screen 7a as the background image for the specific normal effect mode to which the effect will be transferred.

If the normal presentation mode before the transition is any of the first to fourth normal modes, the sky transition presentation will begin with an indoor scene displayed on the first display screen 7a using the background image associated with that normal presentation mode. In this case, the presentation image showing the indoor scene will switch to a presentation image showing an outdoor character moving towards a helicopter, resulting in an unnatural presentation with no continuity.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when transitioning the performance mode from one specific normal performance mode to another specific normal performance mode, Rather than directly transitioning the production mode to , for example, by performing a mode transition production such as the character transition production described above (see Figure 76), the production mode can be changed to (a background image representing an outdoor situation is displayed. ) The mode is once shifted to the fifth normal performance mode, and then a mode transition performance such as a sky transition performance (see FIG. 77) is performed to shift the performance mode to another specific normal performance mode. As a result, the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a changes in the order of the effect image representing the indoor situation, the effect image representing the outdoor situation, and the effect image representing the indoor situation. It is possible to express the transition in a natural way.

When comparing the character transition performance (see FIG. 76) and the air transition performance (see FIG. 77) in terms of the destination normal performance mode, the following can be said. That is, the character transition performance has the characteristic that it can be executed when the destination normal performance mode is the fifth normal mode, but the character transition performance is not executed when the destination normal performance mode is a specific normal performance mode. In contrast, the air transition performance is different in characteristics from the character transition performance in that the air transition performance is not executed when the destination normal performance mode is the fifth normal mode, but the air transition performance can be executed when the destination normal performance mode is a specific normal performance mode.

Furthermore, regarding the normal performance mode before transition, when comparing the character transition performance (see FIG. 76) and the sky transition performance (see FIG. 77), the following can be said. In other words, due to the nature of the character transition performance, there are few restrictions regarding the normal performance mode before the transition, and the normal performance mode before the transition may be any of the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode. Also, a feature is that it is possible to perform character transition effects. On the other hand, in the sky transition production, since the outdoor situation must be displayed using the background image related to the normal production mode before the transition, the normal production mode before the transition is limited to the 5th normal mode. (If the normal performance mode before the transition is a specific normal performance mode, the character transition performance is executed instead of the sky transition performance.) This differs from the character transition performance.

Although FIG. 77 shows that the sky transition effect is performed when the effect mode is transferred from the fifth normal mode to the specific normal effect mode, in other embodiments, the normal effect mode before the transition is the 5th normal mode, and even if the destination normal effect mode is the 5th normal mode (different from the one before the transition), a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to execute the sky transition effect. You may. For example, when shifting the production mode from the fifth normal mode in which a background image representing the state of point α located outdoors is displayed, to the fifth normal mode in which a background image representing the state of point β located outdoors is displayed. In this case, when it is decided to perform a sky transition effect, the background before the transition and the background after the transition are both outdoors, so as in the fourth embodiment, the transition of the effect mode can be naturally performed. It can be expressed in a form.

<Specific example of panel transition production>
FIG. 78 is a screen diagram for explaining the panel transition effect. The panel transition effect illustrated in FIG. 78 is a case where the effect mode is transferred from any one of the three types of fifth normal modes to any of the first normal mode to fifth normal mode. This is a mode transition performance that can be executed. This panel transition effect includes, for example, a mode transition suggestion panel that suggests the normal mode of transition destination, a pseudo continuous panel that suggests that a pseudo continuous effect will be executed, and a chance effect that suggests that a chance effect will be executed. A plurality of panels, such as a super hot mode shift suggestion panel that suggests that the production mode will shift to the super hot mode (see FIG. 74) described above, are displayed in order on the first display screen 7a, and any one of them is displayed in order on the first display screen 7a. When a panel is displayed full-screen on the first display screen 7a, the effect is configured to shift to the effect suggested by the panel (see FIGS. 78(A) to 78(D)).

Before this panel transition effect starts, the background image for the fifth normal mode before the transition is displayed on the entire screen of the first display screen 7a. In contrast, when the panel transition effect starts, a panel is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the panel is displayed moving from the back of the first display screen 7a to the front. Note that FIG. 78(A) shows an example of the state immediately after a pseudo consecutive panel appears behind a green chance eye panel, while a green chance eye panel movement display is performed to show the green chance eye panel moving to the front, suggesting that a green chance eye effect (here, an effect in which three effect patterns indicating a green chance eye consisting of the green numbers "155" are pseudo-stopped) will be executed in the early part of the panel transition effect.

Although not shown in the figure, when transitioning to the green chance effect after the end of the panel transition effect, the green chance effect is displayed full-screen on the first display screen 7a as the panel transition effect ends. On the other hand, if the transition to the green chance effect does not occur after the panel transition effect ends, the green chance effect panel that has moved forward is not displayed in full on the first display screen 7a, but is deleted from the first display screen 7a. It turns out. In this case, the entire pseudo-continuous panel that has moved to the front following the green chance panel is exposed, and behind the pseudo-continuous panel is a mode transition suggestion panel that suggests transitioning to the first normal mode. appears (see FIG. 78(B)).

Here, when transitioning to a pseudo continuous effect after the end of the panel transition effect, the pseudo continuous panel will be displayed on the entire first display screen 7a as the panel transition effect ends. On the other hand, if the transition to the pseudo continuous effect does not occur after the end of the panel transition effect, the pseudo continuous panel that has moved to the front will not be displayed in full on the first display screen 7a, but will be erased from the first display screen 7a. Become. In this case, the entire mode shift suggestion panel that has moved to the front following the pseudo-connection panel is exposed, and behind this mode shift suggestion panel, the above-mentioned intense heat mode shift suggestion panel appears (Figure 78 (See (C)).

Next, if the mode transition is to the first normal mode after the panel transition effect has ended, a mode transition suggestion panel suggesting a transition to the first normal mode is displayed full-screen on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 78(D)). Note that FIG. 78(D) shows an appearance in which a mode transition suggestion panel suggesting a transition to the first normal mode is displayed full-screen, with the characters "~Inside Country A~", indicating the presentation mode name of the first normal mode, displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a.

Note that while Figure 78 shows an example in which the mode change suggestion panel is displayed as the third panel, the mode change suggestion panel may also be displayed as the first panel, the second panel, or even as a fourth or subsequent panel.

In addition, while the above example illustrates a panel transition effect in which a mode transition suggestion panel is displayed full screen, there are also cases in which the mode transition suggestion panel is not displayed full screen, and instead a panel transition effect is executed in which a chance eye panel is displayed full screen, a panel transition effect is executed in which a pseudo consecutive panel is displayed full screen, and a panel transition effect is executed in which a panel suggesting a transition to the super hot mode is displayed full screen.

In addition, if a panel other than the mode transition suggestion panel is displayed full screen, the background image for the destination normal presentation mode is not displayed immediately after the panel transition presentation ends, so in this case the panel transition presentation can be said to be a false mode transition presentation in a sense.

Further, although FIG. 78 illustrates a case where only one mode transition suggestion panel is included among the plurality of panels sequentially displayed on the first display screen 7a, two or more modes In some cases, a transition suggestion panel is included, or in some cases, multiple panels are all mode transition suggestion panels. In this case, the probability that the mode transition suggestion panel will be displayed full screen increases compared to the case where only one mode transition suggestion panel is included (the probability that the panel transition effect as a mode transition effect will be executed increases). As a result, the probability that a fake mode transition effect will be executed decreases.

In addition, if two or more mode transition suggestion panels are included in the plurality of panels, for example, two mode transition suggestion panels suggesting transition to the first normal mode are included, or the first normal mode A total of two mode transition suggestion panels, a mode transition suggestion panel suggesting a transition to the third normal mode and a mode transition suggestion panel suggesting a transition to the third normal mode, may be included. Further, the plurality of panels may include three or more mode shift suggestion panels.

The number of panels displayed on the first display screen 7a from the start to the end of the panel transition effect is variable, and the number (total number) of panels displayed on the first display screen 7a changes appropriately depending on which panel is displayed full screen. Although not shown in the figure, there is also a pattern in which the panel transition effect ends without any of the panels displayed on the first display screen 7a being displayed full screen, and immediately after that, a miss notification effect is executed in which the three performance symbols indicating a spread stop pseudo-stop and then stop properly.

The types and combinations of panels displayed on the first display screen 7a during the execution of a panel transition effect are not particularly limited, and may include, for example, a panel suggesting the execution of a so-called step-up effect, a panel suggesting the execution of a line preview in which a character speaks a line suggesting the reliability of a jackpot, or no mode transition suggestion panel.

Next, the panel transition effects will be compared with the character transition effects (see Figure 76) and the aerial transition effects (see Figure 77). When comparing the panel transition effects with these two types of transition effects, the following can be said. That is, character transition effects and aerial transition effects are only executed when a normal presentation mode transitions to another normal presentation mode, whereas panel transition effects differ from these two types of transition effects in that they can be executed even when the presentation mode does not transition.

Also, regarding the normal production mode of the transition destination, when comparing the panel transition production with the character transition production, it is found that the character transition production is only executed when the normal production mode of the transition destination is the 5th normal mode, whereas the panel transition production is executed only when the normal production mode of the transition destination is the 5th normal mode. The two are different in that the transition performance can be executed regardless of the normal performance mode to which the transition is made, from the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode (see FIGS. 76 and 78). .

In addition, when comparing the panel transition effect with the character transition effect in terms of the normal presentation mode before the transition, the difference between the two is that the character transition effect can be executed regardless of whether the normal presentation mode before the transition is any of the first normal mode through the fifth normal mode, whereas the panel transition effect can only be executed when the normal presentation mode before the transition is the fifth normal mode (see Figures 76 and 78).

In addition, when comparing the panel transition effect with the air transition effect in terms of the normal presentation mode to which the transition is made, the difference between the two is that the air transition effect is only executed when the normal presentation mode to which the transition is made is a specific normal presentation mode (it is not executed when the normal presentation mode to which the transition is made is the fifth normal mode), whereas the panel transition effect can be executed regardless of whether the normal presentation mode to which the transition is made is any normal presentation mode from the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode (see Figures 77 and 78).

Also, regarding the normal production mode before the transition, when comparing the panel transition production with the sky transition production, the two are different in that these transition productions are only executed when the normal production mode before the transition is the 5th normal mode. They are common (see Figures 77 and 78).

<Processing related to mode transition effects>
The performance control microcomputer 91 selects the normal performance mode to which the mode is transferred when controlling the performance in a certain normal performance mode. At that time, if the current normal production mode is a specific normal production mode (any of the 1st to 4th normal modes), the destination normal production mode will be one of the 3 types of 5th normal modes. or choose. On the other hand, if the current normal performance mode is the fifth normal mode, one of the first to fourth normal modes is selected as the destination normal performance mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 4, it is possible to set a long-term stay for any one of the normal presentation modes from the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode. When the player performs the operation required for setting a long-term stay for one of the specific presentation modes on the long-term stay setting screen (see FIG. 79), information indicating the normal presentation mode for which a long-term stay setting has been performed is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In this way, when information indicating the normal presentation mode for which a long-term stay setting has been performed is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects the normal presentation mode indicated by the information as the normal presentation mode to which the player will transition.

When a long-term stay setting is made for any of the first to fourth normal modes, if the presentation is controlled in the fifth normal presentation mode, any of the mode transition presentations, be it a character transition presentation, an upper air transition presentation, or a panel transition presentation, can be executed, so the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects one of the mode transition presentations, for example, by conducting a lottery using random numbers. Then, at the start of the first variation of the first special symbol and presentation pattern that is executed after the long-term stay setting is made, the selected mode transition presentation is executed, and the presentation mode is transitioned to the normal presentation mode in which the long-term stay setting is made.

On the other hand, when the long-term stay setting is performed for any of the first to fourth normal modes, if the performance is controlled in any of the first to fourth normal modes, it is necessary to transition from the current normal performance mode to the fifth normal performance mode, and then transition to the normal performance mode in which the long-term stay setting is performed. Here, when transitioning from any of the first to fourth normal modes to the fifth normal mode, only the character transition performance among the three mode transition performances (see Figures 76 to 78) can be executed. For this reason, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the character transition performance at the start of the first special pattern and performance pattern that are first performed after the long-term stay setting is performed, and transitions the performance mode to the fifth normal mode. In this way, when the performance mode transitions to the fifth normal mode, at the start of the next first special pattern and performance pattern that have been transitioned, a mode transition performance is executed to transition the performance mode from the fifth normal mode to the normal performance mode in which the long-term stay setting is performed. Here, if the normal presentation mode before the transition is the fifth normal mode and the normal presentation mode to which the transition is made is a specific normal presentation mode, it is possible to execute an upper air transition presentation or a panel transition presentation. For this reason, the presentation control microcomputer 91 executes a presentation lottery using, for example, random numbers to select either the upper air transition presentation or the panel transition presentation, executes the selected mode transition presentation, and transitions the presentation mode from the fifth normal mode to the normal presentation mode in which the long-term stay setting is set.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state, except immediately after transitioning from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state, the fourth production mode is set. A configuration is adopted in which the production mode is not shifted. Therefore, if long-term stay settings are not made for any of the first normal mode to fourth normal mode, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a lottery using random numbers, for example, and selects the transfer destination. As the normal production mode, one of the first to third normal modes is selected.

Here, if you select any of the 1st normal mode to 3rd normal mode as the destination normal production mode, the production will be controlled in the specific normal production mode (any of the 1st normal mode to 4th normal mode). There are times when the performance is controlled in the fifth normal mode, but there are times when the performance is controlled in the fifth normal mode, but there is a process to shift the production mode from the specific normal mode or the fifth normal mode to the selected normal production mode. Since the performance control is performed in the same manner as when the long-term stay setting is performed as described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Up to this point, we have given an example of a case where, when transferring the production mode from the current normal production mode to another normal production mode, the production mode is transferred by performing any one of the three mode transition productions. As described above, the performance control microcomputer 91 may execute performance control to shift the performance mode from the current normal performance mode to another normal performance mode without executing the mode transition performance.

[Example of long-term stay setting screen]
Next, a specific example of the long-term stay setting screen will be described with reference to Fig. 79. Here, Fig. 79 is a screen diagram for explaining the long-term stay setting screen. Figs. 79(A)-(B) illustrate a long-term stay setting screen in a state where a long-term stay setting has not been made for any of the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode, and Fig. 79(C) illustrates a long-term stay setting screen in a state where a long-term stay setting has been made for the third normal mode. Also, Fig. 79(D) illustrates a long-term stay setting screen in a state where a long-term stay setting has been made for the fourth normal mode.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the player operates the right key (or left key) of the cross key a predetermined number of times while the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed, the player A long-term stay setting screen for performing a long-term stay setting operation for a desired normal production mode is displayed. This long-term stay setting screen (see FIG. 79(A)) includes a normal production mode image, a "normal" image, a "long-term" image, a cross key image, a first production button image, a message image, and a character image. It is composed of images.

Here, the normal presentation mode image is an image showing the name of the normal presentation mode that can be set for a long stay, and the long stay setting screen displays four normal presentation mode images: a normal presentation mode image containing the text "first normal mode," a normal presentation mode image containing the text "second normal mode," a normal presentation mode image containing the text "third normal mode," and a normal presentation mode image containing the text "fourth normal mode" (see FIG. 79 (A)).

The cross key image is an image imitating a cross key provided in the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 4 (similar to the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 2), and the up and down keys are highlighted compared to the left and right keys, and the word "cursor movement" is displayed below the cross key image. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the normal presentation mode in which the long-term stay setting operation or the setting change operation is performed can be switched by operating the up or down key of the cross key. In the long-term stay setting screen, one of the four normal presentation mode images is highlighted to indicate which normal presentation mode is the normal presentation mode in which the long-term stay setting can be switched between setting and canceling, and when the player operates the up or down key, the highlighted normal presentation mode image is changed. Figure 79 (A) illustrates a state in which the normal presentation mode image related to the first normal mode is highlighted, and when the player operates the down key of the cross key twice in this state, the normal presentation mode image related to the third normal mode is highlighted (see Figure 79 (B)).

The character image and message image are also displayed in the upper area of the long-term stay setting screen, for example to show character A issuing the message "You can choose the presentation mode you want for your long-term stay!" (see Figure 79 (A)).

The "normal" image and the "long-term" image are displayed side by side to the right of each of the four normal presentation mode images, with either the "normal" image or the "long-term" image corresponding to each normal presentation mode image being highlighted. In the long-term stay setting screen illustrated in FIG. 79(A), the "normal" image is highlighted for each of the four normal presentation mode images, and a player who sees this can easily recognize that no long-term stay setting has been made for any of the first through fourth normal modes.

The first performance button image (see FIG. 79(A)) is a performance image imitating the first performance button 63a, and below it is displayed the words "Decision change", and the player who sees this By operating the first effect button 63a, it is possible to set the long stay setting for the normal effect mode in which the normal effect mode image is highlighted, or conversely cancel the long stay setting. can be easily recognized.

If the long-term stay setting has not been configured for any of the first through fourth normal modes, the long-term stay setting screen shown in FIG. 79(A) is displayed on the third display screen 72a. Here, for example, to configure the long-term stay setting for the third normal mode, the player first operates the down key on the directional pad twice. This results in a state in which the normal presentation mode image corresponding to the third normal mode is highlighted instead of the normal presentation mode image corresponding to the first normal mode (see FIG. 79(A)-(B)).

As described above, when the down key on the cross key is operated twice, the normal presentation mode image corresponding to the third normal mode is highlighted, and the "normal" image corresponding to that normal presentation mode image is highlighted (see FIG. 79(B)). If the player wishes to set a long-term stay for the third normal mode, he or she operates the first presentation button 63a once. This changes the state from the "normal" image corresponding to the normal presentation mode image for the third normal mode being highlighted (see FIG. 79(B)) to the "long-term" image corresponding to the normal presentation mode image for the third normal mode being highlighted (see FIG. 79(C)), and information indicating that a long-term stay setting has been set for the third normal mode is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

Here, the first effect button 63a can also be used to cancel the long-term stay setting, and the player presses the first effect button 63a 1 while the long-term stay setting screen illustrated in FIG. 79(C) is displayed. When operated twice, the "long term" image corresponding to the normal production mode image related to the third normal mode is highlighted, and then the "normal" image corresponding to the normal production mode image related to the third normal mode is highlighted. The state returns to the state (see FIG. 79(B)), and along with this, information indicating that the long-term stay setting has been made for the third normal mode is discarded from the RAM of the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, when the long-term stay setting screen shown in FIG. 79(C) is displayed, if the player wishes to set the long-term stay for the fourth normal mode, the player first operates the down key on the directional pad once. This causes the normal presentation mode image corresponding to the fourth normal mode to be highlighted instead of the normal presentation mode image corresponding to the third normal mode (see FIG. 79(C)-(D)).

In this way, when the lower key of the cross key is operated once, although not shown in the figure, the normal effect mode image corresponding to the fourth normal mode is highlighted, and the normal effect mode image is The corresponding "normal" image is now highlighted. Here, if the player wishes to perform long-term stay settings regarding the fourth normal mode, the player operates the first performance button 63a once. Then, the state changes from a state where the "normal" image corresponding to the normal production mode image related to the fourth normal mode is highlighted to a state where the "long term" image corresponding to the normal production mode image related to the fourth normal mode is highlighted. (See FIG. 79(D)). Along with this, the information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicating that the long-term stay setting has been made for the third normal mode is changed from the information that the long-term stay setting has been made for the fourth normal mode. The information is rewritten to indicate that the

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 4 is configured such that the long-term stay setting is possible only for one of the normal presentation modes, the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode. Therefore, on the long-term stay setting screen, multiple "long-term" images are not highlighted at the same time. For example, when the long-term stay setting screen illustrated in FIG. 79(C) is displayed and the long-term stay setting is performed for the fourth normal mode as described above based on FIG. 79(C) to (D), the state changes from the state in which the "long-term" image corresponding to the normal presentation mode image related to the third normal mode is highlighted and the "normal" image corresponding to the normal presentation mode image related to the fourth normal mode is highlighted (see FIG. 79(C)) to the state in which the "normal" image corresponding to the normal presentation mode image related to the third normal mode is highlighted and the "long-term" image corresponding to the normal presentation mode image related to the fourth normal mode is highlighted (see FIG. 79(D)).

[About extension/termination selection promotion screen]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a description will be given of the extension/end selection promotion screen that is displayed when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode. Here, FIG. 80 is a screen diagram for explaining the extension/termination selection promotion screen.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 4, when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state and the presentation is controlled in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fifth normal mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 automatically determines whether to transition to another normal presentation mode, regardless of the player's operation of the cross key or the first presentation button 63a. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the low probability low base state and the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the extension/end selection prompt screen may be displayed, and while this extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed (during the valid period when the operation on the extension/end selection prompt screen is valid), the player can arbitrarily select whether to transition from the fourth normal presentation mode to another normal presentation mode (here, the fifth normal mode) by operating the cross key (or the cross key and the first presentation button 63a).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the game transitions from a low-probability high base state to a low-probability low base state, or when a long-term stay setting is made for the fourth normal mode while the game is controlled in the low-probability low base state, the presentation mode transitions to the fourth normal mode. When the presentation mode transitions to the fourth normal mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 counts the number of variations, which is the number of times that the first special symbol and the presentation symbol have been displayed in the fourth normal mode. Specifically, the number of variations is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, and when the presentation mode is the fourth normal mode, the number of variations is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time a variation stop command is received from the main control board 80. Then, when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the image control board 100 is instructed to execute a process of displaying an extension/end selection prompt screen on the first display screen 7a at the timing when the first variation start command is received after the number of variations reaches the predetermined number.

This extension/termination selection promotion screen (see Figure 80) allows you to select whether or not to continue the production (including playback of the selected song) in the fourth normal mode when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode. This is a selection screen for the player to arbitrarily select, and as illustrated in FIG. 80(A), a message image, an extension image, an end image, a cross key image, a first effect button image, and a validity period gauge.

Here, the message image is an image showing a message "Do you want to extend the fourth normal mode?" that prompts the player to select whether or not to continue the presentation in the fourth normal mode. The extension image is the first option for continuing the presentation in the fourth normal mode, and the end image is the second option for ending the presentation in the fourth normal mode. The cross key image is an image imitating the cross key provided in the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, with the parts representing the left key and the right key highlighted, and the word "change selection" is displayed above the cross key image. For this reason, the player can easily recognize that it is possible to switch between a state in which the end image is highlighted and a state in which the extension image is highlighted by operating the right key or the left key of the cross key. For example, when the extension/end selection prompt screen of FIG. 80(A) is displayed, if the player operates the left key of the cross key once, the end image returns to the normal display mode, and the extension image is highlighted instead of the end image. If the player then presses the right key on the directional pad once more, the extension image will return to its normal display mode, and the end image will be highlighted instead.

The first effect button image is an image that imitates the first effect button 63a, and the word "Confirm" is displayed above it. Below the first effect button image, a validity period gauge is displayed that indicates the remaining validity period during which operation of the directional pad (here, the left or right key) or the first effect button 63a is valid while the extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed. Note that in this Example 4, this validity period and the display period of the extension/end selection prompt screen are the same, and the validity period begins when the extension/end selection prompt screen begins to be displayed, and the display of the extension/end selection prompt screen ends when the validity period ends.

In the fourth embodiment, the valid period during which the operations of the left key, right key of the cross key, and the first effect button 63a on the extension/termination selection promotion screen are valid is set to 5 seconds, and the player can Therein, by operating the first effect button 63a with the end image highlighted, the selection to end the effect in the fourth normal mode can be confirmed. Furthermore, the player can confirm the selection to continue the performance in the fourth normal mode by operating the first performance button 63a with the extension image highlighted during the validity period.

In this way, when the first effect button 63a is operated even once with the extension image (or end image) highlighted, the selection to continue the effect in the fourth normal mode (or the fourth normal mode The selection to end the performance is confirmed, the validity period ends, and the display of the extension/termination selection promotion screen also ends.

On the other hand, if the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period, when the valid period ends, that is, at the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the valid period started, one of the extended images and the end image will be displayed. The selection indicated by the highlighted image is confirmed. Specifically, if the effective period ends without the first effect button 63a being operated while the extension image is highlighted, the selection to continue the effect in the fourth normal mode is confirmed. On the other hand, if the effective period ends without the first performance button 63a being operated while the end image is highlighted, the selection to end the performance in the fourth normal mode is confirmed.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 4, the selection of continuing (or ending) the presentation in the fourth normal mode is confirmed without operating the first presentation button 63a, so the player can continue or end the presentation in the fourth normal mode with minimal operations.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 4, as described above based on FIG. 75, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, it is possible to display an extension/end selection prompt screen every 20 variations, but in the extension/end selection prompt screen that is first displayed after switching to the fourth normal mode, the end image is highlighted out of the extension image and the end image. In other words, in the extension/end selection prompt screen that is first displayed after switching to the fourth normal mode, the end of the presentation in the fourth normal mode is preselected. Then, this selection is automatically confirmed with the end of the valid period.

Therefore, if the player wishes to end the performance in the fourth normal mode, it is possible to end the performance in the fourth normal mode without performing any operation.

FIG. 80(B) shows an example of mode transition notification being performed using the first display screen 7a immediately after the selection to end the production in the fourth normal mode is confirmed. If the first effect button 63a is operated within the validity period while the end image of the extension/termination selection promotion screen is highlighted, or if the end image of the extension/termination selection promotion screen is highlighted ( If the validity period ends (without the first performance button 63a being operated), the selection to end the performance in the fourth normal mode is confirmed, and a mode transition notification is issued immediately after the display of the extension/end selection promotion screen ends. will be held. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 80(B), an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character utters the line "Mode transition will occur with the next change!".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 4, three mode transition effects can be executed as mode transition effects: a character transition effect (see FIG. 76), an upper air transition effect (see FIG. 77), and a panel transition effect (see FIG. 78). However, when the presentation mode is transitioned from the fourth normal mode to another presentation mode (here, the fifth normal mode), the only mode transition effect that can be executed is the character transition effect. Therefore, when the pattern change following the pattern change that confirmed the end of the presentation in the fourth normal mode is started, immediately thereafter, a character transition effect (see FIG. 76) is executed to notify that the presentation mode is transitioning from the fourth normal mode to the fifth normal mode, and the presentation in the fifth normal mode is started.

As described above based on FIG. 80(B), the mode transition notification that is made immediately after the display of the extension/end selection prompt screen has ended does not clearly indicate which normal presentation mode the transition will be to, but does notify the user that the presentation mode will be transitioned to. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 4, there are cases where the presentation in the fifth normal mode begins with the start of the pattern change following the pattern change that confirmed the end of the presentation in the fourth normal mode, without the character transition presentation being executed.

On the other hand, if the first performance button 63a is operated during the valid period while the extension image is highlighted, or if the valid period ends while the extension image is highlighted (without the first performance button 63a being operated), the selection to continue the performance in the fourth normal mode is confirmed, and the display of the extension/end selection prompt screen ends. When the selection to continue the performance in the fourth normal mode is confirmed, the performance control microcomputer 91 resets the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM. Then, while continuing to control the performance in the fourth normal mode, the number of fluctuations is updated to a value in which "1" is added each time a fluctuation stop command transmitted from the main control board 80 is received. Then, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the image control board 100 is instructed to execute a process to display the extension/end selection prompt screen on the first display screen 7a at the timing when the first fluctuation start command is received after the number of fluctuations reaches the predetermined number. This causes the extension/end selection prompt screen to be displayed again.

FIG. 80(C) shows an example of an extension/termination selection promotion screen that is displayed from the second time onwards after transitioning to the fourth normal mode. The extension/termination selection promotion screen that is displayed first (first time) after transitioning to the fourth normal mode (see Figure 80 (A)), and the extension/termination selection promotion screen that is displayed from the second time onwards (see Figure 80(A)). 80(C)), on the display of the first extension/termination selection promotion screen, the end image is highlighted by default, whereas the second and subsequent extension/termination selection promotion screen is displayed in a default state. When the selection promotion screen is displayed, the extended image is highlighted by default. If the validity period ends without the first effect button 63a being operated, the selection indicated by the highlighted image of the extension image and the end image will not be confirmed from the second time onwards. The same applies to the display of the extension/termination selection promotion screen.

In this way, when the extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed for the second or subsequent times, the extension/end selection prompt screen (see FIG. 80(C)) is displayed in a state in which the selection to continue the presentation in the fourth normal mode has been made (the extension image is highlighted), and the selection to continue the presentation in the fourth normal mode is automatically confirmed without any operation. Therefore, the player can continue the presentation in the fourth normal mode without performing any operation during the valid period, and unless the player operates the right key on the directional pad to change the highlighted image to the end image, the presentation in the fourth normal mode will continue for a long period of time, such as 20 changes, 40 changes, 60 changes, etc.

When the extension/end selection prompt screen (see FIG. 80(C)) is displayed for the second or subsequent times, the player can confirm the selection to end the presentation in the fourth normal mode by operating the right key within the valid period and then operating the first presentation button 63a, or by operating the right key within the valid period and then ending the valid period without operating the first presentation button 63a. In this case, a mode transition notification is issued in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 80(B), and the presentation mode transitions from the fourth normal mode to the fifth normal mode.

<Examples of mode transitions and mode transition effects>
Hereinafter, specific examples of transition of presentation modes and mode transition presentations will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. Here, Figures 81 and 82 are time charts showing specific examples of transition of presentation modes and mode transition presentations.

(1st pattern)
Figure 81 (A) shows how the production mode changes and at what timing when the production mode changes from the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode via the character transition production (see Figure 76). It is a time chart illustrating whether a transition effect is performed.

For example, in variation 1 and variation 2 illustrated in FIG. For example, a lottery using random numbers is performed to determine whether or not to execute the mode transition effect. Here, if it is decided to execute the mode transition effect, the mode is determined based on the destination effect mode (here, the 5th normal mode) and the (current) effect mode before the transition (here, the 1st normal mode). , an executable mode transition performance is specified, and if there are a plurality of executable mode transition performances, one of them is selected by lottery.

As mentioned above, in addition to determining whether or not to perform the mode transition performance by lottery, for example, the fluctuation time related to the variable display of the first special symbol at which the performance in the normal performance mode of the transition destination is started. If the variation time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds), it is decided to execute the mode transition effect, and conversely, if the variation time is less than the predetermined time, the mode change effect is not executed. You may. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is started in a state where the number of reservations related to the first special symbol validity determination is large, a variation pattern with a short variation time such as 2 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It is possible that sufficient time cannot be secured to execute the mode transition effect. A configuration in which it is determined whether or not to perform the mode transition effect based on the above-mentioned variable time is suitable to be adopted in such a case.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 81(A), because the presentation mode to which the transition is made is the fifth normal mode and the presentation mode before the transition is the first normal mode, as is clear from the notations in FIG. 76 to FIG. 78, the only mode transition presentation that can be executed is the character transition presentation. For this reason, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80 a change start command notifying that the display of the first special symbol shown as Change 3 will begin to change, it sends a command to the image control board 100 (and the audio control board 106) to instruct it to execute a character transition presentation and then start a presentation in the fifth normal mode. As a result, the character transition presentation is executed between the start of the symbol change of Change 3 and the passage of a predetermined time, and after the passage of the predetermined time, a presentation in the fifth normal mode is performed.

Note that FIG. 81(A) illustrates a case where the transition to the fifth normal mode is such that a certain point α outdoors is displayed as the background; mode, or may shift to a fifth normal mode in which a certain point γ outdoors is displayed as the background.

(Second pattern)
Figure 81 (B) is a time chart illustrating how the presentation mode changes and at what timing the character transition performance is performed when the presentation mode transitions from the fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point α is displayed as the background to the fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point γ is displayed as the background via a character transition performance (see Figure 76).

If the destination normal presentation mode and the normal presentation mode before the transition are both the fifth normal mode, it is possible to execute a character transition presentation (see FIG. 76) and a panel transition presentation (see FIG. 78), but it is not possible to execute an upper air transition presentation (see FIG. 77). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 wins the mode transition lottery while controlling the presentation in the fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point α is displayed as the background, and selects the fifth normal mode in which an outdoor point γ is displayed as the background as the transition destination, it selects either a character transition presentation or a panel transition presentation, and has the image control board 100 (and the audio control board 106) execute the selected mode transition presentation.

Figure 81 (B) shows an example in which a character transition effect is selected as the mode transition effect, and the character transition effect is executed from the start of the varying display of the first special pattern shown as variation 2 until a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fifth normal mode effect is executed in which an outdoor point γ is displayed as the background.

(Third pattern)
Figure 81 (C) is a time chart illustrating how the presentation mode changes and at what timing the sky transition performance is performed when the presentation mode transitions from the fifth normal mode, in which an outdoor point α is displayed as the background, to the second normal mode via an sky transition performance.

If the destination performance mode is the second normal mode and the performance mode before the transition is the fifth normal mode, both the sky transition performance (see Figure 77) and the panel transition performance (see Figure 78) can be executed. On the other hand, it is impossible to execute the character transition effect (see FIG. 76). If the performance control microcomputer 91 wins the mode transition lottery while controlling the performance in the fifth normal mode in which a certain point α outdoors is displayed as the background, and selects the second normal mode as the transition destination, Either the sky transition performance or the panel transition performance is selected, and the image control board 100 (and the audio control board 106) is caused to execute the selected mode transition performance.

In FIG. 81(C), the sky transition performance is selected as the mode transition performance, and the sky transition performance is executed until a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol shown as variation 2 starts. The example shows that after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the performance in the second normal mode is executed.

As described above based on FIG. 78, the panel transition effect is configured as an effect in which multiple panels are displayed in sequence and moved, and one of the panels is displayed full screen to suggest the transition destination effect, so it is a mode transition effect that requires a longer time to execute than the character transition effect or the aerial transition effect. For this reason, for example, if the time taken for the first special symbol to change in the change display of the first special symbol shown as Change 2 in FIG. 81(C) to change is relatively short, the time from the end of the panel transition effect to the end of the change 2 symbol change will be extremely short, and there is a possibility that an unnatural effect will be performed in which the effect symbol stops immediately after the panel transition effect ends (i.e., immediately after the transition to the second normal mode).

In order to prevent such problems from occurring, when selecting an air transition effect or a panel transition effect as the mode transition effect, a selection process can be performed in which if the transition time of the first special pattern in variation 2 that executes the mode transition effect is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, a panel transition effect is selected, whereas if this transition time is less than the predetermined time, an air transition effect is selected. Note that this type of selection process can also be performed when selecting a character transition effect or a panel transition effect as the mode transition effect.

(Fourth pattern)
Figure 81 (D) is a time chart illustrating how the presentation mode transitions to the fourth normal mode via an upward transition presentation when a long stay setting is made for the fourth normal mode while the presentation is controlled in the fifth normal mode in conjunction with the changing display of the first special pattern (Change 1).

When a long-term stay setting is made for any of the specific normal presentation modes from the first normal mode to the fourth normal mode, it is considered that the player wants to enjoy the presentation in that specific normal presentation mode as soon as possible. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 4, as exemplified in FIG. 81(D), if a long-term stay setting is made for the fourth normal mode while variation 1 is being performed, the presentation in the fourth normal mode will start when variation 2, which is the variation display of the first special symbol that is performed after variation 1, is being performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 81(D), an air transition effect is executed with the start of variation 2, and the fourth normal mode effect starts with the end of this air transition effect. However, when the effect mode is changed from the fifth normal mode to the fourth normal mode, the above-mentioned panel transition effect based on FIG. 78 may be executed instead of the air transition effect.

Furthermore, in FIG. 81(D), a long-term stay setting for the fourth normal mode is performed in the middle of variation 1, and the production in the fourth normal mode is started in the middle of variation 2 following variation 1. is exemplified. On the other hand, for example, the long-term stay setting for the fourth normal mode is performed during the period from the end of variation 1 until the start of variation 2, that is, the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 81(D), the performance in the fourth normal mode is started in the middle of variation 2. This also applies to the case where the normal performance mode set for a long stay is a specific normal performance mode other than the fourth normal mode.

Also, FIG. 81(D) shows how, when the performance is controlled in the fifth normal mode and a long-stay setting is made for the fourth normal mode, the performance in the fourth normal mode begins with the next change. On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in a specific normal performance mode of the first to fourth normal modes and a long-stay setting is made for another specific normal mode, since a configuration is adopted in which there is no direct mode transition between specific normal performance modes, in this case the performance mode will first transition to the fifth normal mode, and then transition to the specific normal performance mode for which a long-stay setting is made.

(Fifth pattern)
In Fig. 82(A), when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the extension/end selection prompt screen (see Fig. 80) is displayed with the start of variation 3, and the selection of extension of the performance in the fourth normal mode is confirmed. In this case, the performance in the fourth normal mode continues even during the period in which the variation display of the first special symbol such as variation 4 and variation 5 after variation 3 is intermittently performed.

(Sixth pattern)
Figure 82 (B) shows an example of a situation in which, when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the number of changes in the fourth normal mode reaches "20" due to the pattern change of variation 1, and a long-term stay setting for the fourth normal mode (the same as the current normal presentation mode) is made while variation 1 is being performed, and then, an end selection is confirmed on the extension/end selection prompt screen displayed while variation 2 is being performed.

As mentioned above, if the number of variations in the 4th normal mode reaches "20" due to the symbol variation of variation 1, any specific normal production mode (1st normal mode to 4th normal mode) Regardless of whether long-term stay settings have been made for any of the following, an extension/termination selection promotion screen is displayed with the start of the next symbol variation (here, variation 2). Here, the first effect button 63a is operated within the validity period with the end image highlighted, or the first effect button 63a is not operated and becomes effective with the end image highlighted. When the period ends, the selection to end the performance in the fourth performance mode is confirmed, and a mode transition notification (see FIG. 80(B)) is executed. This is as described above based on FIG. 80.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment 4, a configuration is adopted in which a selection confirmation operation on the extension/end selection prompt screen takes precedence over a long-term stay setting for any specific normal presentation mode (here, the fourth normal mode). For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 82(B), if a long-term stay setting for the fourth normal mode is made while variation 1 is being performed and a selection to end the presentation in the fourth normal mode is confirmed while variation 2 is being performed, the latter takes precedence, and the presentation mode transitions from the fourth normal mode to another normal presentation mode (here, the fifth normal mode, in which a background showing an outdoor point α is displayed) at variation 3, which is the pattern variation following variation 2 (see FIG. 82(B)).

Note that while Figure 82 (B) shows the start of the fifth normal mode presentation with the start of variation 3, it is also possible to carry out a mode transition presentation with the start of variation 3, and then start the fifth normal mode presentation with the end of this mode transition presentation midway through variation 3.

In this way, when the end selection on the extension/end selection promotion screen is confirmed and the production mode shifts from the 4th normal mode to the 5th normal mode, the long-term change in the 4th normal mode performed during the execution of variation 1 There are no more priorities than accommodation settings. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 82(B), in the period from the start of the symbol variation of variation 3 until the start of the symbol variation of variation 4, the production in the 5th normal mode is performed by only 1 variation. It will be done. Then, with the start of the symbol variation of variation 4, for example, an upward movement effect is performed, and from the middle of variation 4, the effect in the fourth normal mode is performed again.

(Seventh pattern)
Fig. 82(C) illustrates a case where a long stay setting is made for the first normal mode during the execution of the pattern change of change 1 when the presentation is controlled in the fourth normal mode. Fig. 82(C) illustrates a state where the number of changes does not reach "20" at the stage where the pattern change of change 1 is finished, and then multiple pattern changes are made, and the number of changes reaches "20" due to the pattern change of change 2, and an extension/end selection prompt screen is displayed with the start of change 3, which is the pattern change next to change 2.

In this way, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the performance mode quickly shifts to the specific normal performance mode based on the long stay setting for the specific normal performance mode (here, the first normal mode). There is nothing to do, and the performance in the fourth normal mode continues at least until the extension/end selection promotion screen is displayed.

Here, if the selection to end the performance in the fourth normal mode on the extension/end selection promotion screen is confirmed, the mode transition notification (Fig. 80 (B) reference) is executed. Then, with the start of the next symbol variation (variation 4) after the selection to end the production in the 4th normal mode is confirmed, for example, the production in the 5th normal mode in which a certain point β outdoors is displayed as the background is started. will be started.

In this way, when the presentation mode transitions from the fourth normal mode to the fifth normal mode based on the end selection on the extension/end selection prompt screen, there is no longer any priority over the long stay setting for the first normal mode that was made while variation 1 was being executed. For this reason, as exemplified in FIG. 82(C), in the period from when the pattern change for variation 4 starts until when the pattern change for variation 5 starts, a presentation in the fifth normal mode is performed for only one variation, and with the start of the pattern change for variation 5, for example, an upward transition presentation is performed, and the presentation in the first normal mode starts midway through variation 5.

[About the timing of various cut-ins and jackpot reliability]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the occurrence timing and jackpot reliability of various cut-ins performed when the game is controlled in a low-probability, low-base state will be explained. Here, FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various cut-in occurrence timings and jackpot reliability.

In Example 3, in response to the first performance button operation promotion performance (see FIG. 67(E)) performed at the end of SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)), the player can perform the first performance during its validity period. The case has been described in which a green cut-in, a red cut-in, or a gold cut-in occurs when the button 63a is operated, and a cut-in does not occur during other ready-to-win effects or before a ready-to-win effect is established.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 4, the reach is achieved not only during the SPSP reach, but also during the first SP reach (see FIG. 62(H)) and the second SP reach (see FIG. 62(I)). Cut-in may occur at various timings, such as before (when the pre-reach effect in Figure 62 (C) is being executed), during normal reach (during normal long reach in Figure 62 (E)), and when cut-in occurs. The types are also partially different from those explained in the third embodiment.

<About cut-in during 1st SP reach>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, a blue cut-in, a green cut-in, a red cut-in, or a super hot pattern cut-in may occur during the first SP reach (see FIG. 83(A)). . Here, the blue cut-in is a preview effect in which a cut-in image expressed using blue is superimposed on the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the jackpot reliability is approximately 1%. It is set. The green cut-in is a preview effect in which a cut-in image expressed using green is superimposed on the background image etc. displayed on the first display screen 7a, and its jackpot reliability is set at approximately 5%. There is. The red cut-in is a preview effect in which a cut-in image expressed using red is superimposed on the background image etc. displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the jackpot reliability is set at approximately 15%. There is. The super hot pattern cut-in is a preview effect in which a cut-in image expressing a super hot pattern (for example, a star pattern) is superimposed on the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the jackpot reliability is It is set at approximately 75%.

Note that during the first SP reach, unlike during the SPSP reach, no operation prompting effect to cause a cut-in is executed, and the cut-in occurs regardless of the player's operation. There are also cases where a cut-in does not occur, and when a cut-in does occur, it is characterized by the fact that the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed than when a cut-in does not occur. Also, because the jackpot reliability of each cut-in during the first SP reach is set as described above, when a cut-in with high reliability occurs, there is a high possibility that a winning notification effect will be executed in the first SP reach, and that the first SP reach will develop into an SPSP reach.

<About cut-in during 2nd SP reach>
During the second SP reach, green cut-in, red cut-in, super hot pattern cut-in, and rainbow cut-in may occur (see FIG. 83(A)). When comparing the cut-in that occurs during the 2nd SP reach with the cut-in that occurs during the 1st SP reach, the blue cut-in that can occur during the 1st SP reach does not occur during the 2nd SP reach, but instead It is different from the cut-in that occurs during the first SP reach in that a rainbow cut-in that does not occur during the first SP reach may occur. Here, the rainbow cut-in is a preview effect in which a cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors is displayed superimposed on the background image etc. displayed on the first display screen 7a.

The reliability of each cut-in that can occur during the second SP reach is approximately 14% for a green cut-in, approximately 48% for a red cut-in, a very hot pattern cut-in that is highly likely to result in a jackpot (when it occurs), and a rainbow cut-in that is highly likely to result in a jackpot (when it occurs). The cut-ins that can occur during the second SP reach, just like during the first SP reach, are the green cut-in, red cut-in, and the very hot pattern cut-in, but each cut-in has the characteristic that they have a higher reliability of a jackpot if they occur during the second SP reach than during the first SP reach (see Figure 83 (A)).

During the second SP reach, as during the first SP reach, no operation prompting effect is executed to cause a cut-in, and the cut-in occurs regardless of the player's operation. There are also cases where a cut-in does not occur, and when a cut-in does occur, the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed than when a cut-in does not occur. Also, since the jackpot reliability of each cut-in during the second SP reach is set as described above, when a red cut-in occurs, there is a higher possibility that a winning notification effect will be executed in the second SP reach, or that the second SP reach will develop into an SPSP reach, and when a super hot pattern cut-in or rainbow cut-in occurs, it is confirmed that a winning notification effect will be executed.

<About cut-in during SPSP reach>
The cut-ins during SPSP Reach include green cut-ins, red cut-ins, super hot pattern cut-ins, and rainbow cut-ins, and the types of cut-ins are common to the second SP Reach. However, some of the cut-ins that occur during the SPSP reach are set to have a lower jackpot reliability than the cut-ins that occur during the second SP reach. To explain specifically, the jackpot reliability of the green cut-in that occurs during the 2nd SP reach is approximately 14%, while the jackpot reliability of the green cut-in that occurs during the SPSP reach is approximately 5%. , the jackpot reliability is lower than that of the green cut-in that occurs during the second SP reach. Also, the jackpot reliability of the red cut-in that occurs during the 2nd SP reach is about 48%, while the jackpot reliability of the red cut-in that occurs during the SPSP reach is about 35%, and the 2nd SP reach The jackpot reliability is lower than the red cut-in that occurs inside. In addition, while it is highly likely to be a jackpot when the super hot pattern cut-in that occurs during the 2nd SP reach occurs, the jackpot reliability of the super hot pattern cut-in that occurs during the SPSP reach is about 70%, The jackpot reliability is lower than that of the hot cut-in that occurs during the 2nd SP reach.

Note that during SPSP reach, the first performance button operation promotion performance (see FIG. 67(E)) that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 63a is performed at the end of the SPSP reach, as described in the third embodiment. The cut-in set by the performance control microcomputer 91 occurs only when the first performance button 63a is operated within the valid period of this first performance button operation promotion performance.

＜About the super hot pattern cut-ins＞
As is clear from the notation in FIG. 83(A), the super hot pattern cut-in may occur during the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach. In other words, the super hot pattern cut-in has a feature not found in other cut-ins, that is, it may occur during any of the reach performances of the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach. And, as exemplified in FIG. 83(B), this super hot pattern cut-in may occur before the reach is established or during a normal reach. Specifically, the super hot pattern cut-in may occur during the execution of the reach pre-performance (see FIG. 62(C)) or during the execution of a normal long reach (see FIG. 62(G)).

In addition, the super hot pattern cut-in also has the characteristic that the jackpot reliability changes depending on the timing of occurrence. Specifically, the high-heat pattern cut-in has a jackpot reliability of about 52% when it occurs before the reach is established, and a jackpot when it occurs during the normal reach (in this Example 3, during the normal long reach). The reliability is about 45%, and the reliability of a jackpot if it occurs during the 1st SP reach is about 75%, and if it occurs during the 2nd SP reach, it is highly likely to be a jackpot at that point, and it occurs during the SPSP reach. In this case, the jackpot reliability is approximately 70%, and the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of occurrence.

And, if the super hot pattern cut-in occurs during the SPSP reach, the jackpot reliability is about 70%, if it occurs during the 1st SP reach, the jackpot reliability is about 75%, and when it occurs during the 2nd SP reach. Then, since the jackpot is likely to be high, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a hot pattern cut-in to occur during the SPSP reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach.

The reliability of a super hot pattern cut-in occurring during the first SP reach, which has a lower reliability of a jackpot compared to the SPSP reach, is higher than the reliability of a super hot pattern cut-in occurring during the SPSP reach. For this reason, by generating a super hot pattern cut-in during the first SP reach, it is possible to effectively increase the anticipation of a jackpot for players who were not expecting a jackpot, and as a result, a high performance effect can be obtained.

[About same-color chance eye effects and cut-ins when symbols stop]
Next, the same-color chance eye effect and the cut-in at the time of pseudo-stop of the pattern executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the embodiment 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 84 to Fig. 87. Here, Fig. 84 to Fig. 86 are screen diagrams for explaining the same-color chance eye effect and the cut-in at the time of pseudo-stop of the pattern executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the embodiment 4. Fig. 87 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the same-color chance eye effect and the cut-in at the time of pseudo-stop of the pattern.

(The colours of the numbers that make up each production pattern)
In the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, as explained in the third embodiment based on Fig. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the third normal mode, a performance pattern consisting of numbers and a character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a performance pattern consisting of numbers without a character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Also, when the game is controlled in the fifth normal mode, a performance pattern consisting of numbers and a character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a in the same way as when the game is controlled in any of the first to third normal modes.

The production symbols displayed in each of these normal production modes include 1 symbol with the number "1", 2 symbols with the number "2", 3 symbols with the number "3", and 3 symbols with the number "3". 4 symbols with the number "4", 5 symbols with the number "5", 6 symbols with the number "6", 7 symbols with the number "7", and 8 symbols with the number "8" There are a symbol and a 9 symbol having the number "9". The numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue numbers, the numbers "1", "5", and "9" are green numbers, and the number "3" is blue numbers. ” and “7” are red numbers.

<Same color chance eye production>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, if the right to determine the validity of the first special symbol is reserved when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy, low-base state, the game control microcomputer 81: Prior to executing the first special symbol validity determination for this reserved right, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a jackpot, and the first special symbol selected when the first special symbol validity determination is actually executed. A preliminary determination process is executed to identify the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, based on the result of this preliminary determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the performance control in the symbol variation performed using the performance symbols before the suspended first special symbol validity determination is executed. In some cases, the image control board 100 (and the audio control board 106) is caused to execute a chance effect as a look-ahead effect indicating that a jackpot game may be executed.

There are three types of chance eye effects: blue chance eye effects, green chance eye effects, and red chance eye effects. The blue chance eye effects are effects that suggest a relatively low reliability of a jackpot, and are effects in which the three numbers of three performance symbols, such as "244" and "448," are all blue numbers, and these three numbers pseudo-stop on the first display screen 7a in a specific combination that does not show a double number or form a reach. The green chance eye effects are effects that suggest a medium reliability of a jackpot, and are effects in which the three numbers of three performance symbols, such as "155" and "559," are all green numbers, and these three numbers pseudo-stop on the first display screen 7a in a specific combination that does not show a double number or form a reach. The red chance effect is an effect that suggests a relatively high probability of winning. For example, the three numbers in the effect pattern, such as "337" or "773," are all red, and these three numbers stop pseudo-stop on the first display screen 7a in a specific combination that does not show a repeat number or form a reach.

In the fourth embodiment, before the start of the prefetch target variation that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol validity determination that was the target of the above-mentioned preliminary determination process, the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination is " A chance effect may be performed using one or more symbol changes that notify the player of a loss. Further, during one fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the short fluctuating display and the pseudo-stop display of the three performance symbols are alternately repeated, and the chance performance may be executed a plurality of times. A specific example where the chance effect is performed multiple times within the same variation will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 84 to 86.

<Cut-in when the design pseudo stops>
In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines which symbols are to be executed using the performance symbols before the pending first special symbol validity determination is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination process by the game control microcomputer 81. In the variation, the image control board 100 (and the audio control board 106) may be caused to perform a look-ahead performance called a symbol pseudo-stop cut-in as a performance suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed. Here, the cut-in at the time of pattern pseudo stop is during the variable display of the first special pattern, and when the three production patterns are pseudo-stop-displayed in a manner that does not show a double (same color chance or rose), This is an effect in which a cut-in image suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed is displayed superimposed on three effect symbols (for example, see FIG. 84(E)).

Here, when the symbol pseudo-stop cut-in is compared with each cut-in described above based on FIG. 83, the following can be said. That is, the symbol pseudo-stop cut-in and each cut-in described above based on FIG. 83 have in common that they are effects that suggest that a jackpot game may be executed.

On the other hand, the cut-ins described based on FIG. 83 are advance notice effects that are executed based on the results of the first special symbol hit/miss determination, whereas the cut-in at the time of the pseudo-stop pattern is a pre-reading effect based on the results of the advance determination process for the reserved first special symbol hit/miss determination, in that respect, the two are different. Also, the cut-ins described above based on FIG. 83 are cut-ins that occur when at least the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner, whereas the cut-in at the time of the pseudo-stop pattern is a cut-in that occurs when all three performance symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, in that respect, the two are different. Also, the cut-ins that occur during the reach performance described based on FIG. 83 are not superimposed on the performance symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that form the reach (see FIG. 67(F)), whereas the cut-in at the time of the pseudo-stop pattern is superimposed on the three performance symbols that are displayed in a pseudo-stop state (see FIG. 84(E)), in that respect, the two are different.

The cut-ins at the time of the pseudo-stop of the symbols in the fourth embodiment include weak cut-ins and strong cut-ins. The weak cut-in (see, for example, FIG. 84(E)) is a look-ahead effect in which a cut-in image suggesting that the possibility of a big win game being executed is relatively low is superimposed on the three pseudo-stopped effect symbols. The strong cut-in (see, for example, FIG. 85(H)) is a look-ahead effect in which a cut-in image larger than the cut-in image used for the weak cut-in is superimposed on the three effect symbols. When the possibility of a big win is relatively low, the weak cut-in is more likely to occur than the strong cut-in. Also, when the possibility of a big win is relatively high, the strong cut-in is more likely to occur than the weak cut-in, and there are cases where the strong cut-in occurs after the weak cut-in. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, during one variable display of the first special symbol, a weak cut-in may occur followed by a strong cut-in, and a specific example of this will be described below based on FIG. 84 to FIG. 86.

[Specific example of same-color chance eye production and cut-in when pattern pseudo stops]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86, specific examples of the same color chance effect and cut-in at the time of symbol pseudo stop will be described. In addition, here, when the production is controlled in the 4th normal mode, the case where the same color chance production and the cut-in at symbol pseudo stop are each executed multiple times during the variable display of the first special symbol will be described as an example. Explain. In addition, here, an example will be explained in which a production pattern without a character image is displayed in the fourth normal mode, but when the production is controlled in another normal production mode, a production pattern with a character image is displayed. A cut-in occurs when a pattern pseudo-stop occurs when a same-color chance effect is executed using three effect patterns configured with a character image, or when three effect patterns configured with a character image are pseudo-stopped. I do things.

Figure 84 (A) shows an example of a state in which two reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a performance pattern showing the number "546" is displayed in a stopped state while a losing pattern is displayed as the first special pattern to notify that the result of the judgment of the first special pattern corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is "miss".

In this case, since the presentation is controlled by the fourth normal mode, the name of the current presentation mode, "fourth normal mode," is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Also, the first reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is displayed as a musical note-shaped reserved icon, which is the normal display mode in the fourth normal mode, in which no icon change presentation has been performed. On the other hand, the second reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is displayed as a red reserved icon as a result of the icon change presentation being performed (see FIG. 84 (A)).

As described above, when a predetermined confirmation time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a first special symbol hit/miss judgment is executed for the first reserved icon (here, the reserved icon in the shape of a musical note) displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c. Then, if the result of this first special symbol hit/miss judgment is "miss" and a first special symbol variation pattern that does not result in a reach performance is selected, the following performance is executed based on the result of a prior judgment regarding the right to make a first special symbol hit/miss judgment corresponding to the second reserved icon.

That is, in response to the execution of the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the musical note-shaped pending icon illustrated in FIG. 84(A)), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. As the process is started, the first pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B)). Further, as the first hold icon shifts to the icon display area 9e, the second hold icon (here, a red hold icon: see FIG. 84(A)) is moved to the hold icon display area 9c. Shift to the position where the earliest hold icon was displayed.

FIG. 84(B) shows an example of the situation immediately after the downward scrolling of the three symbol rows starts corresponding to the musical note-shaped icon because the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode. (See Figure 65). In this way, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the scroll display of the three symbol rows started, the 6 symbols on the left, 6 symbols in the middle, and 4 symbols on the right, all of which are blue production symbols, will appear from above. A blue chance effect is performed in which these three effect symbols move simultaneously and pseudo-stop on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 84(C) and (D)).

In this way, when the three performance symbols that form the blue chance eye of the left 6 symbol, the middle 6 symbol, and the right 4 symbol pseudo-stop, a cut-in at the time of pseudo-stop of symbols (weak cut-in) occurs, in which a cut-in image for a weak cut-in is superimposed on these performance symbols while these performance symbols remain pseudo-stopped (see Figure 84 (E)).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of Example 4, as illustrated in FIG. 84(E), a horizontally long cut-in image for a weak cut-in (hereinafter also referred to as a "weak cut-in image") is superimposed on the three pseudo-stopped performance symbols. However, if this weak cut-in image is configured with a completely opaque performance image, most of the three pseudo-stopped performance symbols will be covered by the weak cut-in image, which may cause a problem that the player will not be able to easily recognize that the three performance symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner that indicates a chance eye. In particular, if most of the three performance symbols indicating a red chance eye are covered by the weak cut-in image, the performance effect of the same-color chance eye performance may be reduced, although it is intended to obtain a high performance effect by the synergistic effect of the same-color chance eye performance and the cut-in when the pattern is pseudo-stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment 4, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the central part where a predetermined character is displayed is made opaque, and the left and right parts that overlap with the left and right symbols are made semitransparent. The cut-in image is displayed in a superimposed manner on the three pseudo-stopped effect symbols (see FIG. 84(E)). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the three performance symbols that are pseudo-stopped in a manner that indicates a chance roll from being significantly reduced, and to cut-in at the time of a pseudo-stop at the same time as the chance roll display of the same color. By generating these, a high performance effect can be obtained due to the synergistic effect of these effects.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the weak cut-in image was superimposed on the three effect symbols, the weak cut-in image is erased from the first display screen 7a, and the three effect symbols are revealed (see Figures 84 (E) and (F)). Note that here, the three effect symbols indicating blue chance eyes are pseudo-stopped, and to notify again that the blue chance eyes are pseudo-stopped, a display is displayed that temporarily enlarges the three effect symbols (see Figure 84 (F)).

After the three blue chance symbols are enlarged in this way, the three symbols return to their original size and move downward, restarting the scrolling display (here, downward scrolling) of the three symbol rows (see Figs. 84(G) and (H)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows was restarted in this way, the left 1 symbol, middle 5 symbol, and right 5 symbol, all of which are green, move in from above at the same time, and the three symbols come to a virtual stop on the first display screen 7a, creating a green chance symbol effect (see Figs. 84(I) and 85(A)).

In addition, FIG. 85(A) shows an example of three pseudo-stops of the performance symbols showing green chance eyes, but as described above based on FIG. 84(D), there are also cases where three pseudo-stops of the performance symbols showing blue chance eyes are shown. There are also cases where three pseudo-stops of the performance symbols showing red chance eyes are shown.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 85(A), when the three production symbols forming the green chance pattern, the left 1 symbol, the middle 5 symbol, and the right 5 symbol, pseudo-stop, these production symbols remain pseudo-stopped, A cut-in (weak cut-in) occurs again at the time of pattern pseudo stop, in which a weak cut-in image is displayed superimposed on these performance symbols (see FIG. 85(B)). Since this weak cut-in image is the same effect image as described above based on FIG. You can easily see what you are doing.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the weak cut-in image was superimposed on the three performance symbols showing the green chance eye, the weak cut-in image is erased from the first display screen 7a, and the three performance symbols are revealed (see Figs. 85(B) and (C)). Then, for the same purpose as described above based on Fig. 84(F), a performance display is performed that temporarily enlarges the three performance symbols to notify again that the green chance eye has been pseudo-stopped (see Fig. 85(C)).

After the three green chance symbols are enlarged in this way, the three symbols return to their original size and move downward, restarting the scrolling of the three symbol rows (here, downward scrolling) (see Figs. 85(D) and (E)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the scrolling of the three symbol rows was restarted in this way, the left 3 symbol, middle 3 symbol, and right 7 symbol, all of which are red, move in from above at the same time, and a red chance symbol effect is performed in which these three symbols come to a virtual stop on the first display screen 7a (see Figs. 85(F)-(G)).

In addition, FIG. 85(G) shows an example of three effect symbols indicating a red chance eye pseudo-stopping, but as described above based on FIG. 85(D), three effect symbols indicating a green chance eye may also pseudo-stop. However, as shown in FIG. 85(D), since a green chance eye effect was executed during the previous chance eye effect, a blue chance eye effect will not be executed at the stage where the effect display in FIG. 85(G) is executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 85(G), when the three performance symbols that form the red chance eye, the left 3 symbol, the middle 3 symbol, and the right 7 symbol, pseudo-stop, a cut-in at the time of pseudo-stop of symbols (strong cut-in) may occur in which a cut-in image for a strong cut-in (hereinafter also referred to as a "strong cut-in image") is superimposed on these performance symbols while these performance symbols remain pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 85(H)). This strong cut-in image is a performance image that is larger than the weak cut-in image described above based on FIG. 84(E), but like the weak cut-in image, both the left and right sides are semi-transparent. Therefore, the player can easily see through this strong cut-in image that the three performance symbols that indicate the red chance eye have pseudo-stopped.

In this fourth embodiment, a case will be explained using as an example a case where a partially translucent strong cut-in image is displayed so as not to significantly reduce the visibility of three performance symbols forming a chance eye. In this embodiment, a strongly cut-in image whose entire portion is opaque may be displayed in a superimposed manner over the three performance symbols.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the strong cut-in image was superimposed on the three performance symbols that indicate a red chance eye, the strong cut-in image is erased from the first display screen 7a, and the three performance symbols are revealed (see Fig. 85 (H) and (I)). Then, for the same purpose as described above based on Fig. 84 (F), a performance display is performed that temporarily enlarges the three performance symbols to notify again that the three performance symbols that form the red chance eye have been pseudo-stopped (see Fig. 85 (I)).

When the enlarged display of the three performance symbols forming the red chance is completed, these performance symbols return to their original size and then pseudo-stop again (see FIG. 86(A)). Then, as the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification performance is executed in which the three performance symbols indicating the red chance of "337" are stopped as they are (FIG. 86(B) reference).

When a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol and a predetermined confirmation time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the three performance symbols indicating a loss of "337" have stopped, a judgment is made as to whether the first special symbol corresponding to the earliest reserved icon (here, the red reserved icon) displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is correct. In this way, when the judgment is made as to whether the first special symbol corresponding to the red reserved icon is correct, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, the red reserved icon shifts from the reserved icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and is displayed as that icon, and the scrolling display of the three rows of symbols begins (see Figures 86 (B) and (C)).

In this case, the icon is displayed in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three rows of symbols started, the left 7 symbol will stop pseudo-stop (see FIG. 86(D)), then the right 7 symbol will stop pseudo-stop and a reach will be established (see FIG. 86(E)). Eventually, this will develop into a reach performance with a high reliability (for example, an SPSP reach), and a win notification performance (or a miss notification performance) will be executed.

Figure 87 (A) illustrates the jackpot reliability of each of the blue chance eye effect (see Figure 84 (D)), green chance eye effect (see Figure 85 (A)), and red chance eye effect (see Figure 85 (G)) that occur when the effect pattern is pseudo-stopped. In this embodiment 4, as illustrated in Figure 87 (A), the jackpot reliability of the blue chance eye is set to about 1%, the jackpot reliability of the green chance eye is set to about 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the red chance eye is set to about 25%. In the specific example described above based on Figures 84 to 86, all of the blue chance eye effect, the green chance eye effect, and the red chance eye effect are executed, but since the final chance eye effect is the red chance eye effect, the jackpot reliability suggested by the chance eye effect (the possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed by the pre-reading target change) is about 25%.

Figure 87 (B) shows an example of the jackpot reliability of the weak cut-in and strong cut-in that occur when the performance symbol stops pseudo-stop. In this embodiment 4, the jackpot reliability of the weak cut-in is set to about 1%, and the jackpot reliability of the strong cut-in is set to about 4%.

Note that in Figures 84 to 86, an example is described in which the chance eye effect and the cut-in when the pseudo symbol stops are executed simultaneously, but there are also cases in which the chance eye effect is executed without the cut-in when the pseudo symbol stops, and cases in which the cut-in when the pseudo symbol stops is executed without the chance eye effect (cases in which a strong cut-in image or a weak cut-in image is superimposed on the three effect patterns that indicate a spread eye).

In addition, there are cases where the chance eye effect and the cut-in when the symbol pseudo-stop are executed at the same time, and of the three chance eye effects, the red chance eye effect has the highest jackpot reliability. Also, as for the cut-ins when the symbol pseudo-stop is performed, a strong cut-in has a higher jackpot reliability than a weak cut-in, so it can be said that the pattern in which a strong cut-in occurs when the three effect symbols that form the red chance eye are pseudo-stopped has the highest jackpot reliability.

In addition, in order to realize the chance effect as described above based on FIGS. 84 to 86, it is necessary to change the first special symbol that is selected when the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "lost". For each pattern, a plurality of variation patterns of production symbols for executing one or more chance productions within the same variation are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and based on the preliminary determination result, pre-read targets are stored. When it is decided to execute a chance effect in a symbol change that occurs before the symbol change, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes a plurality of variable effects corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol related to the symbol change. Any one of the variable performance patterns may be selected from among the patterns, and the performance symbols may be varied in accordance with the selected variable performance pattern.

In order to generate a weak or strong cut-in as a cut-in when a symbol is pseudo-stopped, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to generate a cut-in when a symbol pseudo-stopped is generated in a symbol change that occurs before the symbol change that is the target of the pre-reading, based on the results of the pre-determination. In order to determine whether a weak or strong cut-in is generated, if the result of the first special symbol determination that is specified based on the results of the pre-determination is a "jackpot", a lottery is performed in which a strong cut-in is more likely to be selected than a weak cut-in, and one of the cut-ins is selected by performing a lottery in which a weak cut-in is more likely to be selected than a strong cut-in, and if the result of the first special symbol determination that is specified based on the results of the pre-determination is a "miss", a lottery is performed in which a weak cut-in is more likely to be selected than a strong cut-in, and one of the cut-ins is selected by performing a lottery in which a weak cut-in is more likely to be selected than a strong cut-in, as an example of processing.

In this embodiment 4, an example is described in which the cut-in at the time of the pseudo stop of the pattern is executed when the game is controlled in a low-probability, low-base state. In other embodiments, however, the cut-in at the time of the pseudo stop of the pattern may be executed when the game is controlled in a high-probability, low-base state, when the game is controlled in a high-probability, high-base state, or when the game is controlled in a low-probability, high-base state.

In addition, in this fourth embodiment, an example is given in which the jackpot reliability of the cut-in at the time of a symbol pseudo-stop is determined depending on whether the cut-in at the time of the symbol pseudo-stop that is finally executed is a weak cut-in or a strong cut-in. However, in other embodiments, the reliability of jackpot increases as the number of occurrences of cut-in at the time of a symbol pseudo-stop within the same variation increases, or the structure in which the cut-in at the time of a symbol pseudo-stop occurs, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. A configuration may be adopted in which the reliability of the jackpot increases as the number of times increases.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, a case will be explained using as an example a case in which cut-in at the time of pattern pseudo stop can be executed in all the normal production modes from the first normal mode to the fifth normal mode, but in other embodiments, A configuration different from that of the fourth embodiment may be adopted. That is, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music arbitrarily selected by the player is played on the first display screen 7a. When the symbol pseudo-stop cut-in is executed, it is conceivable that the symbol pseudo-stop cut-in reduces the visibility of the effect display related to the selected music. Therefore, in other embodiments, in the first to third normal modes and the fifth normal mode, it is possible to perform both the chance effect and the cut-in at the time of pattern pseudo stop, while in the fourth normal mode, the chance A configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to execute the eye effect, but it is impossible to execute the cut-in when the symbol pseudo-stops.

[About button image movement effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, a button image movement effect that can be executed when the game is controlled in the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state will be described. Here, FIG. 88 is a screen diagram for explaining the button image movement effect, and FIG. 89 shows the jackpot reliability of the group preview (see FIG. 67(C)) and the button image movement effect (see FIG. 88). It is an explanatory diagram to illustrate.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment has a preview effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot when the game is controlled in a low-probability, low-base state. The configuration is such that it is possible to execute a group notice (see FIG. 67(C)). This group preview is as explained in Example 3, but it is an effect display that shows a large number of characters moving from right to left on the first display screen 7a, and is used in this embodiment. In Example 4, the jackpot reliability is set to about 50%.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a group preview occurs after the development effect (see FIG. 67(B)) is performed and before the SPSP reach starts, regardless of the operation by the player. In the fourth embodiment, the player is instructed to operate the first effect button 63a immediately after the reach is established, that is, immediately after the effect display illustrated in FIG. 66(I) is performed. A first performance button operation promotion performance is executed, and a group notice is generated on the condition that the player operates the first performance button 63a within the validity period related to the first performance button operation promotion performance. It has been adopted.

By adopting this type of configuration, the player can have the sensation that the swarm prediction is being generated by his/her own button operation, which can produce a more dramatic effect than if the swarm prediction were generated regardless of the player's operation.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the game is controlled in the low-accuracy-high base state or the high-accuracy-high base state, a button image movement effect (see Fig. 88) may be performed. This button image movement performance is a performance that represents nine first performance button images imitating the first performance button 63a moving leftward on the first display screen 7a during execution of a predetermined reach performance. (See FIGS. 88(A) to 88(C)).

Although not shown in FIG. 88, when each first effect button image related to the button image movement effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a, an effective period in which operation of the first effect button 63a is valid is entered, and each time the player operates the first effect button 63a, the first effect button images change one by one into a specified display object (see FIG. 88 (D), (E), (F), (G)).

In this way, while the button image movement effect is being executed, the operation on the first effect button 63a is valid, so the player must press the first effect button 63a immediately before the button image movement effect is started. It can be said that it is not desirable to have them manipulated. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, for group previews that do not require the player to operate the first performance button 63a during execution of the performance, the group preview is determined according to the player's button operation for the first performance button operation promotion performance. On the other hand, regarding the button image movement performance which requires the player to operate the first performance button 63a during execution of the performance, the performance is generated regardless of the operation by the player.

However, when the game is controlled in a low probability low base state, for example, if the first effect button 63a is operated in response to a first effect button operation prompt immediately after a reach is established, and only the group preview is executed as the operation-responsive effect, the player can easily recognize that the group preview will occur if he or she operates the first effect button 63a at the time the first effect button operation prompt effect occurs, and there is a possibility that a high presentation effect will not be obtained even if the group preview is generated.

Therefore, in this embodiment 4, in order to prevent the above problems from occurring, a configuration is also adopted in which, when the player operates the first effect button 63a in response to a first effect button operation prompting effect immediately after a reach is established in a low probability low base state, one of a suggestion effect suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect, the above-mentioned super hot pattern cut-in, and one of several types of preview effects including a group preview occurs, and none of the preview effects occurs if the first effect button 63a is not operated.

Incidentally, during the execution of the button image moving effect, which is also the effective period during which operation of the first effect button 63a is valid, each time the first effect button 63a is operated, each first effect button image changes to a specified display object. However, if the player does not operate the first effect button 63a even once during the execution of the button image moving effect, the first effect button image will not change to a specified display object, and an effect display will be displayed that shows the nine first effect button images moving as they are across the first display screen 7a (see Figures 88 (A) to (C)).

On the other hand, when the player operates the first performance button 63a during execution of the button image movement performance, the normal character group appears (see FIG. 88(D)), and the BONUS panel appears (FIG. 88(E)). ), a HYPER BONUS panel appears (see FIG. 88(F)), and a premier character appears (see FIG. 88(G)).

Here, the normal character group (see FIG. 88(D)) is such that each time the first effect button 63a is operated during the button image movement effect, all of the first effect button images change to character images showing a specified character, and ultimately the nine first effect button images change to nine character images. Also, the appearance of the BONUS panel (see FIG. 88(E)) is such that, until the first effect button 63a is operated six times during the button image movement effect, only character images common to the normal character group appear, but when the sixth operation is performed, the first effect button image in the center changes to a BONUS panel containing the word "BONUS," definitely announcing a jackpot (4R jackpot or 16R jackpot).

In addition, when the HYPER BONUS panel appears (see FIG. 88(F)), only character images common to the normal character group appear until the number of operations of the first effect button 63a reaches 6 during execution of the button image movement effect. However, when the 6th operation is performed, the first production button image in the center changes to a HYPER BONUS panel containing the words "HYPER BONUS", definitively informing you of the 16R jackpot. It is. In addition, when a premium character appears (see FIG. 88(G)), only character images common to the normal character group appear until the number of operations of the first effect button 63a reaches 9 during execution of the button image movement effect. On the other hand, when the ninth operation is performed, the first effect button image on the right side changes to a so-called premier character, thereby definitively notifying the 16R jackpot.

As is clear from the explanation of the operations corresponding to these button image movement effects, the jackpot reliability when the normal character group appears in response to multiple operations of the first effect button 63a is about 60%, and multiple If the BONUS panel appears in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for a number of times, there is a strong chance of winning the jackpot at that point, and the HYPER BONUS panel (or premier character) appears in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a multiple times. If it appears, you are highly likely to win the jackpot at that point (see FIG. 89(B)).

The production control microcomputer 91 executes a button image movement production based on the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment executed by the game control microcomputer 81 in the high-accuracy high-base state (or low-accuracy high-base state). Determine whether or not. Here, if it is decided to execute the button image movement effect when the judgment result of the special symbol correctness judgment is "lost", the normal character group is moved according to the operation of the first effect button 63a during the button image movement effect. generate.

In addition, if the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is "jackpot" and the type of jackpot is "4R jackpot", the HYPER BONUS panel or premier character cannot appear, so the button image movement effect A normal character group or a BONUS panel appears in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a.

In addition, if the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is "Jackpot" and the type of jackpot is "15R Jackpot", regardless of whether it is a normal character group, BONUS panel, HYPER BONUS panel, or premier character. Since it is possible to make them appear, the performance control microcomputer 91 selects one by drawing a lottery using random numbers, for example, and in response to the operation of the first performance button 63a during the button image movement performance, Generate the selected effect.

In this embodiment 4, as is clear from the notations in Figs. 88(D), (E), (F), and (G), unless the number of times the first effect button 63a is operated during the button image movement performance reaches six, it is not possible to determine whether the display object displayed by the change in the central first effect button image is a character image representing a character constituting the normal character group or a BONUS panel (or a HYPER BONUS panel). Furthermore, since a premium character does not appear unless the number of times the first effect button 63a is operated during the button image movement performance reaches nine, in a situation where there is a possibility that a normal character group or a premium character will appear, it is not possible to determine whether a normal character group or a premium character will appear unless the number of times the first effect button 63a is operated during the button image movement performance reaches nine.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment 4, these configurations are adopted for the button image movement effect, so it is possible to effectively encourage the player to operate the first effect button 63a multiple times while the button image movement effect is being executed.

When the button image moving effect is being executed, a large number of first effect button images are displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the first effect button image changes to a specified display object each time the first effect button 63a is operated. Therefore, while the button image moving effect is being executed, the player can easily recognize that the operation of the first effect button 63a is valid during the valid period. For this reason, for example, while the first effect button operation promotion effect as illustrated in FIG. 67(E) is being executed, a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, whereas while the button image moving effect is being executed, a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period is not displayed.

In the fourth embodiment, the first effect button image changes one by one each time the first effect button 63a is operated during execution of the button image movement effect. , another configuration may be adopted in which all nine first effect button images are changed into other display objects, respectively, in response to one operation of the first effect button 63a.

[Other aspects]
In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment 1, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state, the high probability high base state continues until the next jackpot occurs. Instead of or in addition to such a jackpot type, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state, if a jackpot does not occur until the variable display of the special pattern is completed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high probability high base state, a jackpot type may be provided in which the game state changes to a high probability low base state. By providing such a jackpot type, when the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a high base state, and the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, the game state after that may shift to a low probability low base state, may continue to be in the high probability high base state, or may shift to a high probability low base state, depending on the jackpot type.

This makes it possible to diversify the change modes (transition modes) of the game state, improve gameplay, and increase interest in the game. In addition, by executing a common game presentation in the high base state from the end of a jackpot game until the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game will transition to after the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. This increases the player's interest in the game in the high base state and increases the expectation of an advantageous state. Also, as a result, even if the game state after the end of a jackpot game is not a high-probability low base state but a high base state, it becomes possible to play in the hope that it will change to a high-probability low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. Also, this makes it possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment 1, the first special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a and second special pattern display 41b) and the second special pattern display (c1 and c2 of the change state display 49) are both displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of this mode, the first special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a, second special pattern display 41b) may be displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special pattern display (c1 and c2 of the change state display 49) may be displayed and controlled by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. This makes it possible to notify correct game information even if a malfunction occurs in the display control of one control unit, as long as the display control of the other control unit is appropriate. In addition, the first special pattern display and the second special pattern display are both provided in the same display unit (main display 40). This allows the first special symbol display device controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display device controlled by the sub-control unit to be located close to each other, making it possible to check the consistency of the display content between the two and easily check for any defects in the display control.

Similarly, in this embodiment 1, the first ordinary pattern display (ordinary pattern display 42) and the second ordinary pattern display (c3 of the variable state display 49) are both display-controlled by the main control unit. Alternatively, the first ordinary pattern display (ordinary pattern display 42) may be display-controlled by the main control unit, and the second ordinary pattern display (c3 of the variable state display 49) may be display-controlled by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. This provides the same effect as the special pattern display described above.

In addition to the second special pattern display and the second normal pattern display, a second first special pattern reserve display, a second second special pattern reserve display, and a second normal pattern reserve display (not shown) may be provided. In this case, the first special pattern reserve display (first special pattern reserve display 43a, second special pattern reserve display 43b) and the second normal pattern reserve display (normal pattern reserve display 42) may be displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special pattern reserve display (first special pattern reserve display, second special pattern reserve display) and the second normal pattern reserve display may be controlled by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. In addition, the first special chart reserved display (first special chart reserved display 43a, second special chart reserved display 43b), the first general chart reserved display (general chart reserved display 42), the second special chart reserved display (second first special chart reserved display, second second special chart reserved display), and the second general chart reserved display can be provided on the same main display 40. This improves the visibility of both, makes it easy to check the consistency of the displayed contents, and makes it easy to check whether there are any problems with the display control.

In addition, the first special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a and second special pattern display 41b), the first normal pattern display (normal pattern display 42), the first special pattern reserve display (first special pattern reserve display 43a, second special pattern reserve display 43b), the first normal pattern reserve display (normal pattern reserve display 42), the second special pattern display (c1 and c2 of the change state display 49), the second normal pattern display (c3 of the change state display 49), the second special pattern reserve display (second first special pattern reserve display, second second special pattern reserve display), and the second normal pattern reserve display may all be provided on the same main display 40. This improves the visibility of these display units, making it possible to easily check whether there are any problems with the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub-control unit. In addition, the main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the game area 3. It can also be installed on the game board 2 outside (outside) the play area 3.

In addition, if the power is interrupted (power interruption processing) for any reason during play or while the gaming machine is in operation (power ON), when power is supplied again, the first special pattern display (first special pattern display 41a and second special pattern display 41b), the first ordinary pattern display (ordinary pattern display 42), the first special pattern reserve display (first special pattern reserve display 43a, second special pattern reserve display 43b), and the first ordinary pattern reserve display (first ordinary pattern display 43b) will be displayed in a controlled manner by the main control unit. The display (regular pattern reserve display 42) executes (resumes, returns to) the display (display control) first, and then the second special pattern display (c1 and c2 of change status display 49), the second ordinary pattern display (c3 of change status display 49), the second special pattern reserve display (second first special pattern reserve display, second second special pattern reserve display), and the second regular pattern reserve display, which are display-controlled by the sub-control unit, execute (resume, return to) the display (display control) later.

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuating state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuating state display 49), and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub-control unit The figure holding display (the second first special figure holding display, the second second special figure holding display) and the second regular figure holding display are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. (The first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and/or the third image display device 72) executes (resumes, returns) the display (display control) first. This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on/off/blinks a single LED, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and This is because the three-image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display section and has more complicated display control than the main display.

As a result, even if the display section shows special symbol validity judgment results and fluctuation states that are controlled by the same sub-control section, the first sub-display section can quickly return to display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored). and a second sub-display section that returns to displaying the display after a delay. Then, it becomes possible to execute optimal game control depending on each role. The first sub-display section includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (fluctuation state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. c3), the second special figure holding display (second first special figure holding display, second second special figure holding display), and second general figure holding display correspond to the simple With display control, it is possible to easily understand the fluctuating state, etc., and it is also possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display section corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control section. However, with complex display control, it is possible to display various game information and game performances (reach performance, preview performance, story performance, etc.), and to improve interest through a variety of game performances.

In yet another aspect, if the power is interrupted (power interruption processing) for some reason during play or while the gaming machine is in operation (power ON), when power is supplied again, the second special pattern display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation status display 49), the second ordinary pattern display (c3 of the fluctuation status display 49), the second special pattern reserve display (second first special pattern reserve display, second second special pattern reserve display), and the second ordinary pattern reserve display, which are display-controlled by the sub-control unit, execute (resume, return to) display (display control) first, and the first special pattern display, which is display-controlled by the main control unit, executes (resumes, returns to) display (display control) first, and the second ... (c3 of the fluctuation status display 49), the second special pattern reserve display (c3 of the fluctuation status display 49), the second special pattern reserve display (c3 of the fluctuation status display 49), the second special pattern reserve display (c3 of the second special pattern reserve display The display device (first special pattern display device 41a and second special pattern display device 41b), first ordinary pattern display device (ordinary pattern display device 42), first special pattern reserve display device (first special pattern reserve display device 43a, second special pattern reserve display device 43b), and first ordinary pattern reserve display device (ordinary pattern reserve display device 42) may then execute (resume, return) the display (display control), and the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and/or third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit may then further execute (resume, return) the display (display control).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect pattern display section are displayed in synchronization with the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern described below) set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state. That is, one effect pattern (three digits) is displayed on the effect pattern display section, and by synchronizing with either the first special pattern or the second special pattern according to the game state, there are cases where it is synchronized with the first special pattern and cases where it is synchronized with the second special pattern. In a variation of this embodiment, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern may be displayed, the display of the first effect pattern is synchronized with the display of the first special pattern, and the display of the second effect pattern is synchronized with the display of the second special pattern. In addition, when both the first and second performance symbols are displayed, the performance symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the main symbol in the game state may be displayed large (displayed as the main symbol), and the performance symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) not set as the main symbol in the game state may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is set to 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first and second performance symbols at all times, there may be cases where both the first and second performance symbols are displayed, or where one of the first and second performance symbols (the main symbol) is displayed, depending on the game state or game situation.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" which can be changed between a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter; The game apparatus may include a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entry hole is set in a state where a ball can be entered if the result of the first or second judgment is a win. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first mode. In addition, there is a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency (first gaming state), and a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than that in the game state. (second gaming state). Here, the "predetermined frequency" includes 0.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is one time, but the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is The round may be played multiple times, or may have rounds with different numbers of openings. In addition, in this embodiment, the control process allows the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation to be changed simultaneously, but the control process allows the second special figure reservation to be given priority over the first special figure reservation. It may be a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure reservation is given priority to the second special figure reservation, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, priority is not set for extinguishing the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and the first and second special figure reservations are consumed in order from the oldest memorized one. The control process may be a so-called control process for digesting pitches in order of entry (in order of memory).

It also applies to a pachinko machine of a type that does not have a probability setting means (does not have a high probability state), has a specific area inside, and has a large prize opening that can be changed between a ball-entering state where a game ball can enter and a ball-entering state where a game ball cannot enter, and the large prize opening is in a ball-entering state for a predetermined time when the result of a hit/miss judgment based on a ball entering the starting opening is a small hit, and when a game ball enters the large prize opening in this ball-entering state and passes through the specific area, a big hit is won and a big hit game is executed, and a predetermined bonus is awarded. This type of pachinko machine is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and when the result of a hit/miss judgment based on a ball entering the starting opening is a big hit, the big hit game is executed without the need to pass through the specific area. Also, as a bonus, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting opening. It can also have a first start hole and a second start hole, and generate a high base state that increases the frequency of balls landing in the second start hole. The present invention can be applied to all of these types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good too. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities are provided, and any one of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on. Good too.

In the above embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special drawing reservation memory unit is read out and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is judged (pre-judgment) for the pre-judgment based on the start ball entry ("Processing at the time of the start ball entry (S205)"; see Figs. 11 and 13, etc.), but the method of pre-judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special drawing reservation memory unit, an area (acquired information storage means) for storing the acquired information to be the subject of the pre-judgment (i.e., the acquired information acquired based on the start ball entry) may be provided in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, and the acquired information stored in the storage area (storage unit for pre-judgment) may be judged (pre-judgment). In this case, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the pre-judgment (acquired information stored in another storage area) by storing the result of the pre-judgment in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Alternatively, instead of pre-judging the acquired information stored in the special drawing reservation memory unit, a pre-judgment may be made for the acquired information acquired based on the start ball entry. In other words, a pre-judgment may be made before the acquired information is stored in the special drawing reservation memory unit. In this case, there is no need to provide an area for storing the acquired information that is the subject of the pre-determination, separate from the special drawing reservation memory unit, nor is there any need to read out the acquired information stored in the special drawing reservation memory unit for the pre-determination.

In the above embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and two image display devices 71, 72 (frame side display means) are provided as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) on the game machine frame side (outside the game area), but the sub-liquid crystal (sub-display device) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment, two sub-liquid crystals can be provided on the left and right of the main liquid crystal (first image display device 7) as board side display means, or one sub-liquid crystal can be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub-liquid crystal or right sub-liquid crystal). Alternatively, it is possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment. This also makes it possible to display various impressive effects using multiple image display devices.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a display device (the first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the gaming area) and a display device (second image display device 7) provided on the gaming machine frame side (outside the gaming area) Although the display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices consisting of liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), the type of display device is not limited to liquid crystals, and for example, a drum display device or a drum display device. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed among the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display device or a 7-segment display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. This makes it possible to display a variety of effects using a plurality of display devices with different display methods, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a first starting hole, a second starting hole, a first big winning hole, and a second big winning hole, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole, the first symbol is displayed variably, and There was one that displayed a second symbol in a variable manner when a game ball entered the second starting hole. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either only the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening is opened, or the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are opened. There was a gaming machine that executed a jackpot game in which the winning openings were opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the second starting hole is a variable starting hole, and the frequency of balls entering is reduced in a low base state and increased in a high base state, so that in the low base state, the player aims for the first starting hole, and in the high base state, the player aims for the second starting hole. In addition, there are gaming machines that play so-called right-hand play, in which the player aims for the right side of the play area when a jackpot is hit or the high base state is reached. In such gaming machines, in the low base state, the player plays left-hand play, and once an advantageous state is reached, the player plays right-hand play until the advantageous state ends, adding variety to the advantageous state play. However, in conventional gaming machines, the transition between game states is uniform, and they have not yet been able to provide highly intriguing playability.

This Reference Invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, it provides highly interesting gaming states, diversifies the transition modes of gaming states, and increases gaming interest. The company provides gaming machines.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is as follows:
A first starting hole through which a game ball can be inserted;
A second starting hole that can be changed between a first state and a second state in which the probability of the game ball entering the hole is higher than that of the first state;
A third starting hole into which the game ball can be inserted;
A first hit/miss judgment execution means for executing a first hit/miss judgment based on a ball entering the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A second hit/miss judgment execution means for executing a second hit/miss judgment based on the ball entering the third starting hole;
a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second starting hole is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second starting hole is higher than that of the first game state;
a special game execution means for executing a special game when the result of the first win/loss determination or the second win/loss determination is a jackpot (first specific result),
The second starting hole and the third starting hole are provided in a second game area,
The game system is characterized in having a first game (low probability, low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the first game area in the first game state and the first win/loss judgment is primarily made, a second game (low probability, high base state) in which a game ball is launched into the second game area in the second game state and the first win/loss judgment is primarily made, and a third game (high probability, low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the second game area in the first game state and the second win/loss judgment is primarily made.

According to such a gaming machine, a first start port for performing a first hit/miss judgment is arranged in a first gaming area, and a variable second start port for performing a first hit/miss judgment (changing between a first state and a second state) and a third start port for performing a second hit/miss judgment are arranged in a second gaming area. In addition, the gaming machine has a first gaming state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port is low (at a predetermined frequency), and a second gaming state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port is higher than that of the first gaming state. In the first gaming state, the gaming machine has a first game in which a ball is aimed at the first start port in the first gaming area and fired to perform a first hit/miss judgment as the main game, a first game in which a ball is aimed at the second start port in the second gaming area and fired to perform a first hit/miss judgment as the main game, and a first game in which a ball is aimed at the third start port in the second gaming area and fired to perform a second hit/miss judgment as the main game in the first gaming state.

This allows the player to play a first game, a second game, and a third game, which have different game modes, by changing the game state, and increases the interest in the game through the transition between various game states and the new gameplay. Furthermore, in the first game state, the frequency of balls being shot into the first game area and landing in the first starting hole may be higher than the frequency of balls being shot into the second game area and landing in the second starting hole.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
As a result of the first hit/miss determination in the first game of launching a game ball into the first game area, a first jackpot and a second jackpot are obtained;
As a result of the first hit/miss determination in the second game of launching a game ball into the second game area, a first jackpot and a second jackpot are obtained;
As a result of the second hit/miss determination in the third game of shooting a game ball into the second game area, a third jackpot and a fourth jackpot are obtained;
In the first game, when the result of the first win/loss determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first win/loss determination is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed;
In the second game, when the result of the first win/loss determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first win/loss determination is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed;
In the third game, when the result of the second win/loss determination is the third jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second win/loss determination is the fourth jackpot, the third game can be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first hit/miss determination in the first game in which a gaming ball is launched into the first gaming area and the result of the first hit/miss determination in the second game in which a gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area are a first jackpot and a second jackpot, and the result of the second hit/miss determination in the third game in which a gaming ball is launched into the second gaming area are a third jackpot and a fourth jackpot. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, if the result of the first hit/miss determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and if the result is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. Also, in the case of the second game, if the result of the first hit/miss determination in the second game is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and if the result is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. Furthermore, when the third game begins, if the result of the second hit/miss determination in the third game is a third jackpot, the second game can be executed, and if the result is a fourth jackpot, the third game can be executed.

As a result, regardless of whether the first or second jackpot is reached in the first game after the start of play, the subsequent game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area. Also, whether the second game or the third game is played while playing the game of firing into the second game area, it is possible to play while shifting the game mode (game state) between the game in which the first win/loss judgment is made (second game) and the game in which the second win/loss judgment is made (third game). This also makes it possible to increase interest in the game through a variety of game state transition modes and new gameplay.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the first win/loss judgment being executed a specific number of times, and a transition is made to the first game.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first validity judgment is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the second game is shifted to the first game by executing the validity determination a specific number of times. In addition, in a game in which the same first validity determination is executed, the firing game to the second game area is shifted to the firing game to the first game area. Furthermore, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game through various transition modes of game states and novel gameplay.

Incidentally, the third game may be continued even if the second judgment of validity has been executed a specific number of times. Further, the third game may be continued until the result of the second win/fail determination becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
A small win (second specific result) is obtained as a result of the second validity determination, and when the small win occurs, a predetermined amount of gaming profit can be obtained,
The second validity determination has a higher possibility of the small hit than the first validity determination,
In the second game, the first validity determination is executed more frequently than in the first game, so that the rate of decrease of game media used in the game is slower than in the first game,
The third game is characterized in that the speed at which the game media decreases is slower than that in the second game because it is possible to obtain gaming profits through the small winnings.

According to such a gaming machine, there is a small win that allows a predetermined amount of gaming profit to be obtained as a result of the second judgment, and the second judgment has a higher probability of winning a small prize than the first judgment. It is considered a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of winning small than the first game and the second game. Furthermore, the second game in the second gaming state has a higher execution frequency of the first validity determination than the first game in the first gaming state. In the second game, the rate of decrease in game media used in the game is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease in game media used in the game is slower than in the second game. As a result, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. Furthermore, this makes it possible to diversify the transition modes between various gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and to increase the interest in the game through new gameplay. Note that the second validity determination may have a small hit, but the first validity determination may not have a small hit.

Furthermore, a fourth game (high-accuracy, high-base state) may be provided in which a game ball is fired into the second game area in the second game state and the first judgment is mainly performed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in the fourth game, the first win/fail judgment is executed more frequently than in the first game, so that the speed of decrease of the game media is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the game medium is reduced by a small hit. By making it possible to earn profits, the rate of decrease in game media may be slower than in the second game and the fourth game. Furthermore, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the speed of decrease of the game media may be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first game, when the result of the first judgment is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first judgment is the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first validity determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game can be executed. Enables execution of the fourth game,
In the second game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first validity determination becomes the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first correctness determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game becomes executable. make the game executable,
In the third game, when the result of the second validity determination becomes the third jackpot (corresponding to the 2R seventh jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second validity determination becomes the fourth jackpot (corresponding to the 2R seventh jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the second judgment is a sixth jackpot (corresponding to the 2R sixth jackpot of Example 1), the third game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first validity determination becomes the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first correctness determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game becomes executable. It is also possible to make the game executable.

The "rate at which game media used in a game is reduced" is calculated as the number of game media (game balls) reduced, calculated by subtracting the number of game media (game balls paid out) awarded during the same period from the game media (game balls fired) used in a unit time (e.g., 1 minute) or unit number of shots (e.g., 100 shots). When the first, second, third, and fourth games are played for a specified period, the rate at which the game media (game balls, balls in hand) held by the player are reduced is, in order of decreasing speed, first game > second game (fourth game) > third game. In addition, the third game has a negative rate of reduction, since it is possible to increase the number of balls in hand by small wins the longer the game is played. In other words, the first, second, and fourth games are played while reducing the number of balls in hand, but the third game is played while increasing the number of balls in hand.

In addition, the type of jackpot (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit/miss judgment is a jackpot may be more diverse than the type of jackpot (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit/miss judgment is a jackpot. In addition, the third game (high probability low base state) that occurs as a result of the second hit/miss judgment may include a case where the third game is reached via a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls, and a case where the third game is reached via a jackpot game in which it is easy to obtain prize balls. In addition, the third game (high probability low base state) that occurs as a result of the first hit/miss judgment may not include a case where the third game is reached via a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls, but may only include a case where the third game is reached via a jackpot game in which it is easy to obtain prize balls.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second judgment is set to be higher than the probability of a jackpot in the high probability, so that the probability of occurrence of a small win in the second judgment is increased. More preferably, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second validity determination is 1/2 or more. Furthermore, the probability of entry into a high probability state (probability of operation of the probability variation function) is the same between the first validity determination and the second validity determination. On the other hand, the probability of entering state C (high certainty low base state) may be different between the first validity judgment and the second validity judgment, and the probability of entering state C (high certainty low base state) of the second validity judgment may be different. The entry probability may be higher than that of the first validity determination. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game of launching into the second game area where the third game in which the second validity determination is performed can be executed, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the second hit/miss judgment results in a jackpot that does not enter state C (high probability low base state), that jackpot is the jackpot (jackpot game) with the fewest number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (jackpot games) in the second hit/miss judgment. Also, that jackpot is the jackpot (jackpot game) with the fewest number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (jackpot games) in the first hit/miss judgment and the second hit/miss judgment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1 makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the transition patterns of the gaming state and enhances the interest of the player.

(Reference Invention 2)
In conventional gaming machines, a winning/losing judgment is made based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole, and a pattern is displayed variably based on the result of the winning/losing judgment. In such gaming machines, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a jackpot, the pattern is displayed as a winning pattern, and when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a miss, the pattern is displayed as a miss pattern. There was also a gaming machine that had multiple patterns, including special patterns and performance patterns (JP Patent Publication 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbols and performance symbols of conventional gaming machines are both displayed in a variable manner and in a static manner based on the result of the determination of validity. In addition, the special symbols are displayed in a stopped state without performing a game effect such as a reach variation after being displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of a win/fail judgment, and the performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state after a variable display is performed and then a game effect such as a reach variation is performed. This indicates the result of the judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it was possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to check the consistency of both symbols due to the display mode and display position of the plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by making it easy to confirm a plurality of symbols by displaying the plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Appropriateness determination execution means that executes validity determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
a first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variably displays first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display section (effect pattern display section 7b) that variably displays second identification information (effect pattern) based on the result of the validity determination;
a third identification information display section (fluctuation state display 49) that variably displays third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the validity determination;
a game performance display section (performance symbol display section 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game performance (reach performance, etc.) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A gaming machine comprising a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the validity determination is a specific result,
a first display section (main display 40) having the first identification information display section and the third identification information display section;
The present invention is characterized by comprising a second display section (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display section and the game effect display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display section variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol), and the first identification information display section variably displays the second identification information (production symbol). A second identification information display section that displays the third identification information (status symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and a game performance that is executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information can be displayed. It has a game effect display section. Further, a first display section configured to include a first identification information display section and the third identification information display section, and a second display section configured to include a second identification information display section and a game effect display section. It has a section and a.

As a result, by checking the second display section, it is possible to check the second identification information indicating the result of the judgment of validity and the game effect, and by checking the first display section, it is possible to check the result of the judgment of judgment based on the result of the judgment. The first identification information and the third identification information that are variably displayed can be confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down, and in which a game is played by causing the gaming balls to flow down the gaming area,
The first display unit is provided inside the play area, and the second display unit is provided outside the play area.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit, which is composed of the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, is arranged outside (outside) the gaming area, and the second display unit, which is composed of the second identification information display unit and the gaming performance display unit, is arranged inside (inside) the gaming area. As a result, by providing the second display unit, which displays the second identification information indicating the gaming performance such as reach performance and the result of the win/lose judgment, within the gaming area, it is possible to check the display mode of the second display unit while checking the flow of the gaming balls. In addition, by separating the first display unit, which allows the first identification information and the third identification information to be checked, from the second display unit and arranged outside the gaming area, it is possible to reliably grasp the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information without being distracted by the gaming performance, etc.

The first display unit may be arranged outside the play area (the area outside the rail member that divides the play area), and the second display unit may be arranged inside the play area (the area inside the rail member that divides the play area).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2,
The first display section is composed of an LED, the second display section is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display section is characterized in that it is larger than the first display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display section is configured with an LED, the second display section is configured with a liquid crystal, and the second display section is larger than the first display section. As a result, it is possible to keep the display mode of the first display section simple so that the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped reliably, and the second display section is made larger than the first display section. By configuring the display with a liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and diverse game performances and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
a main control unit having the validity determination execution means;
a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control;
The display of the first identification information display section constituting the first display section is controlled by a main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section and the second display section constituting the first display section is controlled by a sub-control section. It is characterized by display control.

Such a gaming machine includes a main control section and a sub-control section that receives control signals from the main control section and performs control. The display of the first identification information display section of the first display section is controlled by the main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section is controlled by the sub control section. Further, the display of the second display unit that displays the game effects and the second identification information is controlled by the sub-control unit. That is, the first display section displays first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control section and third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. Thereby, by checking the first display section, it is possible to check the display mode of the identification information (first identification information and third identification information) controlled by the main control section and the sub-control section. Moreover, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub-control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes display control of special symbols, control related to correctness judgment, control related to sensor detection, control related to ejection of prize balls, and control related to opening and closing of the variable ball entrance, and is a control unit that controls games. It is. In addition, the sub-control unit is a control unit that receives control signals from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and is the main control unit that performs control related to game effects such as operation control of movable members and display control of the effect display unit. This is a control section subordinate to the control section.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4,
a game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
A power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power;
a memory holding means for holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game information recovery means for recovering game information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power,
When the game information recovery means recovers the game information, the third identification information display unit is recovered earlier than the second display unit, making it possible to execute display control.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming information recovery means is provided for restoring the gaming information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, based on the gaming information stored and held by the memory holding means when power supply is started. . When restoring the game information, the third identification information display section included in the first display section recovers faster than the second display section, making it possible to execute display control. The second display section is made up of a liquid crystal display in order to diversify game presentations, and because it performs a variety of display controls, it takes a certain amount of time to restore game information. On the other hand, since the first display section (third identification information display section), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to restore the game information.

As a result, even though the display units are controlled by the same sub-controller, the third identification information display unit is restored before the second display unit, making it possible to execute display control earlier. This also allows play to begin immediately after power supply starts and the main control unit returns to normal, but there are cases in which the second display unit, which is made of liquid crystal, takes time to restore (and may not have been restored even after play has begun). Even in such a situation, by checking the third identification information display unit, which was quickly adopted and is now able to begin display control, it is possible to check the display content controlled by the sub-controller.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2, the display mode of the plurality of symbols makes it easy to confirm the plurality of symbols, and it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

(Reference invention 3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A first setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a first input to the input means, and a second setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a second input to the input means,
Execute a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the effect settings to the initial settings,
If an input to the input means for making a selection to return the effect setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion effect, the first setting is set to the initial setting while the second setting is returned to the initial setting. It is characterized by the fact that it does not return to

According to this configuration, when an input for making a selection to return the performance settings to the initial settings is made during the selection promotion performance, the second setting returns to the initial setting, while the first setting returns to the initial setting. will not be returned. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for players who wish to return the second setting to the initial setting without returning the first setting to the initial setting.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
The performance control means includes:
During the selection prompting presentation, even if the first input is made to the input means, the first setting related to the presentation is not changed.

According to this configuration, the first setting is not changed even if the first input is performed during the selection promotion performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the first setting is changed in accordance with the first input during the selection promotion performance, and as a result, the selection promotion performance is hindered. be.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2,
The performance control means includes:
When an input to the input means for selecting to return the presentation setting to the initial setting is made during the selection prompting presentation, the selection prompting presentation being executed is terminated, and after the selection prompting presentation has ended, the first setting relating to the presentation can be changed in accordance with the first input to the input means.

However, if the change of the first setting in response to the first input to the input means is restricted even after the selection prompting effect has ended, the period during which the change of the first setting is restricted may become longer than necessary, which may actually reduce convenience. In contrast, with the above configuration, when an input for selecting to return the effect setting to the initial setting is made during the selection prompting effect, the selection prompting effect ends, and after the selection prompting effect ends, the first setting is changed in response to the first input to the input means, making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3,
The performance control means is
If a first period of time has elapsed without the non-performance progress state ending after transitioning to a non-performance progress state in which the performance based on the determination result of the determination means does not proceed, the selection promotion performance is started;
If a second time period that is longer than the first time period passes without the non-gaming state ending after transitioning to the non-performance progress state, the first setting regarding the performance is returned to the initial setting. It is something.

According to this configuration, when the second time has elapsed since the transition to the non-presentation progress state without the non-presentation progress state ending, the first setting is returned to the initial setting. Therefore, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, it is possible, for example, to return the first setting to the initial setting before a player stops playing and another player starts playing. In addition, since the selection prompt performance is started when the first time has elapsed since the transition to the non-presentation progress state without the non-presentation progress state ending, for example, when a player stops playing and another player starts playing, it is possible to notify the latter player that the second setting related to the performance has been changed from the initial setting, and the latter player can freely choose whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting.

(Reference Invention 4)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is as follows:
an input means for allowing input by a player;
A determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling a performance based on a determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means includes:
A first setting related to the performance can be changed in response to a first input to the input means, and a second setting related to the performance can be changed in response to a second input to the input means;
When the second setting has been changed from the initial setting, a selection prompting effect is executed to prompt the player to select whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting;
When the first input is made to the input means while the selection prompting performance is not being executed, the change of the first setting in response to the first input is permitted, whereas the change of the first setting is restricted while the selection prompting performance is being executed.

According to this configuration, when the selection promotion performance is not performed, the first setting is changed according to the first input, while during the selection promotion performance, even if the first input is performed. The first setting is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the first setting is changed in accordance with the first input during the selection promotion performance, and as a result, the selection promotion performance is hindered. be.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The performance control means includes:
After an input to the input means for selecting to return the second setting to the initial setting is made during execution of the selection prompting presentation, a change to the first setting in accordance with the first input to the input means is permitted.

According to this configuration, after an input for selecting to return the second setting to the initial setting is made during the selection prompting presentation, changing the first setting in response to the first input is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the change of the first setting in response to the first input from interfering with the selection prompting presentation, while also preventing problems such as reduced convenience caused by the period during which the change of the first setting is restricted being longer than necessary.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2,
The performance control means is
If a first period of time has elapsed without the non-performance progress state ending after transitioning to a non-performance progress state in which the performance based on the determination result of the determination means does not proceed, the selection promotion performance is started;
The first setting is returned to the initial setting when a second time period that is longer than the first time elapses without the non-performance progress state ending after transitioning to the non-performance progress state. It is.

According to this configuration, when the second time has elapsed since the transition to the non-presentation progress state without the non-presentation progress state ending, the first setting is returned to the initial setting. Therefore, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, it is possible, for example, to return the first setting to the initial setting before a player stops playing and another player starts playing. In addition, since the selection prompt performance is started when the first time has elapsed since the transition to the non-presentation progress state without the non-presentation progress state ending, for example, when a player stops playing and another player starts playing, it is possible to notify the latter player that the second setting related to the performance has been changed from the initial setting, and the latter player can freely choose whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting.

(Reference Invention 5)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is as follows:
an input means for allowing input by a player;
A determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling a performance based on a determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means includes:
A plurality of settings related to the performance can be changed in response to an input to the input means;
When the plurality of settings are different from the initial settings, the contents of the plurality of settings can be displayed in sequence in a specified first display area.

According to this configuration, when a plurality of settings related to production are set differently from the initial settings, the contents of the plurality of settings are sequentially displayed in the first display area. Therefore, compared to displaying the contents of multiple settings side by side, the display area for displaying the contents of multiple settings can be reduced, and while notifying the contents of multiple settings to the player, It is possible to secure a wide display area for displaying images and the like.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The performance control means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that the number of the plurality of settings that are different from the initial setting can be displayed in a second display area adjacent to the first display area.

According to this configuration, the number of multiple settings that have settings different from the initial settings is displayed in the second display area (close to the first display area), so the contents of multiple settings are not displayed at the same time. Due to this, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how many settings are different from the initial settings.

(Reference invention 6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol, and then stops and displays a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
and a performance control means for controlling execution of the performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
In a predetermined image display means, displaying a performance symbol in a variable manner as the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and haltingly displaying a performance symbol in a manner that indicates the result of the determination as the special symbol is stopped and displayed;
During the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the performance symbol is composed of identification information that allows the performance symbol to be distinguished from other performance symbols, and a decorative image added to the identification information. a first display control to display;
During the variable display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and that has the same display content as the decorative image is displayed in a predetermined display area of the image display means, and the similar image is used. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second display control that performs a presentation based on the desired effect.

According to this configuration, during the variable display of the special pattern, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and has the same display content as the decorative image may be displayed in a specified display area, and a performance using the similar image may be performed. In this way, since the display content of the similar image used in the performance is the same as that of the decorative image that constitutes the performance pattern, it is possible to make the player feel as if the performance using the similar image is being performed using the performance pattern, and the synergistic effect between the performance using the similar image and the performance displaying the performance pattern can effectively increase the interest of the performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
The performance control means is
As the first display control, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a first variable manner;
As the second display control, after displaying the similar image in a variable manner in a second variation mode that is common to the first variation mode, an effect is performed using the similar image displayed in the predetermined display area. It is characterized by this.

With this configuration, the similar images are displayed in a changing manner that is the same as the performance symbols, so it is possible to improve the effect of making the player feel as if the performance using the similar images is actually using the performance symbols, making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
The performance control means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that after the similar image used for the performance in the second display control is erased from the specified display area, a third display control can be further executed to display a performance pattern in the specified display area, the performance pattern being composed of a decorative image having display content different from that of the similar image.

According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the predetermined display area, a performance pattern including a decorative image whose display content is different from that of the similar image is displayed in the predetermined display area. This effectively prevents the problem that, after a certain effect pattern is displayed in a predetermined display area, the player misunderstands that the same effect pattern has been displayed again in the predetermined display area. It is possible to suppress it.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is a gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3,
The performance control means includes:
When the second display control is executed, after the similar image displayed by the second display control is erased from the image display means, a performance pattern visible to the player is displayed on the image display means.

According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the image display means, the effect pattern is displayed on the image display means in a visible manner. This makes it possible to effectively prevent problems such as a player mistakingly believing that multiple identical effect patterns are being displayed simultaneously when the same effect pattern is not being displayed multiple times at the same time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is a gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4,
The performance control means includes:
The presentation can be performed in any one of a plurality of presentation modes including a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode;
The second display control can be executed while the performance is being executed in the second performance mode, whereas the second display control is not executed while the performance is being executed in the first performance mode.

According to this configuration, while the performance is being performed in the second performance mode, the second display control that is not performed during the performance in the first performance mode is executed, so compared to the first performance mode, the second display control is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more interesting performance.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, displaying a special symbol on a predetermined symbol display means in a variable manner and then displaying a special symbol indicating the result of the determination in a stationary manner;
A performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance based on a determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means includes:
A first display control in which a performance pattern composed of a first partial image and a second partial image is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern in a predetermined image display means, and the performance pattern is displayed in a stopped manner in accordance with the stopped display of the special pattern in a manner showing the result of the judgment;
The display device is characterized in that it is capable of executing a second display control in which the first partial image and the second partial image are displayed individually, and these partial images are synthesized and displayed as the performance pattern.

According to this configuration, in addition to the case where the effect pattern including the first partial image and the second partial image is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed. These partial images may be combined and displayed as a performance pattern. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which production symbol will be displayed based on the displayed partial image, and if the first partial image and the second partial image remain combined. Compared to the above, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the performance in which the performance symbols are displayed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The performance control means is
Start displaying the second partial image after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of displaying the first partial image, and execute the second display control for composing and displaying these partial images as the effect pattern. It is characterized by being possible.

According to this configuration, the first partial image is displayed, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of display of the first partial image, the display of the second partial image is started in addition to the first partial image, and after that, these partial images are The images are combined and displayed as a performance pattern. In this way, the partial images constituting the performance design are displayed in order to show how the performance design is formed, so the performance design changes from the state where the performance design is composed of the first partial image and the second partial image. Compared to conventional gaming machines that do not change, it is possible to obtain extremely high performance effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
The second partial image is identification information for identifying the performance pattern from other performance patterns,
The first partial image is a decorative image that decorates the second partial image.

According to this configuration, the identification information as the second partial image and the decorative image as the first partial image are displayed separately, and these partial images are then synthesized and displayed as the performance pattern. In this way, the identification information and the decorative image that were displayed separately as two partial images are synthesized to form the performance pattern, so it is possible to obtain an extremely high performance effect compared to conventional gaming machines that simply display the performance pattern in a variable manner and then display it in a stationary manner.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, displaying a special symbol on a predetermined symbol display means in a variable manner and then displaying a special symbol indicating the result of the determination in a stationary manner;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
A performance control means for controlling the execution of the performance,
The performance control means includes:
During the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to pseudo-stop and display a performance symbol that notifies the result of the judgment,
When the presentation symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a manner that notifies the player that the determination means has determined that the special game will not be executed, an expectation image can be displayed to give the player hope that the special game will be executed.

With this configuration, the expectation image is displayed when the performance symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a manner that indicates a so-called miss, making it possible to execute a highly entertaining performance that prevents the player's anticipation for the execution of the special game from decreasing.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
a reservation means capable of suspending the right of judgment up to a predetermined number;
prior judgment means for making a preliminary judgment as to whether or not to execute the special game, before the judgment is made on the rights held by the holding means;
The performance control means is
Based on the result of the preliminary determination, a specific mode of production that notifies that the determination means has determined that the special game is not to be executed and also suggests that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed. It is possible to display the design pseudo-stop,
It is characterized in that the expected image may be displayed when the production pattern of the specific mode is displayed in a pseudo-stop display.

With this configuration, the pseudo-stop display of the specific performance pattern and the display of the expected image may occur simultaneously, so the synergistic effect between the specific performance pattern and the expected image can effectively increase the player's anticipation for the special game to be played, resulting in a high performance effect.

(Reference invention 9)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
an input means that can be input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
and a performance control means for controlling execution of a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A plurality of input prompting images can be simultaneously displayed to prompt the player to input to the input means during a valid period in which the input to the input means is valid;
changing the plurality of input promotion images into two or more effect images in response to inputs to the input means during the validity period;
The present invention is characterized in that the display contents of the two or more performance images suggest that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed.

According to this configuration, in response to an input to the input means, multiple input prompting images displayed simultaneously change to two or more effect images whose display content suggests that a special game may be executed. In this way, multiple input prompting images are displayed simultaneously, and the effect image after the change suggests that a special game may be executed, so it is possible to more effectively prompt the player to input compared to when only one input prompting image is displayed, or when the effect image after the change does not suggest the above possibility. The above configuration leads to the prevention of problems such as two or more effect images not being displayed because no input is made during the valid period, and the intended effect not being obtained, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
The performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that during the validity period, a moving effect display is executed in which the plurality of input prompting images move on the screen.

According to this configuration, since the moving effect display of a plurality of input promotion images is executed during the valid period, it is possible to give the player the impression that time has passed since the valid period started. As a result, it is possible to more effectively suppress the problem that an input is not made even though it is within the valid period.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2,
The performance control means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that, during the execution of the movement performance display, a remaining time indication image indicating the remaining time of the valid period is not displayed.

According to this configuration, since the remaining time suggestion image is not displayed while the moving effect display is being executed, displaying the remaining time suggestion image can effectively reduce the problem of reduced visibility of multiple input prompting images. It is possible to suppress the

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is a gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 9-1 to 9-3,
The two or more presentation images are characterized in that one has a display content suggesting that the special game may be executed, and the other has a display content suggesting that the special game will be executed.

With this configuration, in addition to cases where it is suggested that a special game may be played, there are also cases where it is suggested that a special game will be played, making it possible to provide a strong motivation for players who are hoping for the latter to make an input.

(Reference Invention 10)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
An input means for allowing input by a player;
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
A performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance based on a result of the determination,
The performance control means includes:
The presentation can be controlled in any one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode;
When controlling a presentation in the first presentation mode, it is determined whether or not to transition the first presentation mode to another presentation mode, regardless of an input to the input means;
When the presentation is being controlled in the second presentation mode, it is determined whether or not to transition from the second presentation mode to another presentation mode based on an input to the input means.

According to this configuration, when the presentation is controlled in the first presentation mode, the player cannot freely select whether or not to transition from the first presentation mode to another presentation mode, whereas when the presentation is controlled in the second presentation mode, the player can freely select whether or not to transition from the second presentation mode to another presentation mode. Therefore, a player who desires the presentation in the second presentation mode can freely select to continue the presentation in the second presentation mode by making a specified input to the input means, and as a result, a high presentation effect can be obtained.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1,
The performance control means includes:
When controlling the presentation in the second presentation mode, a selection screen is displayed on which a player can select whether or not to continue the presentation in the second presentation mode;
The selection screen includes a first option for continuing the presentation in the second presentation mode and a second option for ending the presentation in the second presentation mode,
The performance control means includes:
when a predetermined input is made to the input means while the selection screen is being displayed, a state of the selection screen is changed between a first state in which the first option is selected and a second state in which the second option is selected, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied with either the first option or the second option being selected, the selection is confirmed;
When the selection screen is displayed for the first time after the transition to the second presentation mode, the selection screen of the second aspect is displayed;
When the selection of the first option included in the selection screen is confirmed, the selection screen of the first aspect is displayed after a predetermined number of judgments have been made after the display of the selection screen has ended.

According to this configuration, when the selection screen is first displayed after transitioning to the second presentation mode, the selection screen of the second aspect (in which the second option for ending the presentation in the second presentation mode is selected) is displayed, whereas if the selection of the first option (for continuing the presentation in the second presentation mode) is confirmed, the selection screen of the first aspect (in which the first option for continuing the presentation in the second presentation mode is selected) is displayed after a predetermined number of judgments have been made since the display of the selection screen ended. In this way, for the second display of the selection screen in the second presentation mode, the selection screen in which the first option for continuing the presentation in the second presentation mode is selected is displayed. Therefore, the player does not need to perform any input to switch the display of the selection screen from the second aspect to the first aspect, and it is possible to easily continue the presentation in the second presentation mode.

(Reference invention 11)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
and a performance control means for controlling execution of the performance based on the result of the determination,
The performance control means is
The performance can be controlled in any one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
When transitioning the performance mode from the predetermined performance mode to the first performance mode, execute a first transition performance,
The present invention is characterized in that when transitioning the performance mode from a predetermined performance mode to the second performance mode, a second transition performance different from the first transition performance is executed.

According to this configuration, when the presentation mode transitions to the first presentation mode, the first transition presentation is executed, and when the presentation mode transitions to the second presentation mode, the second transition presentation is executed. In this way, different transition presentations are executed depending on the type of presentation mode to transition to, so the player can enjoy playing the game while predicting the presentation mode to transition to based on whether the transition presentation is the first transition presentation or the second transition presentation.

Note that any two or more inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 11 described above may be combined.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7a first display screen, 7b production pattern display area, 9c pending icon display area, 9e icon display area, 71a second display screen, 72a third display screen, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display part), 8 production pattern, 20 first starting hole, 21 second starting hole, 26 third starting hole, 30 first big winning hole, 35 second big winning hole, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 63a first production button, 63b second production button, 63c first production button detection switch, 63d second production button detection switch, 63e Key operation detection switch, 67 Speaker, 80 Main control board (main control unit), 81 Game control microcomputer, 90 Sub-control board (sub-control unit), 91 Production control microcomputer, 100 Image control board (image control unit), 101 Image control microcomputer, 103a Third effect pending display, 103b Fourth effect pending display, 106 Audio control board, 107 Lamp control board.

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, displaying a special symbol on a predetermined symbol display means in a variable manner and then displaying a special symbol indicating the result of the determination in a stationary manner;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
a reservation means for reserving the right of judgment up to a predetermined number;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed before the determination is made with respect to the right reserved by the reservation means;
A performance control means for controlling the execution of the performance,
The performance control means includes:
Based on the result of the judgment, during the execution of a first variation, which is a variation display of the special symbol performed in response to the judgment, a winning notification effect that displays a plurality of performance symbols in a combination that notifies that the special game will be executed, a first reach effect, a second reach effect in which the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed than the first reach effect, and a third reach effect in which the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed than the second reach effect, can be executed.
During the execution of a second variation, which is a variation display of the special symbol that is performed before the first variation, a first cut-in image can be displayed, which suggests that the special game may be executed based on a result of the advance judgment related to the right of judgment corresponding to the first variation;
When the second reach performance is executed in the first variation, during the execution of the second reach performance, a second cut-in image different from the first cut-in image is displayed, which suggests that the special game may be executed, and a third cut-in image having a display color different from that of the second cut-in image is displayed, which suggests that the special game may be executed.
When the third reach performance is executed in the first variation, there are a time when a fourth cut-in image having a display mode common to the second cut-in image and suggesting that the special game may be executed during the execution of the third reach performance, and a time when a fifth cut-in image having a display mode common to the third cut-in image and suggesting that the special game may be executed is displayed;
The possibility that the third cut-in image is displayed during the execution of the second reach performance in the first variation is higher than the possibility that the first cut-in image is displayed during the execution of the second variation,
The possibility that the fifth cut-in image is displayed during the execution of the third reach performance in the first variation is higher than the possibility that the first cut-in image is displayed during the execution of the second variation;
the possibility is different between when the second cut-in image is displayed during the execution of the second reach performance and when the fourth cut-in image is displayed during the execution of the third reach performance;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the possibility differs between when the third cut-in image is displayed during execution of the second reach performance and when the fifth cut-in image is displayed during execution of the third reach performance.

Images